JP2021194441A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine which can improve an interest for a game.SOLUTION: A game machine can execute a variation performance which varies plural drawing patterns according to a result of determination and then displays them on display means. When the variation performance in which a special game is not executed as a result of determination in a second mode is carried out, the variation performance in which pieces of display timing at which the plural drawing patterns turn from an invisible state or a hardly visible state to an easily visible state are differentiated is more easily executed in the variation performance based on that the number of first reservation memories is a specific number than in the variation performance based on that the number of second reservation memories is the specific number.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 67

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

In the gaming machine, for example, in Patent Document 1, there are cases where the symbol is changed when the game ball is won in the first starting port and where the symbol is changed when the game ball is won in the second starting opening. It is stated that it may be done.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2019-155132

However, in a gaming machine as described in the above patent document, there is room for further improvement in the production of the gaming in terms of improving the interest of the gaming.

An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of gaming.

The present invention that achieves the above object is realized as the following gaming machine. This gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 100) has a game control means (for example, a game control unit 200) for controlling the progress of a game and an effect control means (for example, an effect control unit 300) for controlling an effect. The gaming machine provided with the game control means (for example, the game control unit 200) has a first mode (for example, a low probability time saving no game state) and the first mode (for example, a low probability time saving no game state). ) Is controllable to a second mode (for example, a high-probability time-saving gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the first start port (for example, the first start port 121) or the second start port (for example, the second start port). It is possible to determine whether or not to perform a special game (for example, a big hit game) based on the winning of the game ball to the starting port 122), and a predetermined number of information related to the determination can be stored as a hold memory. The first holding memory for winning the prize to the first starting port (for example, the first starting port 121) and the winning related to the second starting port (for example, the second starting port 122). There are two hold storages, and the effect control means (for example, the effect control unit 300) has a plurality of symbols (for example, three decorative symbols 41) on the display means (for example, the image display unit 114) according to the result of the determination. ) Can be changed and then displayed, and the special game (for example, a jackpot game) is not executed as a result of the determination in the second mode (for example, a high-probability time-saving game state). Is performed, the variation effect based on the number of the second reserved storage being a specific number (for example, 4) (for example, the variation effect of FIGS. 58 (5) and 58 (6)) is higher than that of the variation effect. The variation effect (for example, the variation effect of FIGS. 67 (8) to 67 (12)) based on the number of the first reserved storage being the specific number (for example, 4) is the plurality of symbols (for example, the variation effect of FIGS. 67 (8) to 67 (12)). For example, the display timing at which the three decorative symbols 41) change from an invisible or difficult-to-see state (for example, the state of FIG. 67 (8)) to an easy-to-see state (for example, the state of FIG. 67 (11)) is different. It is a gaming machine characterized in that variable effects are easily executed.

It should be noted that the above-mentioned reference numerals in this column are exemplified in the description of the present invention, and the above-mentioned reference numerals do not reduce the present invention.

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of gaming.

It is a schematic front view of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on this embodiment. (A) is an enlarged view showing an example of a display arranged at the lower left of the gaming board, (b) is a partial plan view of the pachinko gaming machine, and (c) is arranged at the lower left of the gaming board. It is an enlarged view which shows an example of the sub information display. It is a figure which shows the internal structure of the control unit of the pachinko gaming machine of this embodiment. It is explanatory drawing of the image / acoustic control unit and the lamp control unit of this embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the functional structure of the game control part of this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the operation of the basic processing by a game control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the operation of the process at the time of power-off by a game control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the main control process of a game control part. It is a flowchart which shows the content of the start port switch processing. It is a flowchart which shows the content of a gate switch process. It is a flowchart which shows the content of a special symbol processing. It is a flowchart which shows the content of a jackpot determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the content of the variation pattern selection process. It is a flowchart which shows the content of the stopped processing. It is a flowchart which shows the content of the customer waiting setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the content of ordinary symbol processing. It is a flowchart which shows the content of the big prize opening processing. It is a flowchart which shows the content of the game state setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the content of the electric tulip processing. It is a figure which shows the composition example of the random number used in this embodiment, (a) is a figure which shows the composition example of a jackpot random number, (b) is a figure which shows the composition example of a jackpot symbol random number, (c). Is a diagram showing a configuration example of a reach random number, and (d) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a hit random number. It is a figure which shows the setting example of the variation pattern and the table used in the variation pattern selection process. It is a figure which shows the setting example of the variation pattern and the table used in the variation pattern selection process. It is a figure which shows the setting example of the variation pattern and the table used in the variation pattern selection process. It is a block diagram explaining the configuration example of the RAM of the game control unit, (a) is a block diagram which shows the structure of a storage area, (b) is a block diagram which shows each structure of the storage part shown in (a). Is. It is a block diagram explaining the structure example of the RAM of the effect control part, (a) is a block diagram which shows the structure of a hold storage area, (b) is a block which shows each structure of the storage part shown in (a). It is a figure. It is a flowchart which shows the content of the pre-determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the operation of an effect control part, (a) is a figure which shows the main process, (b) is a figure which shows interrupt process. It is a flowchart which shows the content of a command reception process. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the contents of the pre-determination effect selection process and the effect selection process of FIG. 28. It is a flowchart which shows the content of the jackpot effect selection process of FIG. 28. It is a flowchart which shows the content of the ending effect selection process of FIG. 28. It is a flowchart which shows the content of the customer waiting command reception process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the content of the effect button processing. It is a figure which shows the display information of the information display in each game section. It is a figure which shows the main processing of a general control unit. It is a figure which shows the accessory initial processing of a lamp control part. It is a figure which shows the origin return processing of a lamp control part. It is a figure which shows the initial operation process of a lamp control part. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a board accessory initial operation pattern determination table, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the specific example at the time of initial operation of various drive sources while changing a setting. It is a figure which shows the specific example in the case of initial operation of various drive sources during preparation for clearing RWM. It is a figure which shows the specific example at the time of initial operation of various drive sources during setting confirmation. It is a figure which shows the specific example in the case of initial operation of various drive sources after a setting change. It is a figure which shows the specific example in the case of initial operation of various drive sources after clearing RWM. It is a figure which shows the specific example in the case of initial operation of various drive sources after the setting confirmation. This is a variable effect pattern table used when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the winning of the first starting port in the low probability time-saving no-game state is a big hit. This is a variable effect pattern table used when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the winning of the first starting port in the low probability time-saving no-game state is a small hit or a miss. This is a variable effect pattern table used when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the winning of the second starting port in the high-probability time-saving game state is a big hit. This is a variable effect pattern table used when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the winning of the second starting port in the high-probability time-saving game state is a small hit or a miss. This is a variable effect pattern table used when a game ball wins a prize at the first starting port in a high-probability time-saving game state. It is a figure which shows one aspect of the effect performed by the effect control unit using the image display unit. It is a figure which shows one aspect of the effect performed by the effect control unit using the image display unit. It is a figure which shows one aspect of the effect performed by the effect control unit using the image display unit. It is a figure which shows one aspect of the effect performed by the effect control unit using the image display unit. It is a figure which shows one aspect of the effect performed by the effect control unit using the image display unit. It is a figure which shows one aspect of the effect performed by the effect control unit using the image display unit. It is a figure which shows one aspect of the effect performed by the effect control unit using the image display unit. It is a figure which shows one aspect of the effect performed by the effect control unit using the image display unit. It is a figure which shows one aspect of the effect performed by the effect control unit using the image display unit. It is a figure which shows one aspect of the effect performed by the effect control unit using the image display unit. It is a figure which shows one aspect of the effect performed by the effect control unit using the image display unit. It is a figure which shows one aspect of the effect performed by the effect control unit using the image display unit. It is a figure which shows one aspect of the effect performed by the effect control unit using the image display unit. It is a figure which shows one aspect of the effect performed by the effect control unit using the image display unit. It is a figure which shows one aspect of the effect performed by the effect control unit using the image display unit. It is a figure which shows one aspect of the effect performed by the effect control unit using the image display unit. It is a figure which shows one aspect of the effect performed by the effect control unit using the image display unit. It is a figure which shows one aspect of the effect performed by the effect control unit using the image display unit. It is a figure which shows one aspect of the effect performed by the effect control unit using the image display unit. It is a figure which shows one aspect of the effect performed by the effect control unit using the image display unit. It is a figure which shows one aspect of the effect performed by the effect control unit using the image display unit. It is a figure which shows one aspect of the effect performed by the effect control unit using the image display unit. (A), (B), (C), and (D) are explanatory diagrams of the execution time of each variation effect. It is a figure which shows the modification example of the effect in the variation effect example. It is a figure which shows the modification example of the effect in the variation effect example. It is a figure which shows the modification example of the effect in the variation effect example. It is a figure which shows the modification example of the effect in the variation effect example. It is a figure which shows the modification example of the effect in the variation effect example. It is a figure which shows the modification example of the effect in the variation effect example. It is a figure which shows the modification example of the effect in the variation effect example.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the accompanying drawings.
[Basic configuration of gaming machines]
FIG. 1 is a schematic front view of the pachinko gaming machine 100 according to the present embodiment.
The pachinko gaming machine 100 as an example of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1 is configured to pay out a prize ball when a gaming ball launched by a player's instruction operation wins a prize. The pachinko gaming machine 100 includes a gaming board 110 on which a gaming ball is launched, and a frame member 150 surrounding the gaming board 110. The game board 110 is detachably attached to the frame member 150.

The game board 110 has a game area 111 for playing a game with a game ball, a rail member 112 on the front surface, and a rail member 112 forming a passage through which the game ball launched from below rises toward the upper position of the game area 111. A guide member 113 for guiding the game ball is provided on the right side of the region 111.
In the present embodiment, an image display unit 114 for displaying various images for effect is arranged at a position of the game area 111 that is easily visible to the player. The image display unit 114 is provided with a display screen such as a liquid crystal display, and displays, for example, a decorative symbol for notifying the player of the lottery result (symbol change result) of the special symbol lottery as the game progresses by the player. Or display a production image due to the appearance of characters or items.
Further, on the front surface of the game board 110, three movable accessories 115 and a board lamp 116 used for various effects are provided. The three movable accessories 115 are arranged so as to be arranged in the left-right direction on the upper side of the image display unit 114. When the three movable accessories 115 are described individually, the movable accessory 115 arranged on the left side is referred to as "left movable accessory 115A". Further, the movable accessory 115 arranged in the center is referred to as a "medium movable accessory 115B". Further, the movable accessory 115 arranged on the right side is referred to as "right movable accessory 115C". Further, when each of the three movable accessories 115 is not particularly distinguished, it is simply referred to as a movable accessory 115. The movable accessory 115 performs various effects by operating on the game board 110. Further, the board lamp 116 emits light to perform various effects.

In the game area 111, a game nail, a windmill, and the like (not shown) for changing the direction in which the game ball falls are arranged. Further, in the game area 111, various accessories related to winning and lottery are arranged at predetermined positions. Further, the game area 111 is provided with an discharge port 117 that discharges a game ball launched into the game area 111 that has not won a prize in the winning port to the outside of the game area 111. The pachinko gaming machine 100 includes an out-ball detection switch (SW) 227 (see FIG. 3 to be described later) that detects an out-ball composed of a game ball flowing into the discharge port 117.

In the present embodiment, as various accessories related to winning and lottery, the first starting port 121 and the second starting opening 122 where the special symbol lottery (big hit lottery) starts when the game ball wins, and the second starting port 122 when the game ball passes are normal. A starting gate (hereinafter, simply referred to as a gate) 124 at which a symbol lottery (opening / closing lottery) is started is arranged on the game board 110. In FIG. 1, gates 124 are provided on the left and right sides of the game area 111, the gate 124 on the left side is described as 124L, and the gate 124 on the right side is described as 124R. Further, the first starting port 121 and the second starting port 122 referred to here refer to winning openings that trigger the operation of the predetermined special symbol display. Specifically, the first starting port 121 and the second starting port 122 are provided with switches (first starting port switch 211 and second starting port switch 212, which will be described later) for detecting the passage of a game ball at the time of winning a prize. Has been done. Then, when the game ball wins a prize in the first start port 121 or the second start port 122, the switch detects the passage of the game ball, which triggers the operation of the special symbol display.

The second starting port 122 includes an electric tulip (opening / closing member) 123 as a normal electric accessory that a pair of tulip flower-shaped blades opens and closes by an electric solenoid and lights up. In the electric tulip 123, when the wings are closed, it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second starting port 122, while when the wings are opened, the entrance of the second starting port 122 expands and the game ball moves to the second starting port 122. It is configured to be easy to enter. Then, when the electric tulip 123 wins the ordinary symbol lottery, the blades open for a specified time (for example, 0.15 seconds to 1.8 seconds) and a specified number of times (for example, 1 to 3 times) while lighting or blinking.

The pachinko gaming machine 100 has, as a gaming state, a low-probability state in which the winning probability is low and a high-probability state in which the winning probability is higher than the low-probability state, based on the winning probability of the jackpot lottery. Here, the high-probability state is more advantageous to the player than the low-probability state. Then, it is controlled to either a low probability state or a high probability state based on a predetermined condition.
Further, the pachinko gaming machine 100 has, as a gaming state, a state in which there is little chance of winning a prize in the second starting port 122 and a state in which there is more chance of winning a prize in the second starting port 122 than in a state without electric support. have. Then, under predetermined conditions such as, for example, triggered by the number of lottery of a big hit or a special symbol lottery, the state is controlled to be either an electric support state or an electric support state. The electric support state is, for example, one or more of shortening the normal symbol fluctuation time, extending the opening time of the electric tulip 123, and increasing the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery. It is a gaming state controlled by the combination.
Further, the pachinko gaming machine 100 has, as a gaming state, a time-saving state in which the special symbol variation time is long and a time-saving state in which the special symbol variation time is shorter than the time-saving non-state. Here, the time saving state is a state more advantageous to the player than the time saving state.
In this embodiment, the electric support state and the time saving state are controlled at the same time. Further, in the following description, the electric support state and the time saving state are simply referred to as the time saving state, and the electric support non-state and the time saving non-state are simply referred to as the time saving non-state.

Further, in the present embodiment, as other characters related to winning and lottery, a large winning opening 125 as a special electric character that opens according to the result of the special symbol lottery and a lottery even if the game ball wins a prize are performed. A normal winning opening 126 and a non-normal winning opening 126 are arranged on the game board 110. The large winning opening 125 is provided with a large winning opening door 125D that opens and closes the large winning opening 125. In the following description, the opening / closing state and opening / closing operation of the large winning opening door 125D may be described as the opening / closing state and opening / closing operation of the large winning opening 125 for convenience.
In the present embodiment, a display 130 for displaying the lottery result and the number of holdings is arranged at the lower left position of the game board 110.

By the way, in the pachinko gaming machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, the second starting opening and the large winning opening 125 provided with the electric tulip 123 are arranged in the right region of the gaming region 111. Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 100 of the present embodiment, when trying to win a prize in the second starting opening 122 or the large winning opening 125, the gaming ball is made to flow down to the right area of the gaming area 111. ..

Further, on the back surface of the game board 110, a game control board for determining the winning of a special symbol, an effect control board for comprehensively controlling the effect, an image control board for controlling the effect by images and sounds, various lamps, and the like. Various boards (not shown) such as a lamp control board that controls the effect of the movable accessory 115 are attached. Further, on the back surface of the game board 110, a switching power supply (not shown) that converts the supplied 24V AC power supply into a DC power supply and outputs it to various boards or the like is arranged.

When the player touches the handle 151 and rotates the lever 152 in the clockwise direction, the frame member 150 causes the game balls to be hit at a predetermined time interval (for example, 100 pieces per minute) with a striking force according to the operation angle. It is equipped with a launcher (not shown) that launches electrically at. Further, the frame member 150 includes a supply device (not shown) that sequentially supplies game balls to the launcher one by one at a timing linked to an operation by the player's lever 152, and a game ball supplied by the supply device to the launcher. It is equipped with a plate 153 for temporary storage. For example, a payout ball by a payout unit is paid out to the plate 153.
In the present embodiment, the plate 153 is configured by integrating the upper and lower plates, but a configuration example in which the upper plate and the lower plate are separated can also be considered. Further, a configuration example in which the handle 151 of the launcher emits light under predetermined conditions is also conceivable.

Further, the frame member 150 has a stop button 154 for temporarily stopping the launch of the game ball even when the player is in contact with the handle 151 of the launcher, and the game ball accumulated in the plate 153. It is equipped with a take-out button 155 for dropping it into a box (not shown) and taking it out.
Further, the frame member 150 includes a speaker 156 and a frame lamp 157 for notifying the gaming state and situation of the pachinko gaming machine 100 and performing various effects. The speaker 156 performs various effects by music, voice, and sound effects. The frame lamp 157 is composed of a light emitting body such as an LED, and performs various effects by light such as a pattern due to lighting / blinking and a difference in light emission color. As for the frame lamp 157, a configuration example that enables an effect of changing the irradiation direction of light can be considered.
Further, the frame member 150 includes a transparent plate (not shown) for separating the game board 110 from the player.

FIG. 2 is a diagram illustrating the pachinko gaming machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 2A is an enlarged view showing an example of a display 130 arranged at the lower left of the gaming board 110. FIG. 2B is a partial plan view of the pachinko gaming machine 100, and FIG. 2C is an enlarged view showing an example of a sub-information display 80 arranged at the lower left of the gaming board.
As shown in FIG. 2A, the display 130 of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is used for winning the first special symbol display 221 and the second starting port 122, which operate in response to the winning of the first starting port 121. It includes a second special symbol display 222 that operates correspondingly, and a normal symbol display 223 that operates corresponding to the passage of the gate 124. The first special symbol display 221 displays the lottery result by displaying the special symbol in a variable manner and then stopping the display based on the winning of the first starting port 121. The second special symbol display 222 displays the lottery result by displaying the special symbol in a variable manner and then stopping the display based on the winning of the second starting port 122. The first special symbol display 221 and the second special symbol display 222 perform cycle fluctuations (cycle display) in which the change of the display mode is one cycle (= 256 ms) a plurality of times, and stop when the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses. indicate.
Based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the gate 124, the normal symbol display 223 displays the normal symbol in a variable manner and then stops and displays the lottery result. In the present embodiment, the first special symbol display 221 and the second special symbol display 222 are each composed of a display device in which LEDs are arranged, and the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is displayed depending on the lighting mode thereof. Similarly, the ordinary symbol display 223 is also composed of a display device in which LEDs are arranged, and the lottery result of the ordinary symbol lottery is displayed depending on the lighting mode thereof.

Further, the display 130 operates in response to the hold on the first special symbol display 221 and the first special symbol hold display 218 and the second special symbol display 222. 2 The special symbol hold indicator 219 and the normal symbol hold indicator 220 that operate in response to the hold on the normal symbol display 223 are provided. In the present embodiment, the first special symbol hold indicator 218, the second special symbol hold indicator 219, and the ordinary symbol hold indicator 220 are each composed of a display device in which LEDs are arranged, and the number of holds is determined by the lighting mode thereof. Is displayed.

Here, the hold will be described. If the game ball wins a prize in the first starting opening 121 or the second starting opening 122 during the variable display operation of the special symbol (while the variable display for one winning prize is being performed), the special symbol is changing. In addition, it is not possible to start the variable display operation of the special symbol based on the later winning. Therefore, the later winnings are stored up to the specified number (for example, 4), and the right to start the special symbol for the winning game ball is until the variable display operation for the first winning game ball is completed. It is put on hold.
The same processing as for the special symbol is performed for the normal symbol. The fact that such a hold has been made and the number of holds (unchanged number) are displayed on the first special symbol hold indicator 218, the second special symbol hold indicator 219, and the ordinary symbol hold indicator 220.

Further, the display 130 includes a state display 224 that displays the state of the pachinko gaming machine 100. In the present embodiment, the status display 224 is composed of a display device in which three LEDs are arranged. One of the three LEDs lights up to indicate whether or not the state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is in a high probability state in which the winning probability of the special symbol lottery is high. The other one is to notify by lighting whether or not the state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is in a time-saving state in which the special symbol fluctuation time is short. Still another one is to notify by lighting whether or not the player is in an advantageous state by hitting right (by changing the hitting force of the game ball).

Further, the display 130 includes a round number display 225 that displays the number of rounds when the big winning opening 125 is operated in the big hit game performed according to the lottery result of the special symbol lottery. The jackpot game will be described later. The round number display 225 is composed of a display device in which LEDs are arranged, and the number of operating rounds of the big winning opening 125 in the big hit game is displayed depending on the lighting mode thereof.

Further, the display 130 includes a status confirmation display 226. The status confirmation display 226 is composed of one LED and is for indicating that the setting change mode described later or the setting confirmation mode described later is set, and when the mode is changed to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. The lighting of the LED is started, and when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed, the LED is turned off. In this way, since the status confirmation display 226 is provided on the front surface (front surface) of the gaming machine, it is possible to easily confirm whether or not the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is set. .. The status confirmation indicator 226 may be installed in front of (the surface) of the pachinko gaming machine 100, or may be installed in another place.

Further, in the present embodiment, the display is performed in the same display mode (lighting display) regardless of whether the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is set, but it is recognized which mode is set. It may be displayed as possible. For example, in the setting change mode, the status confirmation display 226 may be lit and displayed, and in the setting confirmation mode, the status confirmation display 226 may be blinked and vice versa.

Further, in the present embodiment, the status confirmation display 226 is provided as a dedicated display to indicate that the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is set, but the status confirmation display 226 may also be used as another display. For example, in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, the first special symbol display 221 and the second special symbol display 222, the first special symbol hold display 218, the second special symbol hold display 219, and the round number display are displayed. Since the 225, the status indicator 224, and the like are turned off, one or a plurality of LEDs of these indicators may be turned on.

The frame member 150 of the pachinko gaming machine 100 includes an input device for the player to input an effect. As shown in FIG. 2B, in the present embodiment, as an example of the input device, an effect button 161 and an effect key 162 adjacent to the effect button 161 and composed of a plurality of keys arranged in a substantially cross shape are used. Is arranged on the frame member 150. In the illustrated example, consider a case where an effect of accepting an operation of selecting one image from a plurality of images is performed. In this case, for example, by operating the effect key 162 composed of four keys arranged in a cross, the player instructs one of the plurality of images displayed on the image display unit 114, and presses the effect button 161. By operating it, it is possible to perform an effect such as selecting an instructed image. Further, as the form of the input device, in addition to the illustrated effect button 161 and effect key 162, various input forms such as a lever and a handle can be adopted depending on the content of the effect and the like.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 100 of the present embodiment, the sub first fluctuation display 81, the sub second fluctuation display 82, the sub first hold display 83, and the sub second hold display 84 are inside the game area 111. A sub-information display 80 including a sub-normal map fluctuation display 85, a sub-normal map hold display 86, and a sub right-handed display 87 is provided.
The sub-information display 80 is basically composed of LEDs, and is dynamically lit. The sub information display 80 is not provided with a display indicating that the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is set, such as the status confirmation display 226.

The sub first variable display 81 is for displaying (notifying) whether or not the first special symbol is in variable display, and the sub second variable display 82 is for displaying (notifying) whether or not the second special symbol is variable. It is for displaying (notifying) whether or not it is inside, and each is composed of one LED. Then, when the variation display of the corresponding special symbol is started, the LED blinks at a predetermined cycle (1 second) (lights up for 0.5 seconds → turns off for 0.5 seconds), and lights up when the corresponding special symbol is stopped and displayed. do. In other words, the sub-first fluctuation display 81 and the sub-second fluctuation display 82 repeatedly perform cycle display in which one blinking is one cycle (= 1 second), and when the corresponding special symbol is stopped and displayed. Light.

The sub-first variation display 81 and the sub-second variation indicator 82 may be used to notify the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol. In this case, it is advisable to turn on the LED in the case of a big hit and turn off the LED in the case of a loss.

The sub first hold indicator 83 is for displaying the number of first hold information (first hold number) described later, and the sub second hold indicator 84 is for displaying the number of second hold information described later (the number of second hold information). It is for displaying the second hold number), and each is composed of two LEDs. Then, when the number of holds is "0", the left and right LEDs are turned off, when the number of holds is "1", the LED on the left is turned on and the LED on the right is turned off, and when the number of holds is "2". The left and right LEDs light up, the left LED blinks when the number of holds is "3", the right LED lights up, and the left and right LEDs blink when the number of holds is "4".

The sub-normal map fluctuation display 85 is for displaying (notifying) the result of the winning lottery, and is composed of one LED. Then, when the variation display of the normal symbol is started, the LED blinks (variation display) at a predetermined interval. Then, when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed, the mode indicating the result of the winning lottery (lights up in the case of a hit, turns off in the case of a loss) is stopped and displayed.

In addition, in the sub-normal symbol variation display 85, it blinks during the fluctuation display of the normal symbol and turns on or off when the stop display is displayed so that only whether or not the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is being performed can be grasped. You may.

The sub-normal figure hold display 86 is for displaying the number of normal figure hold storages (the number of normal figure hold), and is composed of two LEDs. Then, when the number of reserved figures is "0", the left and right LEDs are turned off, and when the number of reserved pages is "1", the LED on the left side is turned on and the LED on the right side is turned off. When "2", the LED on the left side blinks and the LED on the right side lights up, and when the number of reserved figures is "4", the left and right LEDs blink.

The sub-right-handed display 87 is for urging the game ball to be launched toward the right side area of the game area 111 (so-called right-handed), and is composed of one LED. Then, the LED is turned on during the big hit state (special game) and the time-saving game state, and the LED is turned off in other game states.

[Control unit configuration]
Next, a control unit that performs operation control and signal processing in the pachinko gaming machine 100 will be described.
FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing an internal configuration of a control unit of the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment.
FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram of an image / acoustic control unit and a lamp control unit according to the present embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 3, the control unit includes a game control unit 200 as a main control means, which determines whether or not a special symbol has been won. Further, as sub-control means, an effect control unit 300 that comprehensively controls the effect and a payout control unit 330 that controls the payout of payout balls are provided.

[Configuration / function of game control unit]
The game control unit 200 is used as a CPU 201 that performs arithmetic processing when determining the winning of a special symbol, a ROM 202 that stores programs and various data executed by the CPU 201, and a working memory of the CPU 201. RAM 203 and

The game control unit 200 controls the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 in either a high-probability state or a low-probability state, a time-saving no state, or a time-saving state. As a result, the gaming states of the pachinko gaming machine 100 are a high-probability time-saving gaming state, which is a high-probability state and a time-saving state, a low-probability time-saving gaming state, which is a low-probability state and a time-saving state, and a high-probability state and a time-saving non-state. It is one of a low-probability time-saving no-game state, a low-probability state, and a low-probability time-saving no-game state. Then, the game control unit 200 switches between the high-probability state and the low-probability state, and switches between the time-saving non-state and the time-saving state based on a predetermined condition. Further, the game control unit 200 controls such as making the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery higher in the time saving state, shortening the normal symbol fluctuation time, extending the opening time of the electric tulip 123, and the like. I do.

The game control unit 200 performs a special symbol lottery when the game ball wins a prize in the first start opening 121 or the second start opening 122. Then, a special game such as a big hit game is performed according to the determination result of the special symbol lottery. In the special game, the game control unit 200 holds a predetermined number of rounds in which the large winning opening 125, which is a special electric accessory, is maintained in an open state until a predetermined condition (for example, 29.5 seconds have elapsed or 10 game balls have been won). Control to repeat only. Then, the game control unit 200 controls the opening / closing operation interval when the big winning opening 125 opens.

Further, the game control unit 200 performs a normal symbol lottery when the game ball passes through the gate 124. Then, the operation of the electric tulip is controlled according to the determination result of the normal symbol lottery.
Further, the game control unit 200 holds the game ball when the game ball wins the first start port 121 or the second start port 122 during the special symbol change, or the game ball passes through the gate 124 during the normal symbol change. Set the hold that occurs as a result.
Further, the game control unit 200 accompanies game control such as determination results of a special symbol lottery and a normal symbol lottery, change information between a high probability state and a low probability state, change information between a time saving state and a time saving state, and hold setting information. The information is sent to the effect control unit 300 by a command described later.

Further, when the game ball wins in the first starting port 121, the second starting port 122, the large winning opening 125, and the normal winning opening 126, the game control unit 200 hits one game ball according to the place where the game ball wins. An instruction is given to the payout control unit 330 to pay out a predetermined number of prize balls. For example, if a game ball wins in the first starting port 121, three prize balls, if a game ball wins in the second starting port 122, four prize balls, and if a game ball wins in the large winning opening 125, 13 prizes. When a game ball wins a ball or a normal winning opening 126, an instruction command (command) is sent to the payout control unit 330 so that 10 prize balls are paid out respectively. Even if it is detected that the game ball has passed through the gate 124, the payout control unit 330 is not instructed to pay out the prize ball linked to the game ball.
When the payout control unit 330 pays out the prize balls according to the instruction of the game control unit 200, the game control unit 200 acquires information regarding the number of paid out prize balls from the payout control unit 330. As a result, the number of prize balls paid out is managed.

As a detection means, the game control unit 200 includes a first start port detection unit (first start port switch (SW) 211) that detects the winning of the game ball to the first start port 121. , To the second starting port detection unit (second starting port switch (SW)) 212 for detecting the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 122, the electric tulip opening / closing unit 213 for opening and closing the electric tulip 123, and the gate 124. A gate detection unit (gate switch (SW) 214) for detecting the passage of the game ball is connected to the gate detection unit (SW) 214.
Further, the game control unit 200 includes a large winning opening detection unit (large winning opening switch (SW)) 215 for detecting the winning of a game ball to the large winning opening 125, and a large winning opening door 125D of the large winning opening 125. The large winning opening door opening / closing part 216 that sets the closed state and the protruding inclined open state, and the normal winning opening detection unit (ordinary winning opening switch (SW) 217) that detects the winning of the game ball to the ordinary winning opening 126. , Are connected.

Further, the game control unit 200 has a first special symbol hold indicator 218 that displays the number of unchanged holdings that have won a prize in the first starting port 121 during the change of the special symbol, and a second special symbol hold indicator 218 during the change of the special symbol. The second special symbol hold indicator 219 that displays the number of unchanged items that have been won in the starting port 122, and the normal symbol hold indicator that displays the number of unchanged items that have passed through the gate 124 while the normal symbol is changing. 220 and are connected.
Further, the game control unit 200 has a first special symbol display 221 that displays the result of a special symbol variation display and a special symbol lottery performed by winning a game ball to the first starting port 121, and a second starting port. The second special symbol display 222 that displays the variation display of the special symbol and the result of the special symbol lottery performed by winning the game ball to 122, and the variation display of the normal symbol and the normal symbol display that displays the result of the ordinary symbol lottery. The device 223 and the state display 224 that displays the state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 are connected.

Then, the detection signals detected by the first start port switch 211, the second start port switch 212, the gate switch 214, the large winning port switch 215, and the normal winning port switch 217 are sent to the game control unit 200. Further, the control signals from the game control unit 200 are the electric tulip opening / closing unit 213, the grand prize opening door opening / closing unit 216, the first special symbol holding indicator 218, the second special symbol holding indicator 219, and the normal symbol holding indicator 220. , 1st special symbol display 221 and 2nd special symbol display 222, normal symbol display 223 and status display 224. As a result, the game control unit 200 performs various controls related to the number of payout prize balls described above.

Further, on the surface side of the game control board, a signal for clearing the stored contents of the RAM 203 of the game control unit 200 or updating the set value (probability of being determined to be a big hit) at the stage of the advantage of the game is input. RAM clear switch 228, setting key switch 229 for inputting signals for shifting to the setting change mode and setting confirmation mode described later by operation using the setting key, performance information and settings that enable the actual performance of the gaming machine to be grasped. An information display 230 for displaying a value, other electronic components, and the like are mounted.

The information display 230 is composed of four 7-segment displays (230a to 230d, see FIG. 41 described later) arranged in the left-right direction. Then, the identification segment for displaying the identification information indicating the type (data type) of the performance information is configured by the two 7-segment displays 230a and 230b from the left, and set by the two 7-segment displays 230c and 230d from the right. A numerical segment for displaying numerical information indicating numerical values of values and performance information is configured (see FIG. 40). When displaying the set value, static lighting is performed, and when displaying performance information, dynamic lighting is performed.

Further, the game control unit 200 is connected to an external information terminal board 350 for a board that transmits various information to a host computer (not shown) installed in the hall. Then, the game control unit 200 transmits information regarding the number of prize balls paid out, information indicating the state of the game control unit 200, etc. acquired from the payout control unit 330 to the host computer via the external information terminal board 350 for the board. do.

[Configuration / function of payout control unit]
The payout control unit 330 includes a CPU 331 that performs arithmetic processing for controlling payout balls, a ROM 332 that stores programs and various data executed by the CPU 331, and a RAM 333 that is used as a work memory of the CPU 331. And have.
Then, the payout control unit 330 controls the payout of the payout ball based on the command sent from the game control unit 200.
Specifically, the payout control unit 330 acquires a command from the game control unit 200 to pay out a predetermined number of prize balls according to the place where the game ball has won a prize (first starting port 121 or the like). Then, the payout drive unit 334 is controlled so that the number of prize balls specified in the command is paid out. The payout drive unit 334 here is composed of a drive motor that sends out the game ball from the storage unit of the game ball.

Further, the payout control unit 330 includes a payout ball detection unit 335 that detects the number of prize balls actually paid out from the game ball storage unit by the payout drive unit 334, and a game ball in the storage unit (not shown). It detects whether or not the ball presence detection unit 336 that detects the presence or absence of storage of the ball and the plate 153 that holds the game ball used when the player plays the game and the prize ball paid out are in a full tank state. The full tank detection unit 337 is connected to the full tank detection unit 337. Then, the payout control unit 330 receives the detection signals detected by the payout ball detection unit 335, the ball presence detection unit 336, and the full tank detection unit 337, and performs predetermined processing according to these detection signals.
Further, the payout control unit 330 is connected to a frame external information terminal board 340 for transmitting various information to the host computer installed in the hall. Then, the payout control unit 330 may, for example, provide information on the number of prize balls instructed to pay out to the payout drive unit 334, information on the number of actually paid out prize balls detected by the payout ball detection unit 335, and the like. Is transmitted to the host computer via the external information terminal board 340 for the frame. Further, the same information is transmitted to the game control unit 200.

[Structure / function of production control unit]
The effect control unit 300 includes a CPU 301 that performs arithmetic processing for controlling the effect, a ROM 302 that stores programs and various data executed by the CPU 301, a RAM 303 that is used as a work memory of the CPU 301, and a date and time. It is equipped with a real-time clock (RTC) 304, which measures the data.
The effect control unit 300 sets the effect content based on, for example, the determination result of whether or not the special symbol lottery is won or not and the fluctuation pattern sent from the game control unit 200. At that time, the effect content may be set according to the operation input by receiving the operation input from the user using the effect button 161 or the effect key 162. In this case, for example, a signal (operation signal) corresponding to the operation is received from a controller (not shown) such as the effect button 161 and the operation content identified by the operation signal is reflected in the effect setting.
Further, when the game is interrupted for a predetermined period, the effect control unit 300 instructs the setting of the screen display for waiting for customers as one of the effects.
Further, the effect control unit 300 sets the effect content based on the change information of the high probability state and the low probability state, and the change information of the time reduction non-state and the time reduction state received from the game control unit 200.
Further, the effect control unit 300 sends a command instructing the execution of the set effect content to the image / sound control unit 310 and the lamp control unit 320.

Further, the effect control unit 300 is connected to an image / sound control unit 310 that controls an effect using images and sound, and a lamp control unit 320 that controls an effect using various lamps and movable accessories 115. Has been done.

[Configuration / function of image / acoustic control unit]
As shown in FIG. 4, the image / sound control unit 310 stores a CPU 311 that performs arithmetic processing for controlling an image expressing the effect content and sound, a program executed by the CPU 311 and various data. It includes a ROM 312, a RAM 313 used as a working memory of the CPU 311 and the like, a VDP (Video Display Processor) 314, a CGROM 315, and a SNDROM 316.

Then, the image / sound control unit 310 controls the image displayed on the image display unit 114 and the sound output from the speaker 156 based on the command sent from the effect control unit 300.
Specifically, the CGROM 315 has a symbol image and a background image displayed during the game on the image display unit 114, a decorative symbol for notifying the player of the lottery result, a character for displaying a notice effect to the player, and the like. Image data such as items are stored. Further, the SNDROM 316 stores various acoustic data such as music and sound that are synchronized with the image data or output from the speaker 156 independently of the image data, and sound effects such as jingles.
The CPU 311 analyzes animation patterns, creates a display list summarizing commands related to drawing, and sends the display list to VDP314 based on the hold number command or the variable effect start command sent from the effect control unit 300. conduct.

The VDP 314 reads out the image data and the acoustic data stored in the CGROM 315 and the SNDROM 316, respectively, based on the display list received from the CPU 311. Further, the VDP 314 performs drawing processing for background image display, symbol image display, symbol image variation, character / item display, etc. using the read image data, and voice processing using the read acoustic data. .. Then, the VDP 314 controls the screen display on the image display unit 114 by the image data that has been drawn. Further, the VDP 314 controls the sound output from the speaker 156 by the sound processed sound data.
In the present embodiment, the VDP 314 is configured to perform voice processing in addition to the drawing processing, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a processor dedicated to voice processing may be separately provided.

[Configuration / function of lamp control unit]
The lamp control unit 320 stores a CPU 321 that performs arithmetic processing for controlling the light emission of the panel lamp 116 and the frame lamp 157 and the operation of the movable accessory 115, and a program and various data executed by the CPU 321. It includes a ROM 322 and a RAM 323 used as a working memory of the CPU 321 and the like.
Then, the lamp control unit 320 controls lighting / blinking, emission color, and the like of the panel lamp 116 and the frame lamp 157 based on the command sent from the effect control unit 300. It also controls the operation of the movable accessory 115.

Specifically, the ROM 322 of the lamp control unit 320 contains lighting / blinking pattern data and emission color pattern data (emission pattern) of the panel lamp 116 and the frame lamp 157 according to the effect content set by the effect control unit 300. Data) is stored. The CPU 321 selects and reads out the light emission pattern data stored in the ROM 322 that corresponds to the command sent from the effect control unit 300. Then, the lamp control unit 320 controls the light emission of the panel lamp 116 and the frame lamp 157 based on the read light emission pattern data.
Further, the ROM 322 of the lamp control unit 320 stores the operation pattern data of the movable accessory 115 according to the effect content set by the effect control unit 300. The CPU 321 controls the operation of the movable accessory 115 by the read operation pattern data.

In the present embodiment, each of the game control unit 200, the effect control unit 300, the image / sound control unit 310, the lamp control unit 320, and the payout control unit 330 is a main board arranged on the rear surface of the game board 110. The game control board as a sub-board, the effect control board as a sub board, the image control board, the lamp control board, and the payout control board are individually configured.
Further, in the configuration example described with reference to FIG. 4, the effect button 161 and the effect key 162 are connected to the effect control unit 300 and controlled by the effect control unit 300, but the present invention is not limited thereto. The effect button 161 and the effect key 162 may be connected to the lamp control unit 320 and controlled by the lamp control unit 320.

[Functional configuration of game control unit]
Subsequently, the functional configuration of the game control unit 200 will be described.
FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing a functional configuration of the game control unit 200. As shown in FIG. 5, the game control unit 200 includes a random number acquisition unit 231, a normal symbol determination unit 232, a special symbol fluctuation control unit 233, and a special symbol determination unit 234 as functional units for executing various lottery processes. , Ordinary symbol variation control unit 236, and.
Further, the game control unit 200 includes a variation pattern selection unit 235 as a functional unit that executes processing associated with a special symbol variation.
Further, the game control unit 200 has a large winning opening motion control unit 237, an electric tulip motion control unit 238, and a prize ball processing unit 239 as functional units for executing data processing related to motion control of various accessories and prize balls. And an output control unit 240 and a random number control unit 241.

The random number acquisition unit 231 acquires a random number value used for the special symbol lottery and a random number value used for the normal symbol lottery. In the case of the random number value used for the special symbol lottery, specifically, on the condition that the game ball wins in the first starting port 121 and the second starting port 122, the numerical value in a predetermined range is set for each type of random number. One numerical value (random number value) is selected (acquired) from among them. The acquired random number value is used for determination by the special symbol determination unit 234. As will be described in detail later, the random numbers used in the special symbol lottery include a jackpot random number indicating whether or not it is a jackpot, a symbol random number indicating the type of jackpot, a variable pattern random number, a reach random number, and the like.
Further, in the case of the random value used for the ordinary symbol lottery, specifically, one numerical value (random value) is selected (acquired) from the numerical values in a predetermined range on condition that the game ball has passed through the gate 124. ). The acquired random number value is usually used for determination by the symbol determination unit 232. As the random numbers used in the ordinary symbol lottery, in addition to the hit random numbers indicating whether or not they are hits, symbol random numbers indicating the types of hits, variable pattern random numbers, and the like may be set.
When the special symbol lottery is performed, the special symbol variation control unit 233 controls the variation of the special symbol in the first special symbol display 221 or the second special symbol display 222 according to the lottery result.

At the start of the change of the special symbol, the special symbol determination unit 234 uses a random number table as shown in FIG. "Type" and "whether it is a small hit or a miss when the big hit is not won" are determined. That is, the random number acquisition unit 231 acquires a random number value related to the special symbol when the passage of the game ball is detected by the first start port switch 211 or the second start port switch 212, which is the detection means, and determines the special symbol. Based on the acquired random number value, the unit 234 determines whether or not to perform a special game (big hit game, etc.) that is advantageous to the player. The above-mentioned special symbol lottery (big hit lottery) refers to processing by the random number acquisition unit 231 and the special symbol determination unit 234.

Here, the "big hit" is divided into a plurality of types according to the game state generated after the end of the big hit game. Specifically, the type of jackpot is determined by the combination of the time-saving no state or the time-saving state, and the high-probability state or the low-probability state. That is, as the types of jackpots based on the gaming state that occurs after the end of the jackpot game, the jackpot that becomes a high-probability time-saving gaming state after the end of the jackpot game (hereinafter, the jackpot in the high-probability time-saving gaming state) and the low-probability time-saving gaming state. Big hit (hereinafter, big hit in low probability time saving game state), big hit in high probability time saving no game state (hereinafter, big hit in high probability time saving no game state), big hit in low probability time saving no game state (hereinafter, low) There is a possibility of a jackpot in a non-game state with a short probability. Each of these jackpots is associated with an individual special symbol, and the type of jackpot is determined according to the type of the special symbol won in the special symbol lottery.

Further, the "big hit" may be divided into a jackpot in which the jackpot game time is long and a large amount of game balls can be expected to be paid out, and a jackpot in which the jackpot game time is short and the payout of the game balls can hardly be expected. The former is called "long hit" and the latter is called "short hit". For example, in "long hit", a round in which the open state of the large winning opening 125 is maintained until a predetermined condition (for example, 29.5 seconds have elapsed or 10 game balls have been won) is repeated a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 times). Is done. Further, in the "short hit", a round in which the large winning opening 125 is opened for a certain period of time (for example, 0.9 seconds) is repeated a predetermined number of times (for example, twice).

In addition, when the big hit is not won, the "small hit" is a small hit game in which the big winning opening 125 is opened for a certain period of time (for example, 0.9 seconds) a predetermined number of times (for example, twice). Will be done. When the small hit is won, the game state before the small hit is continued even after the small hit game is completed. That is, when the gaming state at the time of winning the small hit is the high-probability time-saving gaming state, the high-probability time-saving gaming state is continued even after the end of the small hit game, and the gaming state does not shift. Similarly, when the gaming state at the time of winning the small hit is the low-probability time-saving non-game state, the low-probability time-saving non-game state is continued even after the end of the small hit game, and the gaming state does not shift.
Further, the "small hit" is a kind of "missing", and none of the above-mentioned gaming states that are advantageous to the player is set.

The variation pattern selection unit 235 selects the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol to be displayed on the first special symbol display 221 and the second special symbol display 222. Specifically, the variation pattern selection unit 235 can perform a reach effect in the determination result of whether or not to perform the jackpot game and the decorative symbol variation effect accompanying the special symbol variation (for example, 13.5 seconds or more). ) Is determined, and the fluctuation pattern is determined based on the judgment result and the like. Then, the special symbol variation control unit 233 controls the variation of the special symbol based on the variation pattern selected by the variation pattern selection unit 235. Details of the operations of the variation pattern selection unit 235 and the special symbol variation control unit 233 will be described later.
Here, "reach" is an effect for making the player expect a big hit in the decorative design described later.

The ordinary symbol determination unit 232 determines whether or not the lottery result of the ordinary symbol is "win or not" by using a random number table as shown in FIG. 20 (d) described later at the start of the fluctuation of the ordinary symbol. That is, the ordinary symbol determination unit 232 determines whether or not to perform an auxiliary game for opening and closing the electric tulip 123 based on the random number value for the ordinary symbol lottery acquired by the random number acquisition unit 231. Further, when a plurality of types of hits are set in the normal symbol lottery, the normal symbol determination unit 232 determines the "type of hit" when the determination result is a hit. The ordinary symbol lottery is a process performed by the random number acquisition unit 231 and the ordinary symbol determination unit 232.
The normal symbol variation control unit 236 controls the fluctuation of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display 223 according to the lottery result when the normal symbol lottery is performed.
The electric tulip motion control unit 238 opens the electric tulip 123 for a specified time and a specified number of times when the normal symbol lottery determines "hit" by the normal symbol determination unit 232, and the game ball is placed in the second starting port 122. Generate a state that makes it easy to win a prize. Further, when it is determined to be "off", such an open state of the electric tulip 123 is not generated. The operation pattern of the electric tulip 123 will be described later. For example, there are an operation pattern that opens once with an opening time of 0.15 seconds and an operation pattern that opens three times with an opening time of 1.80 seconds.

When the special symbol lottery determines "big hit" by the special symbol determination unit 234, the big prize opening operation control unit 237 has a big winning opening with an operation pattern specified based on the type of the winning jackpot as a big hit game. Controls the opening operation of 125. Further, when the special symbol lottery determines "small hit" by the special symbol determination unit 234, the large winning opening operation control unit 237 opens the large winning opening 125 as a small hit game for a specified time and a specified number of times. ..
The prize ball processing unit 239 sets a command for managing the number of prizes for various prizes related to prizes and lottery, and for controlling the payout of prize balls according to the prizes.
The output control unit 240 controls the output of control commands from the game control unit 200 to the effect control unit 300 and the payout control unit 330.
The random number control unit 241 updates various random number values acquired by the random number acquisition unit 231 at a predetermined timing.

[Basic operation of gaming machines]
Next, the basic operation of the pachinko gaming machine 100 will be described.
When the power is turned on, the game control unit 200 of the pachinko gaming machine 100 initializes and sets various devices as a basic process at startup. Then, after performing the basic processing, the game control unit 200 repeatedly executes the main control processing, which is a series of processing related to the progress of the game. Further, when the power is cut off, the game control unit 200 executes a series of power cut-off processes.

FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing the operation of the basic processing by the game control unit 200.
When the power of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned on, the game control unit 200 first permits access to the RAM 203 (see FIG. 3) (step (hereinafter, the step is referred to as “S”) 601). Then, the game control unit 200 determines whether or not the RAM clear switch for clearing the RAM 203 is ON (S602).
When the RAM clear switch is OFF (No in S602), the game control unit 200 then determines whether or not the backup flag related to the operation when the power is cut off is ON (S603).
When the backup flag is ON (Yes in S603), the game control unit 200 then determines whether or not the checksum created when the power is cut off is normal (S604).
When the checksum is normal (Yes in S604), the game control unit 200 then executes the return process (S605). In this return process, the game control unit 200 sets sub-control means such as the effect control unit 300 when returning from the state in which the power supply is cut off. Specifically, the game control unit 200 is in a gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 when the power is cut off (whether or not a jackpot game is in progress, either a high-probability state or a low-probability state, a time-saving state and a time-saving non-state). A command for setting a sub-control means is output to the effect control unit 300 so as to reflect any one of the above. Further, in this return process, the game control unit 200 turns off the backup flag.

On the other hand, if the RAM clear switch is ON (Yes in S602), the backup flag is OFF (No in S603), or the checksum is abnormal (No in S604), then the game control unit 200 is initialized. As a process, the stored contents of the RAM 203 are cleared (S606), and the work area of the RAM 203 is set (S607). Then, the game control unit 200 outputs a command for setting (initializing) the sub control means to the effect control unit 300, and sets the sub board (sub control means) (S608). The setting of the sub-board includes clearing the RAM 303, RAM 313, and RAM 323 mounted on each sub-board.

After the return process (see S605) is completed or the sub-board setting (see S608) is completed, the game control unit 200 sets various counters and timers used for the game control (S609). Then, the game control unit 200 determines whether or not the interrupt enable (S610), interrupt disable (S611), symbol random number control process (S612), initial value random number update process (S613), and power cutoff flag are ON. (S614) is repeatedly executed as a loop process.
Here, the interrupt enable (S610) and the interrupt disable (S611) are provided to enable the execution of the interrupt process during the execution of the loop process (S610 to S614). In the present embodiment, this interrupt process executes the main control process in the game control. The details of the main control process will be described later.
In the symbol random number control process (S612), the game control unit 200 updates the variable pattern random number used in the special symbol lottery.
In the initial value random number update process (S613), the game control unit 200 updates the initial values of various random numbers used in the game control.
In the determination of the power cutoff flag, when the power cutoff flag is OFF (No in S614), the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is not cut off, and the game control unit 200 performs main control by interruption together with loop processing (S610 to S614). Repeat the process. On the other hand, when the power cutoff flag is ON (Yes in S614), the game control unit 200 starts a process for shutting off the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 100 (process at the time of power cutoff).

FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing the operation of the power cutoff process by the game control unit 200.
In the power cutoff process, the game control unit 200 first clears the setting of the output port for performing various outputs (S701). Next, the game control unit 200 creates a checksum and stores it in the RAM 203 (S702). Next, the game control unit 200 turns on the backup flag (S703), prohibits access to the RAM 203 (S704), and shifts to an infinite loop.

[Main control processing of gaming machines]
Next, the main control process of the pachinko gaming machine 100 will be described.
In the main control process, the game control unit 200 controls the game in the pachinko gaming machine 100, instructs the effect control unit 300, which is a sub control means, to control the effect, and gives the payout control unit 330 a prize ball. Instruct to control the payout of.

FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing the main control process of the game control unit 200.
The main control process consists of a series of processes in game control, and is repeatedly executed at predetermined fixed time (for example, 4 milliseconds). In the present embodiment, the game control unit 200 generates an interrupt at predetermined fixed time intervals, and when the interrupt is enabled in the loop process shown in FIG. 6 (see S610), the main control is performed as the interrupt process. Execute the process. As shown in FIG. 8, in the main control process, random number update process, switch process, symbol process, electric accessory process, prize ball process, and output process are sequentially executed (S801 to S806).

In the random number update process (S801), the game control unit 200 calls the function (subroutine) of the random number control unit 241 to update the values of various random numbers used in the game control by the game control unit 200. Details of setting the random number and updating the random number value will be described later.

As the switch process (S802), a start port switch process and a gate switch process are performed.
In the start port switch process, the game control unit 200 calls the function (subroutine) of the random number acquisition unit 231 to monitor the states of the first start port switch 211 and the second start port switch 212 in FIG. 3, and the switch is turned on. If it becomes, the process for the special symbol lottery is executed. Further, as will be described in detail later, when the pre-determination process is performed in the first start port switch 211 and the second start port switch 212, each function (subroutine) of the special symbol determination unit 234 and the variation pattern selection unit 235 is called. Execute the process for pre-judgment.
In the gate switch process, the game control unit 200 calls the function (subroutine) of the random number acquisition unit 231 to monitor the state of the gate switch 214 in FIG. 3, and when the switch is turned on, it is for a normal symbol lottery. Execute the process.
The details of these switch processes will be described later.

As the symbol processing (S803), a special symbol processing and a normal symbol processing are performed.
In the special symbol processing, the game control unit 200 calls each function (subroutine) of the special symbol variation control unit 233, the special symbol determination unit 234, and the variation pattern selection unit 235, and executes the special symbol variation and the processing associated with the symbol variation. do.
In the normal symbol processing, the game control unit 200 calls the functions (subroutines) of the normal symbol determination unit 232 and the normal symbol fluctuation control unit 236, and executes the normal symbol change and the processing associated with the normal symbol change.
The detailed contents of these pattern processing will be described later.

As the electric accessory processing (S804), a large winning opening processing and an electric tulip processing are performed.
In the big prize opening process, the game control unit 200 calls the function (subroutine) of the big winning opening operation control unit 237 and controls the opening operation of the special winning opening 125, which is a special electric accessory, based on a predetermined condition.
In the electric tulip processing, the game control unit 200 calls the function (subroutine) of the electric tulip motion control unit 238 and controls the opening operation of the electric tulip 123, which is an ordinary electric accessory, based on a predetermined condition.
The detailed contents of these electric accessory processing will be described later.

In the prize ball processing (S805), the game control unit 200 calls the function (subroutine) of the prize ball processing unit 239, and sets a command for managing the number of prizes and controlling the payout of prize balls according to the prize.

In the output process (S806), the game control unit 200 calls the function (subroutine) of the output control unit 240, outputs a command for effect control to the effect control unit 300, and outputs a command for payout control to the payout control unit 330. Output. The effect control command is generated in each process from S802 to S804, and is stored (set) in the control command storage area provided in the RAM 203. The payout control command is generated in the process of S805 and is stored (set) in the storage area of the control command provided in the RAM 203. A storage area is set in the RAM 203 for each type of control command.

The output control unit 240 examines the storage area of each control command of the RAM 203 in order, and if the control command is stored in each storage area (that is, the control command is generated by the processing of S802 to S805). B), the control command is read and output to the output destination (effect control unit 300 or payout control unit 330).

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8, the output process is performed at the end of a series of main control processes. That is, the commands generated in each process of S802 to S805 by each of the above functions as the first processing means are stored in the corresponding storage area of the RAM 203 in each process. Then, after these processes, the output control unit 240 as the second processing means collectively outputs the commands generated in each process stored in the storage area of the RAM 203. In other words, in the present embodiment, when the main control process is executed for one cycle, the command generated in the execution of the one cycle is output after the last command generation in the execution of the one cycle is performed.

[Modification example of basic operation of gaming machine]
In the operation example described with reference to FIGS. 6 to 8, interrupts are permitted in the loop processing portion of the basic processing, and the main control processing consisting of a series of processing is executed as the interrupt processing. However, the main control process may be configured to be repeatedly executed at regular time intervals, and the specific realization means (execution procedure) is not limited to the examples shown in FIGS. 6 to 8. For example, the main control process may be incorporated into a series of operations of the basic process, the elapsed time may be measured at a predetermined timing, and the process may be returned to the main control process at regular time intervals (for example, 4 milliseconds). Further, while incorporating the main control process into a series of operations of the basic process, an interrupt is generated at regular time intervals and an interrupt is generated, as in the operation described with reference to FIGS. 6 to 8. It may be configured to return to the main control process incorporated in the basic process.

When outputting the command generated in the basic processing, as a general rule, each time the command is generated, it is stored in the command storage area of the RAM 203, and the function of the output control unit 240, which is the second processing means, is called. Output. The basic process is different from the main control process related to the progress of the game, and is a special process such as an initial operation performed only when the power is turned on. In addition, since the processing procedure of the basic processing may change due to branching based on conditions such as the state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 when the power is turned on, the generated command is promptly output so that there is no omission in the output processing. It is a process. In addition, in response to a specific processing request, such as when commands are continuously generated by multiple related processes, a processing procedure is adopted in which multiple commands are stored in the command storage area of RAM 203 and output collectively. May be.

[Random number update processing by the game control unit]
The random number value as the determination information used for various lottery in the game control such as the special symbol lottery is counted by the counter, and the random number update process (S801) of the main control process shown in FIG. 8 starts from a predetermined initial value. One is added each time it is done. Then, the value at the time when each lottery is performed is acquired in the start port switch process (FIG. 9) and the gate switch process (FIG. 10), and is used in the special symbol process (FIG. 11) and the normal symbol process (FIG. 16). To. The counter of this random number value is an infinite loop counter, and after the counted random number value reaches the maximum value of the set random number (for example, 299 for the jackpot random number shown in FIG. 20A described later). , Returns to the initial value again. Further, since the random number update process is performed at regular intervals, if the initial value of each random number is specified, the winning value may be estimated based on the update interval and the information of the initial value. Therefore, after returning to the basic process shown in FIG. 6 from the main control process, the initial value of each random number is randomly changed in the initial value random number update process of S613.

[Starting port switch processing by the game control unit]
FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing the contents of the start port switch process among the switch processes shown in S802 of FIG.
In this start port switch process, a process for winning a prize at the first start port 121 and a process for winning a prize at the second start port 122 are sequentially performed. Referring to FIG. 9, the game control unit 200 first determines whether or not the game ball has won a prize in the first start port 121 and the first start port switch 211 has been turned on (S901). When the first start port switch 211 is turned on, the game control unit 200 then determines whether or not the number of unchanged hold numbers U1 in the winning of the first start port 121 is less than the upper limit value (S902). .. In the example shown in FIG. 9, the upper limit is set to four. When the holding number U1 has reached the upper limit value (No in S902), the winning of the unvariable portion cannot be held any more, so that the processing for winning at the first starting port 121 is terminated.

On the other hand, when the hold number U1 is less than the upper limit value (Yes in S902), the random number acquisition unit 231 of the game control unit 200 acquires the random number value for the determination by the winning this time and stores it in the RAM 203 (S903). .. Here, since the prize is won in the first starting port 121, a random number value for a special symbol lottery is acquired. The random number value acquired at this time is a value updated by the random number update process of S801. Then, the result of the special symbol lottery is determined in the later special symbol processing by this random value. The random value referred to here is a jackpot random value that determines a jackpot, a small hit, or a miss, and the type of jackpot (time saving state or time saving no state after the end of the big hit game, high probability state and low probability state, long hit, short). The symbol random value (big hit symbol random value) that determines the hit), the fluctuation pattern random value for specifying the fluctuation pattern in the symbol fluctuation, and the fluctuation pattern (variation time) that can execute the reach effect described later when the value is lost. Includes reach random values, etc. that determine whether or not.

Next, the game control unit 200 performs a preliminary determination process (S904). In the pre-judgment process, a random number is generated by a special symbol process for a winning ball (reserved ball) whose random number has already been acquired by winning a prize at the starting port but has not yet been determined by the special symbol process described later. It is a process of determining the random number before the determination (predetermination).

Then, the effect control unit 300 of the present embodiment determines the random number by the special symbol processing based on the determination result (preliminary determination result) of the random number determined by the prior determination processing, and the determination result is notified. Before that, a notice effect suggesting the determination result can be performed. In this advance notice effect, for example, the image display unit responds to the generation of a winning ball (reserved ball) in which a random number has already been acquired by winning a prize at the starting port but the random number has not yet been determined by special symbol processing. It is performed by using the hold display effect (described later) displayed on 114. By the advance notice effect based on this advance determination, the player is suggested to the player the determination result when the random number is subsequently determined by the special symbol processing with respect to the reserved ball corresponding to the advance determination related to the advance notice effect. As a result, the player can play the game while having an expectation for the reserved ball. The details of the advance notice production based on the preliminary judgment will be described later.

Then, the game control unit 200 adds 1 to the value of the reserved number U1 (S905).
After that, the game control unit 200 sets the pre-determination result command including the pre-determination information by the pre-determination process of S904 in the RAM 203 in order to notify the effect control unit 300 of the pre-determination result (S906).
Further, the game control unit 200 sets the hold number increase command for notifying the effect control unit 300 of the increase in the hold number U1 by S905 in the RAM 203 (S907), and ends the process for winning in the first start port 121. ..

Next, processing for winning a prize at the second starting port 122 is performed. Referring to FIG. 9, the game control unit 200 then determines whether or not the game ball has won a prize in the second start port 122 and the second start port switch 212 has been turned on (S908). When the second start port switch 212 is turned on, the game control unit 200 next determines whether or not the unchanged number of reservations U2 in the winning of the second start port 122 is less than the upper limit value (S909). ). In the example shown in FIG. 9, the upper limit is set to four. If the number of holds U2 has reached the upper limit (No in S909), the winning of the unvariable portion cannot be held any more, so that the processing for winning at the second starting port 122 is terminated.

On the other hand, when the hold number U2 is less than the upper limit value (Yes in S909), the random number acquisition unit 231 of the game control unit 200 acquires the random number value for the lottery due to the current winning and stores it in the RAM 203 (S910). .. Here, since the prize is won in the second starting port 122, the random number values for the special symbol lottery (big hit random value, big hit symbol random value, reach random value, variable pattern random value, etc.) are acquired in the same manner as in S903 above. To. The random number value acquired at this time is a value updated by the random number update process of S801. Then, the result of the special symbol lottery is determined in the later special symbol processing by this random value.

Next, the game control unit 200 performs a preliminary determination process (S911). The content of this pre-determination process is the same as that of S904 described above.
Then, the game control unit 200 adds 1 to the value of the reserved number U2 (S912).
After that, the game control unit 200 sets the pre-determination result command including the pre-determination information by the pre-determination process of S911 in the RAM 203 in order to notify the effect control unit 300 of the pre-determination result (S913).
Further, the game control unit 200 sets the hold number increase command for notifying the effect control unit 300 of the increase in the hold number U2 by S912 in the RAM 203 (S914), and ends the process for winning the prize at the second start port 122. ..

[Gate switch processing by the game control unit]
FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing the contents of the gate switch processing when the game ball passes through the gate 124.
In this gate switch process, the game control unit 200 first determines whether or not the game ball has passed through the gate 124 and the gate switch 214 is turned on (S1001). When the gate switch 214 is turned ON, the game control unit 200 then determines whether or not the unchanged hold number G is less than the upper limit value (S1002). In the example shown in FIG. 10, the upper limit is set to four. If the number of holds G has reached the upper limit (No in S1002), it is not possible to hold any more unvariable winnings, so the gate switch processing is terminated.

On the other hand, when the hold number G is less than the upper limit value (Yes in S1002), the random number acquisition unit 231 of the game control unit 200 acquires the random number value for the lottery due to the current winning and stores it in the RAM 203 (S1003). .. Here, since the prize is won at the gate 124, a random value (such as a winning random value) for a normal symbol lottery is acquired.

Next, the game control unit 200 adds 1 to the value of the hold number G (S1004).
After the value of the hold number G is added in S1004, the game control unit 200 sets the hold number G increase command in the RAM 203 to notify the effect control unit 300 of the increase in the hold number G by S1004 (S1005). The process for winning a prize at the gate 124 is terminated.

[Special symbol processing by the game control unit]
FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special symbol processing among the symbol processing shown in S803 of FIG.
In this special symbol processing, the special symbol fluctuation control unit 233 of the game control unit 200 first checks whether or not the jackpot game flag is ON in the setting of the flag set in the RAM 203 (hereinafter, flag setting) (hereinafter, flag setting). S1101). Here, the jackpot game flag is a flag set to identify that the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot.

When the jackpot game flag is ON, the pachinko gaming machine 100 is already in the jackpot, so the special symbol processing is terminated without starting the special symbol variation (Yes in S1101). On the other hand, when the jackpot game flag is OFF (No in S1101), the special symbol variation control unit 233 then determines whether or not the current state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is undergoing special symbol variation (S1102). When the special symbol is not changing (No in S1102), the special symbol change control unit 233 then performs processing related to the reserved numbers U1 and U2 (see FIG. 9) of the unchanged portion of the special symbol (S1103 to S1106). In the present embodiment, since the number of reservations U1 related to the winning of the first starting port 121 and the number of holdings U2 related to the winning of the second starting port 122 are distinguished, this process is also performed individually for each corresponding starting port. ..

Specifically, the special symbol variation control unit 233 first determines whether the number of reservations U2 related to the winning of the second starting port 122 is 1 or more (S1103). When the hold number U2 is 1 or more (Yes in S1103), the special symbol fluctuation control unit 233 subtracts 1 from the value of the hold number U2 (S1104). On the other hand, when the holding number U2 = 0 (No in S1103), the special symbol fluctuation control unit 233 then determines whether the holding number U1 related to the winning of the first starting port 121 is 1 or more (S1105). When the hold number U1 is 1 or more (Yes in S1105), the special symbol fluctuation control unit 233 subtracts 1 from the value of the hold number U1 (S1106). On the other hand, when the number of reservations U1 = 0 (No in S1105), it means that there is no prize for starting the lottery of the special symbol, so that the special symbol change is not started and the customer waiting setting process of another routine is performed. Is executed to end the process (S1116).
In this embodiment, the process related to the number of pending U2s related to the winning of the second starting port 122 is prioritized. That is, when the hold number U2 is 1 or more, the process related to the hold number U2 is performed, and when the hold number U2 = 0, the process related to the hold number U1 is performed (see S803 to S806). On the other hand, regardless of which of the first starting port 121 and the second starting port 122 is won, the control may be such that the reserved numbers U1 and U2 are subtracted in the order of winning.

After subtracting the hold number U1 or the hold number U2 in S1104 or S1106, the special symbol fluctuation control unit 233 turns off the customer waiting flag set in the flag setting of the RAM 203 (S1107). The customer waiting flag is a flag for identifying that the pachinko gaming machine 100 is in the customer waiting state, and is set in the customer waiting setting process (S1116, see FIG. 15 to be described later).

Next, the special symbol variation control unit 233 executes a jackpot determination process and a variation pattern selection process by another routine (S1108, S1109). Although details will be described later, setting information for variation of the special symbol (big hit symbol, game) that is variablely displayed on the first special symbol display 221 and the second special symbol display 222 by the jackpot determination process and the variation pattern selection process. The state, fluctuation pattern, etc.) are determined. It should be noted that these information are included in the fluctuation start command sent to the effect control unit 300.

After that, the special symbol variation control unit 233 is displayed by the first special symbol display 221 and the second special symbol display 222 shown in FIG. 2 based on the setting contents determined by the jackpot determination process and the variation pattern selection process. The change of the special symbol is started (S1110). Then, a variation start command including setting information (big hit symbol, game state, variation pattern, etc.) indicating the setting contents is generated and set in the RAM 203 (S1111). The fluctuation start command set in S1111 is transmitted to the effect control unit 300 in the output process shown in S806 of FIG.

When it is determined in S1102 that the special symbol is changing (Yes in S1102), or after the change start command is set in S1111, the special symbol change control unit 233 determines whether or not the fluctuation time has elapsed (S1112). ). That is, it is determined whether or not the elapsed time from the start of the variation of the special symbol in S1110 has reached the variation time set in the variation pattern selection process of S1109. If the fluctuation time has not elapsed (No in S1112), the special symbol variation is continued, so that the special symbol processing ends as it is.

On the other hand, when the fluctuation time has elapsed (Yes in S1112), the special symbol fluctuation control unit 233 first determines the fluctuation of the special symbol in the first special symbol display 221 and the second special symbol display 222 in the jackpot determination process of S1108. It stops at the symbol determined in (S1113). A variable stop command for stopping the decorative symbol described later is set in the RAM 203 (S1114). Then, the stopped processing of another routine is executed (S1115). The details of the stopped processing will be described later. The fluctuation stop command set in S1114 is transmitted to the effect control unit 300 in the output process shown in S806 of FIG.
If a prize is given to the second starting port 122 while the special symbol is changed due to the winning of the first starting port 121, the special symbol triggered by the winning of the first starting port 121 is generated. During the fluctuation of, the special symbol may be changed triggered by the winning of the second starting port 122. Further, for example, when a prize is given to the first starting port 121 while the special symbol is changed due to the winning of the second starting port 122, the special winning of the second starting port 122 is triggered. During the change of the symbol, the special symbol may be changed triggered by the winning of the first starting port 121.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 11, after subtracting the value of the hold number U2 or the hold number U1 (see S1104 and S1106), the jackpot determination process and the variation pattern selection process are executed (see S1108 and S1109). Not limited to this.
In the special symbol processing, after the jackpot determination processing and the fluctuation pattern selection processing are executed, a processing in which the value of the hold number U2 or the hold number U1 is subtracted may be executed. In this case, in the variation pattern selection process, the variation pattern is selected based on the value of the hold number U2 or the hold number U1 before the subtraction.

[Big hit judgment processing by the game control unit]
FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot determination process (S1108 in FIG. 11).
In this jackpot determination process, the special symbol determination unit 234 of the game control unit 200 first determines the jackpot random number value in the special symbol lottery this time (S1201), and determines whether or not it is a jackpot or a small hit (S1202). , S1205). Whether or not a jackpot or a small hit is determined is whether or not the value of the jackpot random number acquired in S903 or S910 in FIG. 9 matches the value set as the winning value of the jackpot or the value set as the winning value of the small hit. It is determined by determining whether or not (see FIG. 20 (a)).

When the result of the random number determination in S1201 is a big hit (Yes in S1202), the special symbol determination unit 234 then determines the jackpot symbol random number value (S1203). Depending on the result of this determination, the type of jackpot (big hit in the high-probability time-saving gaming state, jackpot in the low-probability time-saving non-game state, etc.) is determined. Which jackpot will be won is determined by which of the values preset for each type of jackpot matches the value of the jackpot symbol random number acquired in S903 or S910 in FIG. 9 (FIG. 20 (Fig. 20). b) See).

After the above determination, the special symbol determination unit 234 sets a symbol (big hit symbol) representing the type of jackpot determined by the determination of the jackpot symbol random number in the RAM 203 as setting information (S1204).

When the result of the random number determination in S1201 is a small hit (No in S1202, Yes in S1205), then the special symbol determination unit 234 uses a symbol indicating that it is a small hit (hereinafter referred to as a small hit symbol) as setting information. It is set in RAM 203 (S1206).

When the result of the random number determination in S1201 is neither a big hit nor a small hit (No in S1202 and S1205), then the special symbol determination unit 234 uses the symbol indicating that the lottery has been missed (hereinafter referred to as the missed symbol) as setting information in the RAM 203. (S1207).

[Variation pattern selection processing by the game control unit]
FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the contents of the variation pattern selection process (S1109 in FIG. 11).
In this variation pattern selection process, the variation pattern selection unit 235 of the game control unit 200 first refers to the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 (whether it is a time saving state or a time saving state, and a high probability state or a low probability state). (S1301). Then, using the determination result of S1202 in the jackpot determination process (FIG. 12), it is determined whether or not a jackpot has been achieved in this special symbol lottery (S1302). Then, in the case of a big hit (Yes in S1302), the fluctuation pattern selection unit 235 reads the fluctuation pattern table for the big hit from the ROM 202 and sets it in the RAM 203 (S1303).

On the other hand, when there is no big hit (No in S1302), the fluctuation pattern selection unit 235 then determines a random number value for determining whether or not to perform a so-called reach effect for the player to expect a big hit. (S1304). Whether or not to perform the reach effect is determined by determining whether or not the value of the reach random number acquired in S903 or S910 in FIG. 9 matches the preset value (see FIG. 20 (c)). ..
When the reach effect is performed as a result of the determination using the random value (Yes in S1305), the variation pattern selection unit 235 reads the variation pattern table for reach from the ROM 202 and sets it in the RAM 203 (S1306). Further, when the reach effect is not performed (No in S1305), the variation pattern selection unit 235 reads the variation pattern table for removal from the ROM 202 and sets it in the RAM 203 (S1307).
Here, the fluctuation pattern table is a plurality of fluctuation patterns (variation time 3 seconds, 7 seconds, 13 seconds, 15 seconds, 30 seconds, 60 seconds, 90 seconds, etc.) prepared in advance and the value of the fluctuation pattern random number. It is a table associated with.

Next, the variation pattern selection unit 235 determines the variation pattern random value using the variation pattern random value acquired in S903 or S910 of FIG. 9 and the variation pattern table set in S1303, S1306, and S1307 (S1308). ). That is, the variation pattern selection unit 235 refers to the variation pattern table set in the RAM 203, and selects the variation pattern according to the random number value of the variation pattern random number. Therefore, even if the same random number value is acquired, the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 (whether it is a time-saving state or a time-saving state, and a high-probability state or a low-probability state), and the result of a special symbol lottery (whether or not a big hit is made). , If there is no big hit, whether or not to perform reach effect), etc., the reference variation pattern table is different, so the determined variation pattern is different.

After that, the variation pattern selection unit 235 sets the variation pattern selected in S1308 in the RAM 203 as setting information (S1309). The fluctuation pattern setting information set in S1309 is included in the fluctuation start command set in S1111 of FIG. 11, and is transmitted to the effect control unit 300 by the output process shown in S806 of FIG. The details of the fluctuation pattern selected in this embodiment and its setting will be described later.

[Processing during stop by the game control unit]
FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing the contents of the stopped processing (S1115 in FIG. 11).
In this stopped processing, the game control unit 200 first checks whether or not the flag indicating the time saving state (hereinafter referred to as the time saving flag) is turned on in the flag setting of the RAM 203 (S1401). When the time saving flag is ON (Yes in S1401), the game control unit 200 subtracts 1 from the value of the lottery number (variation number) J in the time saving state (S1402), and whether or not the lottery number J becomes 0. (S1403). Then, if the number of lottery times J = 0 (Yes in S1403), the time saving flag is turned off (S1404). The operation of turning on the time reduction flag and the setting of the initial value of the lottery number J are performed in the game state setting process (FIG. 18) in the large winning opening process (FIG. 17) described later.

When the time saving flag is OFF (No in S1401), after turning off the time saving flag in S1404, or when the value of the lottery number J after subtraction in S1402 is not 0 (No in S1403), then the game control The unit 200 checks whether or not the flag indicating the high probability state (hereinafter referred to as the high probability flag) is turned on in the flag setting of the RAM 203 (S1405). If both the high-probability flag and the previous time-saving flag are ON, it is in the high-probability time-saving game state, and if the high-probability flag is ON and the time-saving flag is OFF, it is in the high-probability time-saving non-game state. be.

When the high probability flag is ON (Yes in S1405), the game control unit 200 subtracts 1 from the value of the lottery number (variation number) X in the high probability state (S1406), and has the lottery number X become 0? Check whether or not (S1407). Then, if the number of lottery times X = 0 (Yes in S1407), the high accuracy flag is turned off (S1408). The operation of turning on the high accuracy flag and the setting of the initial value of the lottery number X are performed in the game state setting process (FIG. 18) in the large winning opening process (FIG. 17) described later.

When the high accuracy flag is OFF (No in S1405), after the high accuracy flag is turned OFF in S1408, or when the value of the lottery count X after subtraction in S1406 is not 0 (No in S1407), then The game control unit 200 determines whether or not a big hit has been achieved in this special symbol lottery (S1409). Then, in the case of a big hit (Yes in S1409), the game control unit 200 then determines the type of the big hit (S1410). Here, as an example of determining the type of jackpot, whether or not it is a long hit is determined.

Here, the determination of whether or not it is a big hit can be made based on the determination result of the big hit determination process (FIG. 12). For example, if any of the symbols shown in the chart of FIG. 20 (b) described later is set, it is Yes in S1409. If the missing symbol or the small hit symbol is set in the RAM 203 by the jackpot determination process, the result is No in S1409.

When the type of jackpot is long hit (Yes in S1410), the game control unit 200 turns on the long hit game flag (S1411). As a result, the setting of the gaming state of the RAM 203 becomes the jackpot gaming state (long hit gaming state) in which the type of jackpot is a long hit. It should be noted that here, there is no distinction between a high-probability state and a low-probability state in the long hit. Whether the state becomes a high probability state or a low probability state is specified by turning on the corresponding flag in the game state setting process (FIG. 18) in the large winning opening process (FIG. 17) described later.

When the type of big hit is not a long hit (No in S1410), the game control unit 200 turns on the short hit game flag (S1412). As a result, the setting of the gaming state of the RAM 203 becomes the jackpot gaming state (short hit gaming state) in which the type of jackpot is a short hit. As in the case of long hits, short hits do not distinguish between high-probability states and low-probability states.

After turning on the jackpot game flag in S1411 or S1412, the game control unit 200 initializes the values of the lottery counts J and X (S1413). Further, the game control unit 200 turns off the time saving flag when the time saving flag is ON in S1401 and the lottery number J is not 0 in S1403 (S1414). Similarly, when the high accuracy flag is ON in S1405 and the lottery number X is not 0 in S1407, the high accuracy flag is turned OFF (S1414).

After initializing the values of the lottery counts J and X in S1413, the game control unit 200 starts the opening operation (S1417). Here, the content of the opening operation differs depending on which of S1411 and S1412 the winning game flag is turned ON. In other words, the opening operation is set according to the determination result of the special symbol lottery.
After that, the game control unit 200 sets the opening command in the RAM 203 (S1418) for performing the effect in the opening operation according to the jackpot game flag in the effect control unit 300, and ends the stopped processing. This opening command is transmitted to the effect control unit 300 in the output process shown in S806 of FIG.

On the other hand, if the result of the special symbol lottery this time is not a big hit (No in S1409), then the game control unit 200 determines whether or not the result of the special symbol lottery this time is a small hit (S1415). ). If it is not a small hit (No in S1415), the stopped processing is terminated.
On the other hand, in the case of a small hit (Yes in S1415), the game control unit 200 starts the small hit game (S1416). As a result, the setting of the gaming state of the RAM 203 becomes the small hit gaming state. In the small hit game, as described above, the large winning opening 125 is opened and closed a predetermined number of times, and the game ends after a predetermined time has elapsed.

[Customer waiting setting processing by the game control unit]
FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing the contents of the customer waiting setting process (S1116 in FIG. 11).
In this customer waiting setting process, the game control unit 200 first checks whether or not the customer waiting flag is ON in the flag setting of the RAM 203 (S1501). Here, the customer waiting flag is a flag set to identify that the pachinko gaming machine 100 is in the customer waiting state.

When the customer waiting flag is ON, the pachinko gaming machine 100 is in the customer waiting state, so the process ends as it is (Yes in S1501). On the other hand, when the customer waiting flag is OFF, the game control unit 200 generates a customer waiting command and sets it in the RAM 203 (S1502), and turns the customer waiting flag ON (S1503). The customer waiting command set in S1502 is transmitted to the effect control unit 300 by the output process shown in S806 of FIG. The customer waiting flag is set in a state where the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped and there is no hold.

[Normal symbol processing by the game control unit]
FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing the contents of the normal symbol processing among the symbol processing shown in S803 of FIG.
In this normal symbol processing, the normal symbol fluctuation control unit 236 of the game control unit 200 first checks whether or not the auxiliary game flag is ON in the flag setting of the RAM 203 (S1601). Here, the auxiliary game flag is a flag that is set when a normal symbol lottery is won. The state in which the auxiliary game flag is set is a state in which the electric tulip 123 is opened according to the electric tulip process (FIG. 19) described later, and it is easy to win a prize in the second starting port 122 (auxiliary game state).

When the auxiliary game flag is ON, the auxiliary game state is already in effect and the normal symbol is stopped. Therefore, the normal symbol processing is terminated without starting the normal symbol change (Yes in S1601). On the other hand, when the auxiliary game flag is OFF (No in S1601), the normal symbol variation control unit 236 then determines whether or not the current state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is in the normal symbol variation (S1602). When the normal symbol is not changing (No in S1602), the normal symbol change control unit 236 then determines whether the pending number G (see FIG. 10) of the unchanged portion of the normal symbol is 1 or more (S1603). When the number of holds G = 0 (No in S1603), it means that there is no prize for starting the lottery of the normal symbol, so the process ends without starting the normal symbol change.

On the other hand, when the hold number G is 1 or more (Yes in S1603), the normal symbol fluctuation control unit 236 subtracts 1 from the value of the hold number G (S1604). Then, the ordinary symbol determination unit 232 determines the winning random number in the ordinary symbol lottery this time, and determines whether or not the ordinary symbol lottery has been won (S1605). Whether or not a winner is won is determined by determining whether or not the value of the winning random number acquired in S1003 of FIG. 10 matches the value set as the winning value in the table or the like shown in FIG. 20 (d) described later. It is determined.

Next, the normal symbol fluctuation control unit 236 sets the normal symbol according to the result of the normal symbol lottery (S1606). That is, when the normal symbol lottery is won, the symbol representing the winning (hereinafter, the winning symbol) is set in the RAM 203 as the setting information. On the other hand, when the normal symbol lottery is not won, a symbol indicating that the lottery has been lost (hereinafter referred to as a missed symbol) is set in the RAM 203 as setting information.

Next, the normal symbol fluctuation control unit 236 sets the fluctuation time of the normal symbol (S1607). This fluctuation time is set based on the time reduction flag set in the processes of S1404 and S1414 in FIG. 14, and S1804 and S1807 in FIG. 18 described later. That is, when the time saving flag is ON at the time of setting by S1607, it is set to a short time (for example, 1.5 seconds), and when the time saving flag is OFF, it is set to a long time (for example, 4.0 seconds). Will be done. After this setting, the normal symbol fluctuation control unit 236 starts the normal symbol fluctuation in the normal symbol display 223 shown in FIGS. 2A and 3 based on the setting content of S1607 (S1608). It should be noted that the fluctuation pattern of the normal symbol can also be determined by lottery. In this case, for example, when the game ball passes through the gate 124, the random number acquisition unit 231 acquires the fluctuation pattern random number value of the normal symbol, and in S1607, the normal symbol fluctuation control unit 236 obtains the fluctuation pattern random number value of the normal symbol. By making a determination, the fluctuation time is set.

After starting the fluctuation of the normal symbol in S1608, or when it is determined in S1602 that the normal symbol is changing (Yes in S1602), the normal symbol fluctuation control unit 236 determines whether or not the fluctuation time has elapsed (S1609). ). That is, it is determined whether or not the elapsed time from the start of the fluctuation of the normal symbol in S1608 has reached the fluctuation time set in S1607. If the fluctuation time has not elapsed (No in S1609), the normal symbol fluctuation is continued, so that the normal symbol processing ends as it is.

On the other hand, when the fluctuation time ends (Yes in S1609), the normal symbol fluctuation control unit 236 stops the fluctuation of the normal symbol in the normal symbol display 223 (S1610). Then, the normal symbol variation control unit 236 determines whether or not the determination result of S1605 is a winning (S1611). If it is a win (Yes in S1611), the auxiliary game flag is turned ON (S1612). On the other hand, if the lottery is missed (No in S1611), the normal symbol processing is terminated without turning on the auxiliary game flag.

[Large winning opening processing by the game control unit]
FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing the contents of the large winning opening processing in the electric accessory processing shown in S804 of FIG.
In this big prize opening process, the big winning opening operation control unit 237 of the game control unit 200 first checks whether or not the big hit game flag is ON in the flag setting of the RAM 203 (S1701). When the jackpot game flag is OFF, there is no prize in the jackpot 125, so the jackpot processing is terminated (No in S1701). On the other hand, when the jackpot game flag is ON (Yes in S1701), the jackpot motion control unit 237 then opens the pachinko gaming machine 100 in the motion control at the time of the jackpot started in the stopped processing (FIG. 14). It is determined whether or not the operation is in progress (S1702).

When the pachinko gaming machine 100 is opening (Yes in S1702), the large winning opening operation control unit 237 then determines whether or not the time (opening time) for which the preset opening operation should be performed has elapsed. (S1703). If the opening time has not elapsed, the opening operation at the large winning opening 125 is continued, so the large winning opening process is terminated (No in S1703). On the other hand, if the opening time has elapsed (Yes in S1703), then the large winning opening operation control unit 237 sets the operation of the large winning opening 125 (S1704) and initializes the winning number C (C = 0). (S1705), the value of the number of operating rounds R of the large winning opening 125 is added by 1 from the current value (S1706), and the large winning opening 125 is started (opened) (S1707).

In the operation setting of S1704, the operation pattern of the large winning opening 125 and the number of rounds (the number of operation rounds) to be operated by the operation pattern are set. As an example of the case where the big winning opening 125 operates, there are a case where it is a big hit of a long hit or a short hit and a case where it is a small hit in a special symbol lottery. The operation pattern and the number of rounds are set variously according to the types of these hits. In the big hit game, it is stipulated that the big winning opening 125 is continuously operated a plurality of times (multiple rounds). As an example, in the case of a long hit, for example, 15 rounds (15R) are operated, and in one round, 29.5 seconds of opening is performed once. In the case of a short hit, for example, it is operated for 2 rounds (2R), and in 1 round, it is opened once for 0.9 seconds. To further explain, it is opened for 0.9 seconds, closed for 1.0 second, and then opened for 0.9 seconds. On the other hand, in the case of a small hit, for example, it is opened for 0.9 seconds, closed for 1.0 second, and then opened for 0.9 seconds. Here, when the operation with a short hit and the operation with a small hit are compared in the above example, the opening for 0.9 seconds is performed twice. That is, the operation of the large winning opening 125 seen by the player is the same in the case of the short hit and the case of the small hit, and the short hit and the small hit are distinguished only from the operation of the large winning opening 125 on the game board 110. You can't.

In the case of a small hit, it is stipulated by law that the cumulative opening time of the large winning opening 125 must be set within 1.8 seconds. On the other hand, in the case of a big hit (long hit or short hit), the big winning opening 125 must be opened a plurality of times in a row. Therefore, when it is difficult to visually distinguish between the operation with a small hit and the operation with a short hit as described above, in the case of a small hit, the cumulative opening time in one operation is within 1.8 seconds. An operation mode in which the large winning opening 125 is opened twice or more is set, and in the short hit, the number of rounds equal to the number of times the small hit is opened is set.

Next, the large winning opening operation control unit 237 determines whether or not the opening time in the operation pattern set in S1704 has elapsed (S1708). If the open state of the large winning opening 125 has not passed the opening time (No in S1708), then in the large winning opening operation control unit 237, the number of winnings C to the large winning opening 125 is a specified number (for example, 9). (S) It is determined whether or not it is more than or equal to (S1709). If the opening time has not elapsed and the number of winnings C is less than the specified number, the operating state (opening state) of the large winning opening 125 is continued, so that the large winning opening process is terminated (No in S1709). ). On the other hand, when the opening time has elapsed (Yes in S1708) or when the winning number C reaches the specified number (Yes in S1709), the large winning opening operation control unit 237 ends the operation of the large winning opening 125 (closed). (S1710).

Next, the large winning opening operation control unit 237 determines whether or not the number of operating rounds R of the large winning opening 125 has reached the maximum value set in S1704 (S1711). Then, if the maximum value is not reached, the remaining operations are performed, so that the large winning opening process is terminated (No in S1711).

When the number of rounds R of the operation of the large winning opening 125 reaches the maximum value (Yes in S1711), the large winning opening operation control unit 237 then starts the ending operation (S1712). Here, the content of the ending operation corresponds to the state of the big hit game flag among the ending operations set in each of the long hit game and the short hit game.
After that, the big winning opening operation control unit 237 sets the ending command in the RAM 203 for performing the production in the ending operation according to the big hit game flag in the effect control unit 300 (S1713). This ending command is transmitted to the effect control unit 300 in the output process shown in S806 of FIG.

Next, the large winning opening operation control unit 237 resets the number of rounds R of the operation of the large winning opening 125 to 0 (S1714), and then performs an ending operation in which the elapsed time from the start of the ending operation is preset. It is determined whether or not the power time (ending time) has passed (S1717). If the ending time has not elapsed, the ending operation is continued, so the large winning opening process is terminated (No in S1717). On the other hand, if the ending time has elapsed (Yes in S1717), then the big winning opening operation control unit 237 turns off the big hit game flag after passing through the game state setting process by the game control unit 200 (S1718). The large winning opening process is completed (S1719). The content of the game state setting process will be described later.

When it is determined in S1702 that the pachinko gaming machine 100 is not in the opening (No in S1702), then the large winning opening operation control unit 237 determines whether or not the ending is in progress (S1715). Then, if the ending is in progress (Yes in S1715), the operations after S1717 are executed.

On the other hand, if the pachinko gaming machine 100 is not in the ending (No in S1715), then the large winning opening operation control unit 237 determines whether or not the large winning opening 125 is operating (opening) (S1716). Then, if it is not in operation (No in S1716), the operation after S1705 is executed, and if it is in operation (Yes in S1716), the operation after S1708 is executed.
It should be noted that the effect performed in the small hit game described above is the same as the effect performed in the short hit game, and it is not possible to distinguish between the short hit and the small hit from the effect.

[Game state setting process]
FIG. 18 shows the contents of the game state setting process (S1718) by the game control unit 200, which is executed when the ending time has elapsed (Yes in S1717).
When the game state setting process is performed, the jackpot game flag is ON in S1701 of FIG. 17 as a premise. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 18, the game control unit 200 first determines the type of the jackpot (S1801, S1802, S1803, S1806). These determinations can be made, for example, based on the type of symbol set as setting information in the RAM 203 in the jackpot determination process (FIG. 12). Since these judgments are substantially the same as those of S1202, S1203, and S1205 in the jackpot judgment processing (FIG. 12), the judgment results of S1202, S1203, and S1205 may be used.

If it is a small hit (Yes in S1801), the game state is not changed, so the game state setting process is terminated.
When the type of jackpot is a jackpot in a low-probability time-saving game state (No in S1801, Yes in S1802, Yes in S1803), the game control unit 200 turns on the time-saving flag (S1804). As a result, the game state of the RAM 203 is set to the low-probability time-saving game state. Further, the game control unit 200 sets the initial value of the lottery number J (S1805), and ends the game state setting process. The initial value of the lottery number J is 100 times in the illustrated example. Therefore, if the lottery in the low-probability time-saving game state is performed 100 times, the low-probability time-saving game state ends and the low-probability time-saving non-game state is reached.

On the other hand, when the type of jackpot is a jackpot in a low-probability time-saving non-game state (No in S1801, Yes in 1802, No in S1803), the game control unit 200 performs processing without turning on both the time-saving flag and the high-accuracy flag. finish. Therefore, the setting of the gaming state of the RAM 203 for the gaming after this jackpot is a low-probability time-saving non-gaming state.

When the type of jackpot is a jackpot in a high-probability time-saving game state (No in S1801, S1802, Yes in S1806), the game control unit 200 turns on the time-saving flag (S1807) and sets the initial value of the number of lottery J. (S1808). In this case, the initial value of the lottery number J is 10,000 times in the illustrated example. Further, the game control unit 200 turns on the high accuracy flag (S1809) and sets the initial value of the lottery number X (S1810). The initial value of the lottery number X is 10,000 times in the illustrated example. As a result, the game state of the RAM 203 is set to the high-probability time-saving game state. Then, if the lottery in this high-probability time-saving game state is performed 10,000 times, the high-probability time-saving game state ends, and the low-probability time-saving non-game state is established.

On the other hand, when the type of jackpot is a jackpot in a high-probability time-saving non-game state (No in S1801, S1802, S1806), the game control unit 200 turns on only the high-probability flag (S1809), and the initial value of the number of lottery times X. (10000 times) is set (S1810). As a result, the setting of the gaming state of the RAM 203 becomes a high-probability time-saving non-gaming state. Then, if the lottery in this high-probability time-saving no-game state is performed 10,000 times, the high-probability time-saving no-game state ends, and the low-probability time-saving no-game state is reached.

[Electric tulip processing by the game control unit]
FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the contents of the electric tulip processing among the electric accessory processing shown in S804 of FIG.
In the electric tulip processing, the electric tulip motion control unit 238 of the game control unit 200 first checks whether or not the auxiliary game flag is ON in the flag setting of the RAM 203 (S1901). When the auxiliary game flag is OFF, the electric tulip 123 is not opened, so the electric tulip processing is terminated (No in S1901). On the other hand, when the auxiliary game flag is ON (Yes in S1901), the electric tulip motion control unit 238 then determines whether or not the electric tulip 123 is operating (S1902).

When the electric tulip 123 is not operating (No in S1902), the electric tulip operation control unit 238 sets the operation pattern of the electric tulip 123 (S1903), and operates the electric tulip 123 with the set operation pattern (S1904). .. Here, the operation pattern is set based on the time reduction flag set in the processing of S1404, S1414 in FIG. 14, S1804, S1807 in FIG. 18, and the like. For example, if the time saving flag is OFF at the time of setting by S1903, an operation pattern that opens once with an opening time of 0.15 seconds is set, and if the time saving flag is ON, the opening time is 1.80 seconds. An operation pattern that opens three times in time is set. In this way, normally, when the time saving flag is ON (when the time saving state is in the state), the electric tulip 123 is opened a plurality of times for a long time, and it becomes easy to win a prize in the second starting port 122 (electric chew support). Is done. It should be noted that a plurality of operation patterns (types of auxiliary games) of the electric tulip 123 when the time reduction flag is ON or OFF are prepared, and the operation is performed according to the type of hit determined by the normal symbol processing (see FIG. 16). It may be configured to set a pattern.

When it is determined in S1902 that the electric tulip 123 is operating (Yes in S1902), or after the electric tulip 123 is operated in S1904, the electric tulip operation control unit 238 elapses the opening time in the set operation pattern. It is determined whether or not it has been done (S1905). If the opening time has not elapsed, the operating state (opening state) of the electric tulip 123 is continued, so that the electric tulip processing is terminated (No in S1905). On the other hand, if the opening time has elapsed (Yes in S1905), the electric tulip motion control unit 238 turns off the auxiliary game flag and ends the electric tulip processing (S1906).

[Random number judgment method]
Here, a random number determination method, which is performed in the jackpot determination process (FIG. 12), the variation pattern selection process (FIG. 13), the normal symbol process (FIG. 16), and the like, will be described in detail.
FIG. 20 is a diagram showing a configuration example of a random number (determination table) used in the special symbol lottery and the ordinary symbol lottery in the present embodiment.
FIG. 20 (a) shows a configuration example of a jackpot random number used in a special symbol lottery, FIG. 20 (b) shows a configuration example of a jackpot symbol random number used in a special symbol lottery, and FIG. 20 (c) shows a low probability time saving. An example of a reach random number used in a special symbol lottery performed when a game ball is won in the first starting port 121 in a game state, and FIG. 20 (d) shows an example of a winning random number used in a normal symbol lottery. , Each is shown.

Referring to FIG. 20A, as the determination value of the jackpot random number, the jackpot when the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 at the time of jackpot determination is in the low probability state and the jackpot when the gaming state at the time of jackpot determination is in the high probability state. Two types of and a small hit are set. The range of random numbers (big hit random numbers) is 300, 0 to 299. In the case of a special symbol lottery (big hit lottery) in a low probability state, only one winning value is set, and the winning probability is 1/300. Further, in the case of a special symbol lottery in a high probability state, 10 winning values are set, and the winning probability is 10/300 (= 1/30). That is, in the illustrated example, when the starting ports 121 and 122 are won in a high probability state and the special symbol lottery is performed, the winning probability is 10 times higher than in the case where the special symbol lottery is performed in the low probability state. Further, the winning value of the small hit is set to three regardless of whether it is in the low probability state or the high probability state, and the winning probability is 3/300 (= 1/100).
Here, to explain by taking a special symbol lottery in a low probability state as an example, the jackpot random number values (see S903 and S910) acquired by winning a prize in the first starting port 121 or the second starting port 122 are shown in FIG. 20. It is determined whether or not the value matches "5", which is the winning value of the big hit lottery in the low probability state in (a). Although detailed description is omitted, the same applies to the special symbol lottery in a high probability state and the special symbol lottery for small hits.

With reference to FIG. 20B, five types of jackpot symbols are prepared: low-probability symbol A, low-probability symbol B, high-probability symbol A, high-probability symbol B, and latent symbol. Here, the low-probability symbol A and the low-probability symbol B are symbols indicating that they are jackpots in a low-probability state, and among them, the low-probability symbol A is a jackpot in a long hit (8 rounds) and a low-probability short-time gaming state. Show that there is. The low-probability symbol B indicates that it is a long hit (4 rounds) and a big hit in a low-probability short-time gaming state. The high-probability symbol A and the high-probability symbol B indicate that they are long hits (15 rounds) and big hits in a high-probability time-shortening gaming state. The high-probability symbol C and the high-probability symbol D indicate that they are long hits (8 rounds) and big hits in a high-probability time-saving gaming state. The high-probability symbol E indicates a short hit (2 rounds) and a high-probability short-time non-game state jackpot. The latent probability symbol is a symbol indicating that it is a short hit (2 rounds) and a big hit in a high-probability short-time non-game state. Therefore, the high-probability symbol B and the latent probability symbol have the same gaming state after the big hit game, but the latent probability symbol is a condition for performing a latent effect that does not clearly notify the player that the high-probability symbol is in the high-probability state. Therefore, it is provided separately from the high-probability symbol B. The range of random number values is 250 from 0 to 249. Further, in the jackpot symbol random number, a winning value is set for each of the first starting port 121 and the second starting port 122, which trigger the special symbol lottery.

In the low-probability symbol A, 35 values are assigned as winning values to both the first starting port 121 and the second starting port 122. Therefore, if the jackpot is won, the probability of winning the low probability symbol A is 35/250 (= 7/50).
In the low-probability symbol B, 15 values are assigned as winning values to both the first starting port 121 and the second starting port 122. Therefore, if the jackpot is won, the probability of winning the low probability symbol B is 15/250 (= 3/50).

In the high-probability symbol A, 20 values are assigned as winning values when the first starting port 121 is won. Therefore, if a big hit is won in the special symbol lottery started by winning the first starting port 121, the probability of winning in the high probability symbol A is 20/250 (= 2/25).
On the other hand, 150 values are assigned as winning values when a prize is won in the second starting port 122. Therefore, if a big hit is won in the special symbol lottery started by winning the second starting port 122, the probability of winning in the high probability symbol A is 150/250 (= 15/25).

In the high-probability symbol B, five values are assigned as winning values when the first starting port 121 is won. Therefore, if a big hit is won in the special symbol lottery started by winning the first starting port 121, the probability of winning in the high probability symbol B is 5/250 (= 1/50).
On the other hand, 25 values are assigned as winning values when a prize is won in the second starting port 122. Therefore, if a big hit is won in the special symbol lottery started by winning the second starting port 122, the probability of winning in the high probability symbol B is 25/250 (= 1/10).

In the high-probability symbol C, 25 values are assigned as winning values when the first starting port 121 is won. Therefore, if a big hit is won in the special symbol lottery started by winning the first starting port 121, the probability of winning in the high probability symbol C is 25/250 (= 1/10).
On the other hand, 10 values are assigned as winning values when a prize is won in the second starting port 122. Therefore, if a big hit is won in the special symbol lottery started by winning the second starting port 122, the probability of winning in the high probability symbol B is 10/250 (= 1/25).

In the high-probability symbol D, 25 values are assigned as winning values when the first starting port 121 is won. Therefore, if a big hit is won in the special symbol lottery started by winning the first starting port 121, the probability of winning in the high probability symbol D is 25/250 (= 1/10).
On the other hand, 10 values are assigned as winning values when a prize is won in the second starting port 122. Therefore, if a big hit is won in the special symbol lottery started by winning the second starting port 122, the probability of winning in the high probability symbol D is 10/250 (= 1/25).

In the high-probability symbol E, 25 values are assigned as winning values when the first starting port 121 is won. Therefore, if a big hit is won in the special symbol lottery started by winning the first starting port 121, the probability of winning in the high probability symbol E is 25/250 (= 1/10).
On the other hand, five values are assigned as winning values when a prize is won in the second starting port 122. Therefore, if a big hit is won in the special symbol lottery started by winning the second starting port 122, the probability of winning in the high probability symbol E is 5/250 (= 1/50).

In the latent probability symbol, 100 values are assigned as winning values when the first starting port 121 is won. Therefore, if a big hit is won in the special symbol lottery started by winning the first starting port 121, the probability of winning the latent symbol is 100/250 (= 2/5).
On the other hand, the winning value in the latent probability symbol is not assigned to the second starting port 122, and if the second starting opening 122 is won, the winning value in the latent probability symbol will not be won.

Here, to explain using the low-probability symbol A as an example, the jackpot symbol random value (see S903 and S910) acquired by winning a prize in the first starting port 121 or the second starting port 122 is shown in FIG. 20 (b). ), It is determined whether or not it matches the winning value of the low probability symbol A, "0 to 34". Although detailed description is omitted, the same applies to special symbol lottery such as low-probability symbol B.

As described above, by making the winning probability of the type of jackpot different between the case where the first starting port 121 is won and the case where the second starting opening 122 is won, various playability can be provided. In addition, the arrangement of the first starting port 121 and the second starting port 122 on the game board 110 is devised so that it becomes easier to aim at either the first starting port 121 or the second starting port 122 in a specific state (mode). It is also possible to encourage the player to participate in a more active game by configuring the above.
Even if the winning probability of the big hit in the high-probability time-saving gaming state is higher when the second starting opening 122 is won than when the first starting opening 121 is won. good.

Here, the pachinko gaming machine 100 of the present embodiment can set a set value which is a stage of the degree of advantage of the game. In the pachinko gaming machine 100, the set value can be set to any one of, for example, 6 stages of "1", "2", "3", "4", "5" and "6".
In the pachinko gaming machine 100, when the set value is set to "1", the winning probability is the lowest. For example, when the set value is "1" and the probability is low, the winning probability is 1/300. Further, when the set value is "1" and the probability is high, the winning probability is 10/300.
Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 100, when the set value is set to "6", the winning probability is the highest. For example, when the set value is "6" and the game is in a low probability gaming state, the winning probability is 1/285. Further, when the set value is "6" and the probability is high, the winning probability is 10/285.
As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 100, the winning probability is set to increase in the order of the set values "1"<"2"<"3"<"4"<"5"<"6".

Next, the determination of the reach random number will be described. The reach random number is set according to the number of holdings as described later. Here, as an example, a reach random number will be described when the number of holdings of the first starting port 121 is one in a low-probability time-saving non-game state.
With reference to FIG. 20 (c), the range of random number values is 250 from 0 to 249, and the variation pattern (variation time) in which the reach effect can be executed is set (for example, 13.5 seconds or more). Twenty-two random number values are assigned to (with reach), and 228 random number values are assigned to the lottery result (without reach) in which the reach effect is not a feasible variation pattern (for example, less than 13.5 seconds). That is, in the illustrated example, if a big hit is not made in the special symbol lottery, the reach effect is performed with a probability of 22/250 (= 11/125). Here, the reach effect is an effect performed on the image display unit 114 when the special symbol changes. Hereinafter, the effect at the time of special symbol change that does not have the reach effect as a feasible variation pattern is referred to as the effect without reach, and the effect at the time of the special symbol change that the reach effect is the feasible variation pattern corresponding to this is referred to as the effect with reach. Called.

Here, to explain with reach as an example, the reach random value (see S903 and S910) acquired by winning the first starting port 121 in the low-probability time-saving non-game state is shown in FIG. 20 (c). It is determined whether or not it matches the winning value "0 to 21" with reach. Although detailed explanation is omitted, the same applies to the special symbol lottery without reach. Further, the number of winning values is the same between the reach random number used in the special symbol lottery based on the winning of the first starting port 121 and the reach random number used in the special symbol lottery based on the winning of the second starting port 122. It may or may not be different. In addition, a reach random number used in a special symbol lottery in a low-probability time-saving no-game state, a reach random number used in a special symbol lottery in a low-probability time-saving game state, and a reach random number used in a special symbol lottery in a high-probability time-saving no-game state. And the reach random number used in the special symbol lottery in the high-probability time-saving game state, the number of winning values may be the same or different.

In many cases, when the special symbol changes, it is linked to the display control of the first special symbol display 221 and the second special symbol display 222 (hereinafter, when these are not distinguished, they are referred to as special symbol indicators 221 and 222). , The image display unit 114 performs an effect using a decorative pattern. The decorative design is composed, for example, by displaying three rows of symbols consisting of a number sequence in which numbers 1 to 9 are continuously written in the vertical direction. Then, when the variable display of the special symbol on the special symbol display units 221 and 222 is started, the decorative symbol displayed on the image display unit 114 starts scrolling. Further, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variable display of the special symbol (the scrolling of the decorative symbol is started), the decorative symbol is also fixedly stopped. Generally, when the judgment result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit, three identical numbers are lined up in a straight line extending horizontally or diagonally in the stop display of the decorative symbol. The effect using the decorative symbol performed along with the variable display of this special symbol is called a variable effect.

In the effect with reach, the following operations are performed with respect to the decorative pattern as a variable effect. First, one of the two symbols (sequential sequence) is temporarily stopped before the decorative symbol that scrolls in the vertical (horizontal) direction is fixedly stopped. At this time, the same numbers are temporarily stopped on a straight line extending horizontally (vertically) or diagonally. Further explaining, if the decorative pattern is scrolled in the vertical direction, the same number is temporarily stopped in one row in the horizontal direction.
Next, the last row gradually slows down the scroll speed, giving the player the expectation that three identical numbers will be aligned on a straight line. Then, after the last row is temporarily stopped, the three symbols are fixedly stopped.
Here, in the effect with reach, the SP reach effect or the SPSP reach effect may be performed before the three symbols are fixedly stopped. The SP reach production is generally called super reach or special reach, and is a production that expects a big hit rather than a reach, and is a production of moving images in which various characters appear and the story unfolds. .. In addition, the SPSP reach production is generally called super super reach or special special reach, and it is a production that expects a big hit than the SP reach production, and it is a moving image in which various characters appear and the story unfolds. It is a production of.
Further, as shown in FIG. 21 described later, in the present embodiment, the SP reach effect or the SPSP reach effect is set to be executed when the fluctuation time is longer (for example, 90 seconds or 60 seconds).
On the other hand, in the non-reach production, the horizontal (vertical) or horizontal (vertical) or horizontal (horizontal) or horizontal (horizontal) or horizontal (horizontal) or horizontal (horizontal) or horizontal (horizontal) or horizontal (horizontal) or horizontal (horizontal) or horizontal (horizontal) or horizontal (horizontal) or horizontal (horizontal) or horizontal (horizontal) or vertical (horizontal) or vertical (horizontal) or vertical The symbol is fixed and stopped when the same numbers are not aligned on a straight line that extends diagonally.

As described above, when the result of the determination of the jackpot random number is a loss, the reach random number can perform the reach effect with the variation pattern in which the reach effect can be executed on the image display unit 114, or the reach effect can be executed. Decide whether to perform a non-reach effect that does not have a variable pattern. In addition, the reach random number is designed to give the player an appropriate sense of expectation while enabling efficient game progress by changing the execution ratio of the effect with reach according to the number of holdings.
In addition, if the jackpot is won, the effect with reach will be performed, and finally the decorative pattern will be fixedly stopped with the same numbers aligned on a straight line extending horizontally (vertically) or diagonally. Can be done. On the other hand, in the case of winning a small hit or losing, the decorative pattern is fixedly stopped in the state where the same numbers are not aligned on the above straight line.

Next, the determination of the winning random number used in the ordinary symbol lottery will be described.
With reference to FIG. 20 (d), the range of random number values is 10 from 0 to 9, and one value is assigned as the winning value when the time saving flag is OFF, and as the winning value when the time saving flag is ON. Nine values are assigned. Therefore, if the game ball passes through the gate 124 and the normal symbol lottery is performed in the state of no time saving, the player wins with a probability of 1/10. On the other hand, if the game ball passes through the gate 124 and the normal symbol lottery is performed in the time saving state, the player wins with a probability of 9/10.

Here, to explain by taking the time saving flag OFF as an example, the winning random number value (see S1003) acquired when the game ball of the gate 124, the first starting port 121, or the second starting port 122 passes through is shown in FIG. 20 (see S1003). It is determined whether or not it matches with "0" which is the winning value of the time saving flag OFF in d). Although detailed explanation is omitted, the same applies to the ordinary symbol lottery with the reduced working hours flag ON.

Further, although not particularly shown, it is possible to set a plurality of hits having different contents (opening pattern of the electric tulip 123) of the auxiliary game performed when it is determined to be a hit in the ordinary symbol lottery. In this case, for example, a winning symbol random number for specifying the type of winning in the ordinary symbol lottery is set as in the case of the jackpot symbol random number (see FIG. 17B) for specifying the type of jackpot in the special symbol lottery. Then, the game control unit 200 acquires the random number value of the winning symbol random number together with the random number value of the winning random number by the gate switch process (see FIG. 10) by the random number acquisition unit 231 and is acquired by the normal symbol determination unit 232. Identify the type of hit based on the random number value.
The range of random numbers, the ratio of winning values, and the values of winning values shown in the configuration example of each random number in FIG. 20 are merely examples, and are not limited to the values shown in the drawings.

[Example of setting fluctuation pattern]
Next, an example of setting the fluctuation pattern and the table used in the fluctuation pattern selection process shown in FIG. 13 will be described.
FIG. 21 is a diagram showing a variation pattern used in the variation pattern selection process shown in FIG. 13 and a setting example of a table. Note that FIG. 21 shows a setting example in which the special symbol is changed based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the low-probability time-saving non-game state.

As shown in FIG. 21, when the determination result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit (Yes in S1302 of FIG. 13), the special symbol fluctuation control unit 233 determines the fluctuation pattern based on the jackpot symbol and the fluctuation pattern random number. .. Specifically, in the special symbol variation control unit 233, the variation pattern random number value (see S903) acquired together with the jackpot random number value by the random number acquisition unit 231 matches any of the variation pattern random number values assigned to each jackpot symbol. The fluctuation pattern is determined based on whether or not it is done. For example, when the jackpot symbol is "high probability symbol A" and the variation pattern random number is "51", it matches the variation pattern random number range "50 to 69" assigned to "high probability symbol A" in FIG. 21. Therefore, "PB3" is selected as the fluctuation pattern. The special symbol fluctuation time in this "PB3" is "90.18 seconds".

Further, when the determination result of the special symbol lottery is wrong (No in S1302 of FIG. 13), the special symbol variation control unit 233 is based on the hold number U1 of the first special symbol lottery, the reach random number, and the variation pattern random number. To determine the fluctuation pattern. Specifically, when the reserved number U1 of the first special symbol lottery is "1", the special symbol fluctuation control unit 233 has a reach random number value (see S903) acquired by the random number acquisition unit 231 together with the jackpot random number value. , It is determined whether it is allocated to the reach random number range "0 to 21" allocated to the hold number "1" of the "missing" in FIG. 21 or to the reach random number range "22 to 249". When the acquired reach random number is included in the reach random number range "0 to 21", the variation pattern random number value (see S903) acquired together with the jackpot random number value by the random number acquisition unit 231 is the reach random number range "0 to 21". 21 ”Variation pattern The variation pattern is determined based on which of the random number values is matched. For example, when the fluctuation pattern random number is "51", it matches the fluctuation pattern random number range "50 to 89", so "PR7" is selected as the fluctuation pattern.

FIG. 22 is a diagram showing a variation pattern used in the variation pattern selection process and a setting example of the table. Note that FIG. 22 shows a setting example in which the special symbol is changed based on the winning of the second starting port 122 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state.
In the table shown in FIG. 22, the determination result of the special symbol lottery, the pending number U2 of the second special symbol lottery, the reach random number, and the variation pattern according to the variation pattern random number are provided.
In the table shown in FIG. 22, a variation pattern is provided in which the “time” is “2.50” and “4.00” as “no reach” where the “number of hold” is “1”. The "time" of "2.50" and "4.00" is the "time" of the "variation pattern" provided as "no reach" in which the "holding number" is "1" in the table shown in FIG. Is shorter than "8.00". Further, in the table shown in FIG. 22, a variation pattern is provided in which the “time” is “2.00” and “4.00” as the “no reach” in which the “number of hold” is “2 to 3”. .. The "time" of "2.00" and "4.00" is the "variation pattern" provided as "no reach" in which the "holding number" is "2 to 3" in the table shown in FIG. 21. It is shorter than "6.80" which is "time". Further, in the table shown in FIG. 22, a variation pattern is provided in which the “time” is “1.50” and “4.00” as “no reach” where the “number of hold” is “4”. The "time" of "1.50" and "4.00" is the "time" of the "variation pattern" provided as "no reach" in which the "holding number" is "4" in the table shown in FIG. Is shorter than "4.60".

FIG. 23 is a diagram showing a variation pattern used in the variation pattern selection process and a setting example of the table. Note that FIG. 23 shows a setting example in which the special symbol is changed based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state.
In the table shown in FIG. 23, the determination result of the special symbol lottery, the pending number U1 of the first special symbol lottery, and the variation pattern according to the variation pattern random number are provided. In this table, the winning value with the reach random number is not assigned to the "variation pattern" in which the "determination result" is "missing". Therefore, if the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state is out of order, the reach is not performed in the special symbol change.
In the table shown in FIG. 23, a fluctuation pattern in which the “time” is “5.00” is provided with the “no reach” in which the “number of hold” is “1 to 4”. The "time" of this fluctuation pattern is longer than any "time" of the "variation pattern" provided as "no reach" in the table shown in FIG. That is, when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery in the high-probability time-saving gaming state is "missing" and "no reach", the second is more than the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation based on the winning of the first starting port 121. The fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation based on the winning of the starting port 122 is shorter.

The game control unit 200 is a table used for selecting a variation pattern of a special symbol based on which of the first start port 121 and the second start port 122 the game ball has won, and the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 100. To decide. Then, as described above, based on the fluctuation pattern random value (see S903 and S910 in FIG. 9) acquired when the game ball wins the starting openings 121 and 122, the presence / absence of reach effect, the number of holdings, and the like. , Determine the variation pattern of the special symbol. Then, the information on the fluctuation pattern of the determined special symbol is included in the fluctuation start command, and is sent from the game control unit 200 to the effect control unit 300. As will be described later, in the effect control unit 300, as an effect when the special symbol changes, an effect corresponding to the variation time specified based on the information of the variation pattern included in the variation start command (executable in the variation time). Is selected and executed.

[Structure of RAM of game control unit and RAM of effect control unit for performing advance notice effect based on prior determination]
Subsequently, the configuration of the RAM 203 of the game control unit 200 and the RAM 303 of the effect control unit 300 in the present embodiment for executing the advance notice effect based on the prior determination will be described.
FIG. 24 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration example of RAM 203 (see FIG. 3) of the game control unit 200 according to the present embodiment. FIG. 24A is a block diagram showing the configuration of the storage area 204, and FIG. 24B is a block diagram showing the configuration of each of the storage units shown in FIG. 24A.

As shown in FIG. 24A, the RAM 203 includes a storage area 204 as a special symbol hold storage area for storing the jackpot random numbers acquired by the jackpot random number lottery. The storage area 204 has eight storage units corresponding to the maximum number of holdings of the first starting port 121 and the number of holdings of the second starting port 122 (when the upper limit of each holding number is 4). .. Specifically, the storage area 204 includes a first storage unit 204a, a second storage unit 204b, a third storage unit 204c, a fourth storage unit 204d, a fifth storage unit 204e, a sixth storage unit 204f, and a seventh storage unit. It has a unit 204g and an eighth storage unit 204h.

Further, as shown in FIG. 24 (b), each of these storage units 204a to 204h is an area in which information indicating the distinction between the winning start ports (first start port 121 or second start port 122) is stored. It has an area where the acquired jackpot random number is stored, an area where the symbol random number is stored, an area where the reach random number is stored, and an area where the fluctuation pattern random number is stored. That is, a jackpot random number, a symbol random number, a reach random number, and a variation pattern random number are stored in each of the storage units 204a to 204h.

Here, each random number is stored in order from the first storage unit 204a. More specifically, for example, when no random number is stored in any of the first storage unit 204a to the eighth storage unit 204h, the acquired random number is stored in the first storage unit 204a. Further, for example, when a random number is already stored in the first storage unit 204a to the fourth storage unit 204d, the acquired random number is stored in the fifth storage unit 204e.

FIG. 25 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration example of the RAM 303 (see FIG. 3) of the effect control unit 300 according to the present embodiment. 25 (a) is a block diagram showing the configurations of the reserved storage areas 305 and 306, and FIG. 25 (b) is a block diagram showing the configurations of the storage units shown in FIG. 25 (a).
As shown in FIG. 25 (a), the RAM 303 includes a first hold storage area 305 and a second hold storage area 306 as hold status storage areas for storing the situation in which the hold ball is held. The first reserved storage area 305 and the second reserved storage area 306 correspond to a hold for winning a prize in the first starting port 121 and a holding for winning a prize in the second starting port 122, respectively, and each has four storage units. Have. Specifically, the first reserved storage area 305 has a first storage unit 305a, a second storage unit 305b, a third storage unit 305c, and a fourth storage unit 305d. Further, the second reserved storage area 306 has a first storage unit 306a, a second storage unit 306b, a third storage unit 306c, and a fourth storage unit 306d.

Further, as shown in FIG. 25B, each of these storage units 305a to 305d and 306a to 306d has a hold flag storage area for turning on / off the hold flag and a notification flag storage for turning on / off the notification flag. Has an area and. The hold flag is a flag for identifying the presence or absence of a hold ball for each of the storage units 305a to 305d and 306a to 306d. That is, for example, when the number of holdings due to winning a prize in the first starting port 121 is 3, the holding flag is turned ON in the three holding flag storage areas of the first to third storage units 305a, 305b, and 305c. The notification flag is a flag for setting whether or not to perform the advance notice effect for each reserved ball based on the preliminary determination result. In the pachinko gaming machine 100 of the present embodiment, the effect control unit 300 can set whether or not to perform the advance notice effect based on the preliminary determination result according to the game state and the state of the effect. Therefore, the notification flag is turned ON when the advance notice effect is performed, and the notification flag is turned OFF when the advance notice effect is not performed. For example, when the advance notice effect is given to the third reserved ball among the above three reserved balls, the notification flag is turned ON in the notification flag storage area of the third storage unit 305c.

Further, although not particularly shown, the RAM 203 has an area (hereinafter, a pre-determination information storage area) in which pre-determination information is stored, in addition to the configuration shown in FIG. 24 (a). The pre-determination information is information obtained by the pre-determination process (see S904 and S911 in FIG. 9) based on each of the above random numbers. The content of the pre-judgment information is the same as the information obtained as various judgment results in the special symbol processing (see FIG. 11). If it is, it is information for indicating the type of the jackpot, the fluctuation pattern (variation time) is the length at which the reach effect can be executed, or the content of the fluctuation pattern. The pre-judgment information stored in the pre-judgment information storage area is unique to the information regarding the hold corresponding to the winning ball (holding ball) for which the pre-judgment processing has been performed (hereinafter referred to as hold information), or separately from this hold information. At the timing, it is included in the pre-determination result command and sent from the game control unit 200 to the effect control unit 300.

[Preliminary judgment processing]
Next, the preliminary determination process (see S904 and S911 in FIG. 9) will be described in detail.
In the pre-determination process in the present embodiment, the game control unit 200 performs pre-determination as follows using a random number table similar to the random number configuration example described with reference to FIGS. 20 to 23.

FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the contents of the preliminary determination process (S904, S911 in FIG. 9) according to the present embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 26, the game control unit 200 first determines whether or not the game state is a high-probability state (S2401), and if it determines that the game state is a high-probability state (Yes in S2401), the game control unit 200 is for the high-probability state. A table is selected and the jackpot random number and the jackpot symbol random number are pre-determined (S2402). On the other hand, when it is determined as No in S2401, the table for the low probability state is selected, and the jackpot random number and the jackpot symbol random number are pre-determined (S2403). Further, although not shown, in the case of the pre-determination process based on the winning of the first starting port 121, the table for the first starting port 121 is selected and the pre-determination of the jackpot random number and the jackpot symbol random number is performed. conduct. Further, in the case of the pre-determination process based on the winning of the second starting port 122, the table for the second starting port 122 is selected and the jackpot random number and the jackpot symbol random number are pre-determined.

After the pre-determination of the jackpot random number and the jackpot symbol random number of S2402 or S2403, the game control unit 200 determines whether or not the game state is the time saving state (S2404), and determines that the game state is the time saving state (Yes in S2404). A table for the time saving state is selected, and the reach random number is pre-determined (S2405). Further, a table for the time saving state is selected, and the fluctuation pattern random number is pre-determined (S2406).
On the other hand, when it is determined as No in S2404, the table for the time saving stateless state is selected and the reach random number is preliminarily determined (S2407). Further, a table for time saving and no state is selected, and the fluctuation pattern random number is pre-determined (S2408).
Although not shown, in step 2405, step 2406, step 2407 and step 2408, it is based on whether or not the gaming state is a high probability state and which of the first starting port 121 and the second starting port 122 is won. A dedicated table is selected depending on whether it is a preliminary determination process.

After that, the game control unit 200 obtains the result of the pre-determination of the jackpot random number obtained as described above, the result of the pre-determination of the jackpot symbol random number, the result of the pre-determination of the reach random number, and the result of the pre-determination of the fluctuation pattern. It is stored in the pre-determination information storage area as the pre-determination information (S2409). Further, in order to transmit the advance determination information to the effect control unit 300, the advance determination result command including the advance determination information is set in the RAM 203 (S2410).

Here, the above-mentioned pre-determination includes a random number value (see S903 and S910 in FIG. 9) acquired according to the winning of the game ball to the starting ports 121 and 122, and a determination table used in the jackpot determination process (FIG. 20). This was done using a judgment table having the same configuration as (see). That is, the determination itself after selecting the determination table to be used is the same as the determination in the jackpot determination process (see S1201 in FIG. 12). Therefore, in the present embodiment, the subroutine of the jackpot determination process (see S1108 and FIG. 12 in FIG. 11) used in the special symbol process (see FIG. 11) is called to determine the random number in the above-mentioned preliminary determination.

With such a configuration, in the present embodiment, it is not necessary to prepare a processing function (subroutine) for determining a random number separately from the jackpot determination process in order to determine the random number in the pre-determination process. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the number of control instructions and suppress an increase in the size of the program related to the jackpot determination process and the pre-determination process. Further, as described above, when the determination table used for the pre-judgment has the same configuration as the determination table used for the jackpot determination, the determination table used for the jackpot determination may also be used for the pre-determination.

Further, although only the preliminary determination (whether or not it is a big hit) regarding the special symbol lottery has been described here, in the present embodiment, the variation pattern when performing the variation display and the stop display of the special symbol is also pre-reading (preliminary determination). I do. For the selection of the variation pattern in the special symbol lottery, the random value for the variation pattern selection (see S903 and S910 in FIG. 9) and the variation pattern table (see FIG. 21) acquired according to the winning of the game ball to the starting ports 121 and 122. (See FIG. 23) and (see S1109 and FIG. 13 in FIG. 11). Therefore, even in the look-ahead of the fluctuation pattern, the random value for selecting the fluctuation pattern acquired at the time of winning and the look-ahead table having the same configuration as the fluctuation pattern table used in the fluctuation pattern selection processing of the special symbol processing are used for selection. Fluctuation patterns can be pre-read. That is, a different look-ahead table can be used for each gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 100. Further, a look-ahead table that differs depending on which of the first starting port 121 and the second starting port 122 is won can be used.

In this case, in order to pre-read the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern selection process, the subroutine of the variation pattern selection process used in the special symbol process (see FIG. 11) (see S1109 and FIG. 13 in FIG. 11) is called and used. be able to. Further, as for the look-ahead table used for the look-ahead of the variation pattern selection, the variation pattern table used in the variation pattern selection process of the special symbol processing may be used. With this configuration, the number of control instructions related to look-ahead of variation pattern selection can be reduced, and an increase in the size of the program can be suppressed.

If the pre-judgment process and the jackpot judgment process at the time of special symbol change are performed by the same subroutine using the same judgment table group, the execution time of each process is different, so that the pre-judgment result and the special symbol change time. The judgment result by the jackpot judgment processing may be different. That is, after the execution of the pre-determination process, the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 (whether it is a high-probability state or a low-probability state, a time-saving state or a time-saving no state) has changed by the start of the special symbol change. In this case, since different types of determination tables are used depending on the game state, the specific determination table used for determination differs between the execution of the pre-determination process and the execution of the jackpot determination process. .. Therefore, even if the same random number value acquired at the time of winning the starting ports 121 and 122 is used, the preliminary determination result and the determination result of the jackpot determination process may differ. In such a case, if the game state changes by the start of the special symbol change after the execution of the pre-determination process in the effect control unit 300, the effect based on the pre-determination result is not executed (prohibited) control or the like. You may do.

In addition, according to the command output from the game control unit 200 to the effect control unit 300 as described above, the effect control unit 300 controls, for example, the image display unit 114, the board lamp 116, the speaker 156, the frame lamp 157, and the like. For example, when the effect control unit 300 receives a command indicating the start of a door opening error, the effect control unit 300 displays a message "Please call a staff member" or an image indicating an abnormal state. It is displayed on 114. Further, the effect control unit 300 limits the output of an alarm or the like indicating an abnormal state from the speaker 156 and the output of music, voice, sound effects, or the like. Further, the effect control unit 300 lights the panel lamp 116 and the frame lamp 157 in red, for example, as an embodiment showing an abnormal state.

In addition, here, it has been explained that the effect control unit 300 uses all of the image display unit 114, the panel lamp 116, the speaker 156, and the frame lamp 157 to notify that an error has occurred, but one of these has been described. It may be an embodiment using a unit. Further, the mode of notification may be switched according to the content of the error. For example, when a door opening error occurs, all of the image display unit 114, the panel lamp 116, the speaker 156, and the frame lamp 157 may be used as described above. Further, when a payout error occurs, the image display unit 114 and the speaker 156 notify that the error has occurred. This makes it possible for a clerk of a gaming store (pachinko hall) or the like to easily determine the urgency of an error that has occurred in a gaming machine.

[Operation of production control unit]
Next, the operation of the effect control unit 300 will be described.
FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the operation of the effect control unit 300.
The operation of the effect control unit 300 includes the main process shown in FIG. 27 (a) and the interrupt process shown in FIG. 27 (b). Referring to FIG. 27A, the effect control unit 300 first makes initial settings at startup (S2501), sets the cycle of the CTC (Counter / Timer Circuit) (S2502), and then follows the set cycle. , While updating the random number used in the effect control (S2503), the interrupt process is accepted.

The interrupt processing is periodically performed according to the cycle set in S2502. Referring to FIG. 27B, in this interrupt process, the effect control unit 300 receives a command from the game control unit 200 and performs a command reception process (S2511). In this command reception process, the effect content (effect pattern) is selected. Further, the effect control unit 300 performs an effect button process for accepting an operation of the effect button 161 or the like by the player (S2512). After that, the effect control unit 300 performs a command transmission process of transmitting a command including information of the selected effect pattern to the image / sound control unit 310 and the lamp control unit 320 (S2513). As a result, the image display and sound output to the image display unit 114, the operation of the movable accessory 115, the light emission of the panel lamp 116 and the frame lamp 157, and the like are performed.

[Command reception processing by the effect control unit]
FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the contents of the command reception process (S2511 in FIG. 27B).
In this command reception process, the effect control unit 300 first determines whether or not the pre-determination result command and the hold number increase command have been received (S2601). The pre-determination result command and the hold number increase command are set in the game control unit 200 in the start port switch process shown in FIG. 9 (S906, S907, S913, S914), and the output process (S806) shown in FIG. ) Is a command transmitted to the effect control unit 300.
Then, when it is determined that the pre-determination result command and the hold number increase command have been received (Yes in S2601), the effect control unit 300 adds 1 to the value of the hold number held in the RAM 303 (S2602). Further, the effect control unit 300 performs the pre-determination effect selection process based on the pre-determination result command and the hold number increase command (S2603). The content of the pre-determination effect selection process will be described later.

When the received command is not the pre-determination result command or the hold number increase command (No in S2601), the effect control unit 300 determines whether or not the received command is the fluctuation start command (S2604). This fluctuation start command is a command set in the game control unit 200 in the special symbol processing shown in FIG. 11 (S1111) and transmitted to the effect control unit 300 in the output processing (S806) shown in FIG.
If the received command is a variable start command (Yes in S2604), the effect control unit 300 executes the effect selection process (S2605). Further, when the fluctuation start command is received, the random value for effect control used in the effect selection process is acquired. This random number value is a random number value that is periodically updated in S2503 of the main process shown in FIG. 27 (a). The details of the effect selection process will be described later.

When the received command is not a pre-determination result command, a hold number increase command, or a fluctuation start command (No in S2601 and S2604), the effect control unit 300 determines whether or not the received command is a fluctuation stop command (S2606). This fluctuation stop command is a command set in the game control unit 200 in the special symbol processing shown in FIG. 11 (S1114) and transmitted to the effect control unit 300 in the output processing (S806) shown in FIG.
If the received command is a variable stop command (Yes in S2606), the effect control unit 300 executes the process during the end of the variable effect (S2607). In the process during the end of the variation effect, the effect control unit 300 analyzes the received variation stop command and sets the variation effect end command for instructing the end of the effect of the symbol variation in the RAM 303.

If the received command is not a pre-judgment result command, a hold number increase command, a fluctuation start command, or a fluctuation stop command (No in S2601, S2604, and S2606), the effect control unit 300 starts the opening operation of the jackpot game with the received command. It is determined whether or not the command is an opening command (S2608). This opening command is a command set in the stopped processing shown in FIG. 14 (S1418) and transmitted to the effect control unit 300 in the output processing (S806) shown in FIG.
When the received command is an opening command (Yes in S2608), the effect control unit 300 executes the jackpot effect selection process (S2609). The details of the jackpot effect selection process will be described later.

When the received command is not a pre-judgment result command, a hold number increase command, a fluctuation start command, a fluctuation stop command, or an opening command (No in S2601, S2604, S2606, and S2608), the effect control unit 300 receives a jackpot game. It is determined whether or not it is an ending command for starting the ending operation of (S2610). This ending command is a command set in the large winning opening process shown in FIG. 17 (S1713) and transmitted to the effect control unit 300 in the output process (S806) shown in FIG.
When the received command is an ending command (Yes in S2610), the effect control unit 300 executes the ending effect selection process (S2611). The details of the ending effect selection process will be described later.

If the received command is not a pre-judgment result command, a hold count increase command, a fluctuation start command, a fluctuation stop command, an opening command, or an ending command (No in S2601, S2604, S2606, S2608, and S2610), then the effect control unit 300 , The customer waiting command reception process for shifting the received command to the customer waiting state is executed (S2612). The details of the customer waiting command reception process will be described later.

FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the contents of the pre-determination effect selection process (S2603) and the effect selection process (S2605) of FIG. 28.
In the pre-determination effect selection process, the effect control unit 300 first analyzes the pre-determination result command received from the game control unit 200 (S2801). Further, the effect control unit 300 analyzes the hold number increase command received from the game control unit 200 (S2802). Then, the effect control unit 300 selects an effect pattern (pre-determination effect pattern) used in the pre-determination effect based on the pre-determination result command and the hold number increase command (S2803).

Here, as the pre-determination effect pattern, various effect patterns can be provided so as to give notice of the random number determination result by the special symbol processing before the start of the fluctuation based on the random number determination result by the special symbol processing. For example, an effect such as a hold display effect or a continuous advance notice effect can be provided as a pre-determination effect pattern. In the present embodiment, when a reserved ball is generated, a display indicating the number of reserved balls is displayed on the first special symbol hold indicator 218 and the second special symbol hold indicator 219 of the display 130 (see FIG. 2). At the same time, a hold display suggesting the occurrence of hold and the number of holds is performed on the image display unit 114 (hold display effect). Therefore, in this hold display effect, by reflecting the pre-judgment result in the display mode of the hold display, etc., the player is informed of the judgment result when the random number is subsequently determined by the special symbol processing for the hold ball. It can be a suggestive pre-judgment effect.

Here, the case where the hold display effect is used as the pre-judgment effect has been described, but by reflecting it in various effect contents performed before the start of the fluctuation based on the random number determination result by the special symbol processing, various advance notice effects are produced. Will be able to do. For example, an effect using an effect image displayed on the image display unit 114, an effect by emitting light from a board lamp 116 or a frame lamp 157, an effect by the operation of a movable accessory, an effect by acoustic output such as music or sound effects, etc. are performed in advance. It can be set as a judgment effect pattern.

Further, the pre-determination effect may be executed in accordance with the symbol change for other winning balls performed before the symbol change for the winning ball (reserved ball) for which the pre-determination is performed. In the present embodiment, the upper limit of the number of reserved balls is four per one starting port (first starting port 121 or second starting port 122) (see FIG. 9). In addition, priority shall be given to the digestion of the reserved ball at the second starting port 122. In this case, for example, if a preliminary determination is made for a reserved ball having a second starting port 122, a change currently being changed (referred to as the change) is included before the symbol change for the held ball is performed. A maximum of four winning balls will be changed in design. In the advance notice effect related to the reserved ball for which the pre-judgment has been made, if the symbol change is performed multiple times before the symbol change is performed for the reserved ball, the advance notice effect (continuous notice effect) spanning the multiple symbol change. ) May be performed.

Then, the effect control unit 300 sets the hold number command including the value of the hold number after addition and the information of the pre-determination effect pattern selected in the pre-determination effect selection process in the RAM 303 (S2804). The hold number command includes information indicating the pattern in order to notify the CPU 311 of the image / sound control unit 310 of the selected pre-determination effect pattern. By receiving the hold number command, the CPU 311 draws an image or sound corresponding to the selected pre-determination effect pattern on the VDP 314 and creates a display list or the like for output processing. The VDP 314 reads image data and acoustic data for representing the selected pre-determination effect pattern from the CGROM 315 and SNDROM 316 based on the display list and the like, and expresses the pre-determination effect using the image display unit 114 and the speaker 156. ..

In the effect selection process, the effect control unit 300 first analyzes the received fluctuation start command (S2811). Further, the value of the number of holds held in the RAM 303 is subtracted by 1 (S2812). Then, the effect control unit 300 displays on the image display unit 114 based on various setting information (information such as the type of jackpot, the game state after the jackpot game, the fluctuation pattern, etc.) obtained from the analysis result of the fluctuation start command. A variation effect pattern of symbol variation due to an image is selected (S2813). After the variation effect pattern is selected, the value of the number of holds held in the RAM 303 may be subtracted by 1. That is, the variation effect pattern may be selected in the state before the value of the number of holds held in the RAM 303 is subtracted by 1.

Finally, the effect control unit 300 sets the variable effect start command in the RAM 303 to instruct the execution start of the selected effect (S2814). The variation effect start command includes information indicating the pattern in order to notify the CPU 311 of the selected variation effect pattern. By receiving the variation effect start command, the CPU 311 draws an image or sound corresponding to the selected variation effect pattern on the VDP 314 and creates a display list or the like for output processing. The VDP 314 reads out image data and acoustic data for expressing the selected variation effect pattern from the CGROM 315 and SNDROM 316 based on the display list and the like, and expresses the variation effect by using the image display unit 114 and the speaker 156.

Although not described in detail, in the selection process of the variation effect pattern of the symbol variation in S2813, the variation effect pattern is determined based on the variation pattern. Based on the variable effect pattern determined here, the variable display of the decorative pattern, the background effect, the advance notice effect, and the like are determined. The decorative symbol variation display is an effect display performed by the image display unit 114 in accordance with the variation display of the special symbol performed by the first special symbol display 221 or the second special symbol display 222. In the variable display of this decorative pattern, a reach effect or the like is executed. In addition, unlike the present embodiment, when a plurality of variation effect patterns are set for the variation pattern, it is one of the effect random numbers (random number updated in S2503 of FIG. 27 (a)). , The effect random number value is acquired when the variation start command is received), and the variation effect pattern may be selected by lottery.

FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot effect selection process (S2609) of FIG. 28.
In this jackpot effect selection process, the effect control unit 300 first analyzes the received opening command (including information about the type of the jackpot symbol) (S3001), and selects an effect pattern (big hit effect pattern) (S3002). .. Then, the effect control unit 300 reads the image data and the acoustic data used for the effect by the selected jackpot effect pattern from the ROM 302, sets the jackpot effect start command instructing the selected effect together with these data in the RAM 303, and sets the RAM 303. The jackpot effect selection process ends (S3003). As a result, the production during the big hit is determined. In the selection of the jackpot effect pattern (S3002), the determination may be made based on the random number value acquired at the time of receiving the command.

FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the contents of the ending effect selection process (S2611) of FIG. 28.
In this ending effect selection process, the effect control unit 300 first analyzes the received ending command (including information about the type of the jackpot symbol) (S3101), and selects the effect pattern (ending effect pattern) (S3102). .. Then, the effect control unit 300 reads the image data and the acoustic data used for the effect by the selected ending effect pattern from the ROM 302, sets the ending effect start command instructing the selected effect together with these data in the RAM 303, and sets the RAM 303. The ending effect selection process ends (S3103). In the selection of the ending effect pattern (S3102), a determination may be made based on the random number value acquired at the time of receiving the command.

FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the contents of the customer waiting command reception process (S2612) of FIG. 28.
The effect control unit 300 determines whether or not a customer waiting command for shifting to the customer waiting state has been received (S3201). When the customer waiting command is received (Yes in S3201), the effect control unit 300 starts measuring the elapsed time (S3202) and turns on the measurement flag in the RAM 303 (S3203). On the other hand, when the received command is not a customer waiting command (No in S3201), the effect control unit 300 determines whether or not the measurement flag held in the RAM 303 is ON (S3204). If the measurement flag is OFF (No in S3204), the customer waiting command reception process is terminated.

When the measurement flag is ON (after Yes in S3204 or ON in S3203), the effect control unit 300 then determines whether or not the measurement time has reached a predetermined time-up time (for example, 10 seconds). Is determined (S3205). If the time is not up (No in S3205), the customer waiting command reception process is terminated. On the other hand, when the time is up (Yes in S3205), the effect control unit 300 turns off the measurement flag held in the RAM 303 (S3206), and issues a customer wait effect command for performing the customer wait effect (demo effect) in the RAM 303. Is set to and the customer waiting command reception process is terminated (S3207).

When the command reception process is completed as described above, any one of the variable effect start command, the variable effect end command, the jackpot effect start command, the ending effect start command, and the customer waiting effect command is set in the RAM 303.

FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the contents of the effect button process (S2512 in FIG. 27 (b)).
In this effect button process, the effect control unit 300 first determines whether or not the operation means such as the effect button 161 by the player has been operated during the predetermined reception period (valid period) (S3301). Here, the operation of the operating means includes pressing the effect button 161 to turn it on, and pressing the center key and surrounding keys of the effect key 162 to turn it ON. Further, when the pachinko gaming machine 100 is provided with an operation device other than the effect button 161 and the effect key 162 such as a touch panel, the operation of the device is detected. The effect control unit 300 receives an operation signal from the controller of these devices and detects that the operation has been performed.

If an operation means such as the effect button 161 is operated (Yes in S3301), the effect control unit 300 sets an effect button command including information indicating the operation content of the operation means in the RAM 303 and ends the effect button process. (S3302).

After that, the effect control unit 300 performs the command transmission process (S2513) of FIG. 27 (b), and issues the command set in the RAM 303 by the above command reception process and effect button process to the image / sound control unit 310 and the lamp. It is transmitted to the control unit 320. Then, based on the received command, the image / acoustic control unit 310 and the lamp control unit 320 display an image on the image display unit 114, sound output, operate the movable accessory 115, emit light from the panel lamp 116 and the frame lamp 157, and the like. To execute the set effect.

[Display information of information display in each game section]
Next, the display information of the information display 230 in each game section will be described with reference to FIG. 34. In the table of display information of FIG. 34, the section counter value (type of the game section), the number of normal outs, the data selection counter value, and the display content of the information display 230 are associated with each other.
Here, the first game section shown in FIG. 34 starts with the first power-on. In addition, the setting of a total of 60,000 outs is a value that can approximately guarantee the daily operation of 100 pachinko machines per minute. Normally, the base value is always displayed in 2 digits in the numerical segment. Further, when the number of outs during normal times is "0" and when the base value during normal times is 100 or more, "99." is displayed in the numerical segment.

The identification information displayed on the identification segment of the information display 230 is "bL.", Which indicates that it is the normal base value of the current game section, and "bL.", Which indicates that it is the normal base value of the previous game section. There are "b1.", "B2.", Which indicates that it is the normal base value of the game section two times before, and "b3.", Which indicates that it is the normal base value of the game section three times before.

The numerical information displayed in the numerical value segment of the information display 230 is "---" indicating that there is no calculated normal medium base value, the normal base value is "0", or the normal medium out number is "0". "00" indicating that there is, "01" to "99" indicating that the number of normal outs is "1" or more and the normal base value is "1" to "99", and the normal base value. There is "99." indicating that is "100" or more. Normally, when the base value is less than "10", the tens digit of the numerical information is always "0" and displayed in two digits.

The display mode of the numerical information displayed in the numerical seg does not change (lights up) regardless of the game section or the number of outs during normal times, but the identification information displayed in the identification seg is the game section or The display mode changes (blinks or lights up) depending on the number of outs during normal times (whether or not there is a calculated normal base value or whether or not the calculated normal base value is credible).

Specifically, in the first to fourth game sections, when the identification information of the game section without the calculated normal base value is displayed, the identification information is displayed blinking. Further, in the game section after the second game section, when the identification information (“bL.”) Of the current game section is displayed, the calculated normal base value has a low credibility period (the number of outs during normal times is high). If it is 0 to 5999), the identification information will be displayed blinking. In other cases, the identification information is lit and displayed.

Here, to show an example of the display of the information display 230, the section counter value is "1", the number of normal outs is in the range of 0 to 5999, and the data selection counter value is "0". When the normal base value stored in the first area of the base storage area is "35", "bL." Is blinking and displayed in the identification segment of the information display 230, and "35" is displayed in the numerical segment. Will be lit and displayed.

In this way, when the normal base value is "99" or less, the performance information "00" to "99" that does not use the decimal point DP of the 7-segment display is displayed in the numerical segment, while the normal base value is displayed. When the value is "100" or more, the performance information using the decimal point DP of the 7-segment display "99." is displayed in the numerical segment, so it is easy to grasp that it is an abnormal normal base value. ..

In addition, when the base value is usually less than "10", "0" is always displayed in the tens digit of the numerical segment and displayed in two digits (for example, "01"), so 2 as a numerical segment. It is possible to make an easy-to-understand display by effectively using the three 7-segment displays.

Further, when the normal base value of the current game section is displayed, and the number of normal outs in the current game section is 0 to 5999, which is not sufficient for calculating the normal base value. Since the identification information "bL." Displayed in the identification segment is blinking and displayed, it is easy to understand that the normally displayed base value is low credibility information.

In addition, if there is no calculated normal base value, a non-numerical "---" is displayed in the numerical segment, so the normal base value is calculated in the game section corresponding to the identification information displayed in the identification segment. It becomes easier to understand that it is not.

The game ball counting process, the performance information calculation process, and the performance display data setting process are not executed as an information program, but one or two of them are executed as a game program (for example, a game ball counting process). The process may be executed within the input control process that monitors the presence or absence of signal input from various switches), while the rest may be executed as an information program.

Further, the process of outputting the display data for displaying the performance information on the information display 230 may be executed by the performance program instead of being executed by the output control process which is the game program.

Further, an out ball composed of a game ball that has won a prize in the normal winning opening 126, the first starting opening 121, the second starting opening 122, and the large winning opening 125 by the out ball detection switch 227, and a game ball that has flowed into the discharge port 117. Instead of detecting, only the game ball that has flowed into the out port may be detected by the out ball detection switch 227. In that case, the number of outs (total number of outs) each time the game ball is detected by the out ball detection switch 227, the normal winning opening switch 217, the first starting opening switch 211, the second starting opening switch 212, and the large winning opening switch 215. , Usually the number of outs in the middle) should be added by 1.

(Main processing of the overall control unit)
The main process of the image / acoustic control unit 310 will be described with reference to FIG. 35. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the main processing of the image / acoustic control unit 310. This main process is performed by inputting a system reset generated by supplying a power supply voltage from a power supply board (not shown) to the CPU 311.

First, the CPU 311 prohibits all interrupts in step T1 and performs initial setting processing in step T2. Specifically, the initial setting of the CPU such as the setting of the built-in register, the access permission to the RAM 313, the initialization of the entire RAM area of the RAM 313 (0 clear), and the CTC (counter timer circuit) for generating the timer interrupt. Start up, etc., and allow all interruptions in step T3.

The CPU 311 performs the adjustment mode switching process in step T4. Specifically, the volume (value) of the effect sound output from the speaker 156 and the light intensity (value) of the backlight of the image display unit 114 with reference to the input signal from the changeover switch (not shown) that can be operated by the game clerk. ) And the adjustment mode related to the adjustment of the volume and the amount of light (whether or not the volume can be adjusted, whether or not the amount of light can be adjusted, the initial value of the volume value (any of 0 to 5) and the initial value of the amount of light (0 to 5). Any), the process for switching the volume value adjustment range (0 to 5 or 1 to 5) and the light intensity value adjustment range (0 to 5 or 1 to 5)) is performed.

Here, the changeover switch (not shown) is provided on the game control board as the main board, and the volume of the effect sound output from the speaker 156 and the display device (image display unit 114, sub display unit 114). Separately, the adjustment mode related to the adjustment of the light amount of the display device)) and various lighting devices (frame lamp 157, panel lamp 116) for displaying the image related to the effect is switched.
It should be noted that the setting (adjustment) of the volume value and the light amount value by the changeover switch (not shown) can always be performed if the pachinko gaming machine 100 is in the power ON state (after the image / sound control unit 310 is started). It has become.

The CPU 311 performs the volume adjustment process in step T5. Specifically, the volume of the effect sound output from the speaker 156 based on the detection signals (left button detection signal, right button detection signal) from the detection switch that detects the operation of the effect key 162 that can be operated by the player. Perform processing to adjust (value).

The CPU 311 performs the light amount adjustment process in step T6. Specifically, the amount of light (the amount of light of the backlight of the image display unit 114) based on the detection signals (lower button detection signal, upper button detection signal) from the detection switch that detects the operation of the effect key 162 that can be operated by the player. Perform processing to adjust the value).

It should be noted that the setting (adjustment) of the volume value and the light amount value by the effect key 162 is regulated (restricted) at the start of the variable effect and at the end of the variable effect (stop of the decorative symbol 41). .. Further, between the time when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned on and the time when the progress control of the game is started (specifically, during the setting change mode, the RAM clear preparation mode, the setting confirmation mode, and various drive sources Important (high security level) abnormalities (power on, power recovery) that should be notified prior to dish full error and payout error (until the timer interruption is started on the game control board during initial operation) , Unauthorized winning, abnormal winning, magnetic error, radio wave error, door opening error) are also regulated (restricted) during notification (output of notification sound).

Further, during the output of the abnormal notification sound, various production sounds (BGM) output from the speaker 156 even when the current volume value is lower than the maximum volume value. Etc.), and when the output of the abnormal notification sound ends, the volume of various production sounds is restored to the volume before the decrease.

The CPU 311 performs the eco-mode control process in step T7. Specifically, processing is performed to control the start and end of the eco-mode in which the amount of light of the backlight of the image display unit 114 is reduced to suppress power consumption.

In step T8, the CPU 311 determines whether or not the effect instruction command or the notification instruction command transmitted from the effect control unit 300 has been received. If the effect instruction command or the notification instruction command has not been received, the process is transferred to step T11, and if the effect instruction command or the notification instruction command has been received, the process is transferred to step T9.

The CPU 311 performs the animation pattern setting process in step T9. Specifically, a process is performed in which an animation pattern is determined from an animation group of the type corresponding to the received effect instruction command or notification instruction command and set (set) in a predetermined area of the RAM 313.

The CPU 311 performs the sound pattern setting process in step T10. Specifically, a process of determining a sound pattern from a sound group of the type corresponding to the received effect instruction command or notification instruction command and setting (setting) it in a predetermined area of the RAM 313 is performed.

In step T11, the CPU 311 determines whether or not the frame switching flag indicating that it is the frame update timing for updating the display image of the image display unit 114 is set in the RAM 313. If there is a frame switching flag, the process is transferred to step T12, and if there is no frame switching flag, the process is transferred to step T4.

The frame switching flag is set every time the image / acoustic control unit 310 receives a V blank signal transmitted from the VDP 314 every 1/30 second (the time when the drawing / display of the effect image for one frame is scheduled to be completed). It is set by the V blank interrupt process executed in. Therefore, the processes of steps T12 to T15 described below are executed every time the V blank interrupt process is executed (frame update timing).

The CPU 311 clears the frame switching flag set in the RAM 313 in step T12, and performs the scene update process in step T13. Specifically, the scene switching counter, the wait frame counter, and the frame counter updated by the above-mentioned V blank interrupt processing are referred to, and the address of the animation scene is updated based on the animation pattern determined in the above step T9. , Performs a process of updating the address of the sound scene based on the sound pattern determined in step T10.

The CPU 311 performs drawing control processing in step T14. Specifically, it consists of a drawing control command group from the display information (sprite identification number, display position, etc.) of one frame of the animation scene at the updated address according to the priority (drawing order) of the animation group to which the animation scene belongs. A display list is generated, the display list is output to VDP314, and a process of instructing drawing of a display image based on the display list is performed.

As a result, the VDP 314 draws the display image based on the display list in the drawing frame buffer, and displays the image (effect image, abnormality notification image) drawn in the display frame buffer on the image display unit 114. It will be done. That is, the frame update timing is set to the start timing and end timing of various effects (image display and sound output such as hold display, variable effect, jackpot notice effect, look-ahead effect, etc.) performed by the image display unit 114. .. The effect directly controlled by the effect control unit 300 or the lamp control unit 320 (the effect operation of the movable accessory 115) may or may not match the frame update timing.

The CPU 311 performs voice control processing in step T15. Specifically, a voice control command is generated from the sound information at the updated address, and the voice control command is output to the image / sound control unit 310.

As a result, the image / acoustic control unit 310 performs a process of outputting various effect sounds and notification sounds based on the voice control command from the speaker 156. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to step T4.

In this way, at the start of the variation effect and at the end of the variation effect (stop of the decorative symbol 41), the volume can be adjusted and the amount of light can be adjusted by the changeover switch (not shown) that can be operated by the game clerk, but the player can adjust the amount. Volume adjustment and light intensity adjustment by the operable effect key 162 are regulated (restricted). Therefore, it is difficult for the player to overlook important points such as the start of the variable effect and the end of the variable effect, and it is possible to prevent the interest of the game from being lowered.

In addition, important (high security level) abnormalities (power on, power recovery, unrecoverable error, illegal winning, abnormal winning, magnetic error, radio wave error, etc.) that should be notified prior to dish full error and payout error, During the notification of the door opening error) (output of the notification sound), the volume can be adjusted and the amount of light can be adjusted by the changeover switch (not shown) that can be operated by the game clerk, but the volume can be adjusted by the effect key 162 that can be operated by the player. And light amount adjustment is regulated (restricted). Therefore, it is possible to improve the convenience of the game store side regarding the volume adjustment and the light amount adjustment while avoiding the inconvenience that the player who is trying to adjust the volume and the light amount does not notice the occurrence of the abnormality.

Further, during the output of the abnormal notification sound, various production sounds (BGM) output from the speaker 156 even when the current volume value is lower than the maximum volume value. Etc.), and when the output of the abnormal notification sound ends, the volume of various production sounds is restored to the volume before the decrease. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of not noticing the abnormal notification sound due to various production sounds, and it is possible to ensure the security of the gaming machine.

It should be noted that during the notification of abnormality (output of the notification sound), the setting (adjustment) of the volume value and the light amount value by the effect key 162 that can be operated by the player may be disabled, and the adjustment range of the volume value and the light amount value may be disabled. May be limited to, for example, between 0 and 2.

(Initial processing of the accessory of the lamp control unit)
FIG. 36 will be used to explain the initial processing of the accessory of the lamp control unit 320. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the accessory initial processing of the lamp control unit 320, and this processing is executed in the timer interrupt processing executed at predetermined cycles (4 milliseconds) in the lamp control unit 320.

In step R101, the CPU 321 determines whether or not a power ON time command (power on designation command, power recovery designation command) has been received from the game control unit 200. When the power ON command is received, the process is transferred to step R102, and when the power ON command is not received, the process is transferred to step R103.

In step R102, the CPU 321 executes the origin return process of the accessory (movable accessory 115, sub-image display unit (not shown), effect button 161) to the initial process number updated in each process of the accessory initial process. Set "1" for.

The CPU 321 determines in step R103 whether or not the initial processing number is "1". If the initial processing number is not "1", the processing is transferred to step R105 assuming that the origin return processing of the accessory is not executed, and if the initial processing number is "1", the origin return processing is performed in step R104. This is done, and the initial processing of the character this time is completed. Specifically, based on the input signal from the position detection sensor, the return operation of the accessory (movable accessory 115, sub-image display unit (not shown), effect button 161) to the origin position is executed, or initial processing is performed. Perform processing such as setting the number to "2". The details of the origin return process will be described later.

In step R105, the CPU 321 determines whether or not the initial processing number is "2". If the initial processing number is not "2", the initial operation processing of the accessory is not executed, and the initial operation processing of the accessory is terminated. If the initial processing number is "2", the initial operation processing is performed. , End the initial processing of the character this time. Specifically, processing such as performing initial operation and initial light emission for confirming whether or not the accessory operates normally, and setting the initial processing number to "0" is performed. The details of the initial operation processing will be described later.

As described above, according to the accessory initial process shown in FIG. 36, the origin return process for performing the return operation to the origin position of the various accessories, and the initial operation for performing the initial operation and the initial light emission of the various accessories are performed. It is designed not to execute the operation process at the same time. Therefore, the return operation to the origin position of various accessories and the initial operation and initial light emission of various accessories are not mixed, and the return operation, the initial operation, and the initial light emission can be confirmed separately. ..

Further, according to the accessory initial processing shown in FIG. 36, the origin return processing is executed before the initial operation processing. Therefore, the various accessories will initially operate from the origin position, and it will be possible to easily grasp whether or not there is an abnormality in the operation of the various accessories.

(Origin return processing of lamp control unit)
The origin return process of the lamp control unit 320 will be described with reference to FIG. 37. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the origin return process in the lamp control unit 320.

In step R105-1, the CPU 321 determines whether or not the board accessory processing number indicating the transition of the origin return status of the board accessory (movable accessory 115, sub-image display unit (not shown)) is "0". judge. If the board accessory processing number is not "0", the process is transferred to step R105-3, and if the board accessory processing number is "0", the drive target for returning to the origin is movable in step R105-2. It is set to the accessory 115 (movable effect device), and the process is transferred to step R105-5.

In step R105-3, the CPU 321 determines whether or not the board accessory processing number is "1". If the board accessory processing number is not "1", the process is transferred to step R105-12, and if the board accessory processing number is "1", the drive target to be returned to the origin is set in step R105-4. It is set in the sub display device (not shown), and the process is transferred to step R105-5.

In step R105-5, the CPU 321 determines whether or not the accessory to be driven is at the origin position (standby position). Specifically, the input signal from the position detection sensor that detects that each board accessory is at the origin position is determined. If the board accessory to be driven is not at the origin position, the process is transferred to step R105-6, and if the board accessory to be driven is at the origin position, the process is transferred to step R105-11.

The CPU 321 drives a drive motor for moving the board accessory to be driven so that the board accessory to be driven returns to the origin position in step R105-6, and the board accessory is moved in step R105-7. The board accessory abnormality determination timer for determining the occurrence of a return abnormality that does not return to the origin position within a predetermined time is updated by +1.

In step R105-8, the CPU 321 determines whether or not the updated board accessory abnormality determination timer has an upper limit value (for example, 5 seconds). When the board accessory abnormality determination timer is the upper limit value, the process is transferred to step R105-9 assuming that a return error has occurred in the board accessory to be driven, and when the board accessory abnormality determination timer is not the upper limit value. Moves the process to step R105-12.

In step R105-9, the CPU 321 sets the return abnormality information (movable effect device return abnormality information, sub-display device return abnormality information) indicating that a return abnormality has occurred in the board accessory to be driven, in the RAM 323, and sets the RAM 323 to step R105. At -10, the board accessory abnormality determination timer is cleared.

In step R105-11, the CPU 321 updates the board accessory processing number by +1. Specifically, if the board accessory processing number is "0", the board accessory processing number is updated to "1" so that the sub-image display unit (not shown) is driven. If the processing number is "1", the board accessory processing number is updated to "2" in order to end the process of returning the board accessory (movable accessory 115, sub-image display unit (not shown)) to the origin. do.

In step R105-12, the CPU 321 determines whether or not the frame accessory processing number indicating the transition of the origin return status of the frame accessory (effect button 161) is "0". If the frame accessory processing number is "0", the process is transferred to step R105-13, and if the board accessory processing number is not "0", the process is transferred to step R105-20.

The CPU 321 determines in step R105-13 whether or not the effect button 161 is at the origin position (standby position). Specifically, the input signal from the position detection sensor that detects that the effect button 161 is at the origin position is determined. If the effect button 161 is not at the origin position, the process is transferred to step R105-14, and if the effect button 161 is at the origin position, the process is transferred to step R105-19.

The CPU 321 drives an effect button drive motor for moving the effect button 161 so that the effect button 161 returns to the origin position in step R105-14, and the effect button 161 is set within a predetermined time in step R105-15. The frame accessory abnormality determination timer for determining the occurrence of a return abnormality that does not return to the origin position is updated by +1.

In step R105-16, the CPU 321 determines whether or not the updated frame accessory abnormality determination timer has an upper limit value (for example, 5 seconds). If the frame accessory abnormality determination timer is the upper limit value, the process is transferred to step R105-17 assuming that a return abnormality has occurred in the effect button 161. If the frame accessory abnormality determination timer is not the upper limit value, this time. The origin return processing of is finished.

In step R105-17, the CPU 321 sets the return abnormality information indicating that the return abnormality has occurred in the effect button 161 in the RAM 323, and in step R105-18, clears the frame accessory abnormality determination timer.

In step R105-19, the CPU 321 updates the frame accessory processing number by +1. Specifically, if the frame accessory processing number is "0", the frame accessory processing number is updated to "1" in order to end the process of returning the frame accessory (effect button 161) to the origin.

In step R105-20, the CPU 321 determines whether or not the board accessory processing number and the frame accessory processing number satisfy the end condition. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the board accessory processing number is "2" and the frame accessory processing number is "1". If the end condition is satisfied, the process is transferred to step R105-21, and if the end condition is not satisfied, the origin return process this time is ended.

In step R105-21, the CPU 321 clears the board accessory processing number and the frame accessory processing number, and in step R105-22, the CPU 321 executes the initial operation processing of the accessory to the above-mentioned initial processing number. 2 ”is set, and the origin return processing this time is completed.

As described above, according to the origin return processing shown in FIG. 37, the origin position (standby position) is the origin position (standby position) between the movable accessory 115 and the sub-image display unit (not shown) whose effect positions (movement areas) overlap when the power is turned on. If not, do not return both to the origin position (standby position) at the same time (at the same time), but return to the origin position in a predetermined order (movable accessory 115 → sub-image display unit (not shown)). It has become. Therefore, it is possible to easily confirm whether or not various board accessories have returned to the origin position. Further, when the movable accessory 115 and the sub-image display unit (not shown) are in contact with each other due to difficulty in separation, it is possible to prevent both accessories from exerting a load on each other, and both accessories are damaged at the same time. It is possible to suppress such inconveniences.

Further, according to the origin return processing shown in FIG. 37, the return operation of the board accessory (movable accessory 115, sub-image display unit (not shown)) to the origin position and the frame accessory (effect button 161) are returned to the origin position. It is possible to execute the return operation to the origin position at the same time (at the same time). Therefore, it is possible to shorten the time required for the return operation of the various accessories, and it is possible to smoothly shift to the initial operation of the various accessories to be executed next.

Further, according to the origin return processing shown in FIG. 37, an upper limit is set for the time of the return operation to the origin position of each accessory. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the inconvenience that the return operation of various accessories is not completed forever. Therefore, it is possible to avoid a situation in which various characters are performing a return operation and the effect operation is not performed even during the variable effect, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game.

Further, according to the origin return processing shown in FIG. 37, the return operation of the board accessory (movable accessory 115, sub-image display unit (not shown)) to the origin position and the frame accessory (effect button 161) are returned to the origin position. When both the return operations to the origin position are completed, the process for shifting to the initial operation process is performed. Therefore, the return operation of various accessories to the origin position and the initial operation of various accessories are not executed at the same time, and it is possible to separately check the return operation and the initial operation of various accessories. ..

The movable accessory 115 and the sub image display unit (not shown) are returned to the origin position in a predetermined order (movable accessory 115 → sub image display unit (not shown)). At the same time, the operation of returning to the origin position may be started. By doing so, it is possible to shorten the time required for the return operation of the movable accessory 115 and the sub-image display unit (not shown), and it is possible to smoothly shift to the initial operation of various accessories to be executed next. It becomes.

(Initial operation processing of lamp control unit)
The initial operation process of the lamp control unit 320 will be described with reference to FIG. 38. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the initial operation processing of the lamp control unit 320.

In step R107-1, the CPU 321 determines whether or not the board bonus processing number indicating the transition of the initial operation status of the board bonus is "0". If the board accessory processing number is "0", the process is transferred to step R107-2, and if the board accessory processing number is not "0", the process is transferred to step R107-7.

In step R107-2, the CPU 321 determines whether or not the return abnormality information of the board accessory (movable accessory 115, sub-image display unit (not shown)) is set in the RAM 323. If the return abnormality information is not set, the process is transferred to step R107-4 to perform the initial operation and initial light emission of the board accessory, and if the return abnormality information is set, step R107-3. In, "2" is set in the board accessory processing number assuming that the initial operation of the board accessory is not performed, and the process is transferred to step R107-7.

In step R107-4, the CPU 321 selects a board bonus initial operation pattern determination table (see FIG. 39 (a)) for determining the board bonus initial operation pattern. The details of the board accessory initial operation pattern determination table will be described later.

In step R107-5, the CPU 321 determines an initial operation pattern of the board accessory (movable accessory 115, sub-image display unit (not shown)) and sets it in the RAM 323. Specifically, with reference to the board accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 39 (a), from among a plurality of initial operation patterns based on the type of power ON command and the presence / absence of return abnormality information. Determine one initial motion pattern.

In step R107-6, the CPU 321 updates the board accessory processing number by +1. Specifically, if the board bonus processing number is "0", the board bonus processing number is updated to "1" in order to execute the initial operation of the board bonus.

In step R107-7, the CPU 321 determines whether or not the board accessory processing number is "1". If the board accessory processing number is not "1", the process is transferred to step R107-11, and if the board accessory processing number is "1", it is set in the RAM 323 in step R107-8. The initial operation of the board accessory is executed according to the initial operation pattern of the board accessory.

In step R107-9, the CPU 321 determines whether or not the initial operation of the board accessory has completed all the steps. If the initial operation of the board accessory has not been completed in all processes, the process is transferred to step R107-11, and if the initial operation of the board accessory has been completed in all steps, the board accessory is in step R107-10. Update the processing number by +1. Specifically, if the board bonus processing number is "1", the board bonus processing number is updated to "2" in order to end the processing for initial operation of the board bonus.

In step R107-11, the CPU 321 determines whether or not the frame accessory processing number indicating the transition of the initial operation status of the frame accessory (effect button 161) is “0”. If the frame accessory processing number is "0", the process is transferred to step R107-12, and if the frame accessory processing number is not "0", the process is transferred to step R107-17.

In step R107-12, the CPU 321 determines whether or not the return abnormality information of the effect button 161 is set in the RAM 323. If the return abnormality information is not set, the process is transferred to step R107-14 to perform the initial operation of the frame accessory, and if the return abnormality information is set, the frame is set in step R107-13. Assuming that the initial operation of the accessory is not performed, "2" is set in the frame accessory processing number, and the processing is transferred to step R107-17.

In step R107-14, the CPU 321 selects a frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table (see FIG. 39B) for determining an initial operation pattern of the frame accessory. The details of the frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table will be described later.

In step R107-15, the CPU 321 determines the initial operation pattern of the frame accessory (effect button 161) and sets it in the RAM 323. Specifically, referring to the frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 39B, one initial operation pattern is determined from a plurality of initial operation patterns based on the type of the power ON command. ..

In step R107-16, the CPU 321 updates the frame accessory processing number by +1. Specifically, if the frame accessory processing number is "0", the frame accessory processing number is updated to "1" in order to execute the initial operation of the frame accessory.

In step R107-17, the CPU 321 determines whether or not the frame accessory processing number is "1". If the frame accessory processing number is not "1", the process is transferred to step R107-21, and if the frame accessory processing number is "1", it is set in the RAM 323 in step R107-18. The initial operation of the frame accessory is executed according to the initial operation pattern of the frame accessory.

In step R107-19, the CPU 321 determines whether or not the initial operation of the frame accessory has completed all the steps. If the initial operation of the frame accessory is not completed in all steps, the process is transferred to step R107-21, and if the initial operation of the frame accessory is completed in all steps, the frame accessory is in step R107-20. Update the processing number by +1. Specifically, if the frame accessory processing number is "1", the frame accessory processing number is updated to "2" in order to end the processing for initial operation of the frame accessory.

In step R107-21, the CPU 321 determines whether or not the board accessory processing number and the frame accessory processing number satisfy the end condition. Specifically, it is determined whether the board accessory processing number is "2" and the frame accessory processing number is "2". If the end condition is satisfied, the process is transferred to step R107-22, and if the end condition is not satisfied, the current initial operation process is terminated.

The CPU 321 clears the board accessory processing number and the frame accessory processing number in step R107-22, clears the above-mentioned initial processing number in step R107-23, and ends the current initial operation processing.

As described above, according to the initial operation process shown in FIG. 38, the initial operation of the board accessory (movable accessory 115, sub-image display unit (not shown)) and the initial operation of the frame accessory (effect button 161). Can be executed at the same time (at the same time). Therefore, it is possible to shorten the time required for the initial operation of the various characters, and it is possible to prevent the effect of the various characters from being hindered during the game.

Further, according to the initial operation process shown in FIG. 38, if there is a return abnormality in the movable accessory 115 and the sub image display unit (not shown) constituting the board accessory, the movable accessory 115 and the sub image display are displayed. The initial operation of the part (not shown) is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the board accessory from being completely damaged or damaged by forcibly initializing the board accessory in which the return abnormality has occurred.

Further, according to the initial operation process shown in FIG. 38, when the effect button 161 constituting the frame accessory has a return abnormality, the initial operation of the effect button 161 is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience that the effect button 161 is completely broken or damaged by forcibly initializing the effect button 161 in which the return abnormality has occurred.

Further, according to the initial operation process shown in FIG. 38, even if the initial operation of the board accessory in which the return abnormality has occurred is not executed, the initial operation of the frame accessory in which the return abnormality has not occurred is executed and the return abnormality is executed. Even if the initial operation of the frame accessory in which the above occurs is not executed, the initial operation of the board accessory in which the return abnormality has not occurred is executed. Therefore, it is possible to confirm whether or not there is an abnormality in the operation of the accessory that does not have a return abnormality.

Further, according to the initial operation process shown in FIG. 38, both the initial operation of the board accessory (movable accessory 115, sub-image display unit (not shown)) and the initial operation of the frame accessory (effect button 161) are both. The initial operation process ends when is completed. Therefore, even though one of the board accessory and the frame accessory is performing the initial operation, it may be unclear whether the initial operation or the effect operation is such that the other performs the effect operation. Will disappear.

(Table for determining the initial operation pattern of the board)
FIG. 39A is a diagram showing a board accessory initial operation pattern determination table for determining an initial operation pattern of the board accessory (movable accessory 115, sub-image display unit (not shown)).

The board accessory initial operation pattern determination table is associated with the type of command when the power is turned on, the presence / absence of return abnormality information, and the selected initial operation pattern. For reference, the operation mode at the time of initial operation and the initial operation. The number of steps of is described.

The initial operation pattern is determined when patterns 01 to 03, which are determined when a power-on designation command is received, or when a first power recovery designation command indicating that a customer is waiting is received. Patterns 04 to 06, a pattern determined when a second power recovery designation command indicating that a special symbol variation is being displayed, or a third power recovery designation command indicating that a jackpot game is in progress is received. 07 to 09 are set.

The "movable effect device small descent" is an operation in which the movable accessory 115 moves (descends) from the standby position to an intermediate position slightly below the standby position, and the "movable effect device large descent" is an operation. The movable accessory 115 moves (descends) from the standby position to the effect position below the intermediate position, and the "movable effect device origin return" is the operation of the movable accessory 115 returning to the standby position. It has become.

"Move sub-display device" is an operation in which the sub-image display unit (not shown) rises from the standby position to the effect position, and "return to the origin of the sub-display device" is the sub-image display unit (not shown). Is an operation to return to the standby position.

The "movable effect device LED" is a plurality of LEDs provided on the movable accessory 115, and the "sub-display device LED" is a plurality of LEDs provided around the screen of the sub-image display unit (not shown). It is the LED of.

In the initial operation pattern 02, the initial operation pattern 05, and the initial operation pattern 08, the lighting color of the movable effect device LED is not described, but this point is due to the return abnormality of the first movable member 115a. Is blinking red to notify the abnormality.

Further, in the initial operation pattern 03, the initial operation pattern 06, and the initial operation pattern 09, the lighting color of the sub display device LED is not described, but this point is sub due to the return abnormality of the sub image display unit (not shown). This is because the display device LED blinks red to notify the abnormality.

The first feature of the board accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 39 (a) is that the board role is used when the power is turned on with the initialization of the RAM 203 and when the power is restored without the initialization of the RAM 203. An example is that the operation mode (number of processes, operation of each process) of the initial operation of the object (movable accessory 115, sub-image display unit (not shown)) is the same. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately confirm whether or not there is an abnormality in the operation of the panel accessory regardless of whether the power is turned on or restored.

It should be noted that the operation mode of the initial operation is the same as long as the movement pattern of the board accessory in each process is at least the same, the operation time in each process may be the same, and the operation time in each process is the same. It may be different.

Further, the operation mode (number of processes, operation of each process) of one of the movable accessory 115 and the sub image display unit (not shown) may be different between when the power is turned on and when the power is restored. The operation mode (number of steps, operation of each step) of the initial operation of both the movable accessory 115 and the sub-image display unit (not shown) may be different. By doing so, it is possible to easily grasp whether it is the initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or the initial operation by restoring the power (the control state of the game is restored). Will be.

Further, when the operation mode (number of processes, operation of each process) of the initial operation of the movable accessory 115 and / or the sub image display unit (not shown) is different between when the power is turned on and when the power is restored, the power is turned on. An operation that is not in the initial operation at the time may be executed in the initial operation at the time of power restoration, or an operation that is not in the initial operation at the time of power restoration may be executed in the initial operation at the time of power-on. By doing so, it becomes possible to more easily grasp whether the initial operation is due to the power being turned on (the control state of the game is initialized) or the initial operation due to the power restoration (the control state of the game is restored). ..

The second feature of the board accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 39 (a) is that the board accessory (movable accessory 115, A point is that the light emission mode of the initial light emission during the initial operation of the sub-image display unit (not shown) is different. Therefore, it is possible to grasp whether it is the initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or the initial operation by restoring the power (the control state of the game is restored).

The third feature of the board accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 39 (a) is that the initial light emission of the movable effect device LED is emitted when the power is turned on and when the power is restored to the customer waiting state. While the modes are the same, the light emission mode of the initial light emission of the sub-display device LED is different. Therefore, it is possible to grasp whether it is the initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or the initial operation by restoring the power (the control state of the game is restored).

It should be noted that while the initial light emission mode of the movable effect device LED is the same when the power is turned on and when the power supply is restored to the customer waiting state, the light emission mode of the initial light emission of the sub display device LED is different. However, on the contrary, the light emission mode of the initial light emission of the movable effect device LED differs between the time when the power is turned on and the time when the power is restored to the customer waiting state, while the light emission of the initial light emission of the sub display device LED. The embodiments may be the same.

Further, both the light emission mode of the initial light emission of the movable effect device LED and the light emission mode of the initial light emission of the sub display device LED may be different between when the power is turned on and when the power is restored to the customer waiting state. .. By doing so, it is possible to easily grasp whether it is the initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or the initial operation by restoring the power (the control state of the game is restored). Will be.

The fourth feature of the board accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 39 (a) is that when the power is turned on, when the power is restored during the variable display of the special symbol, or during the jackpot game. It is mentioned that the light emission mode of the initial light emission during the initial operation of the board accessory (movable accessory 115, sub-image display unit (not shown)) is different. Therefore, it is possible to grasp whether it is the initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or the initial operation by restoring the power (the control state of the game is restored).

The fifth feature of the board accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 39 (a) is that it is restored at the time of power restoration to restore the customer waiting state, during the variable display of the special symbol, or during the jackpot game. There is a point that the light emission mode of the initial light emission during the initial operation of the board accessory (movable accessory 115, sub-image display unit (not shown)) differs from that at the time of power restoration. Therefore, it is possible to grasp whether the initial operation is due to the power restoration that restores the customer waiting state, during the variable display of the special symbol, or during the jackpot game.

It should be noted that both the movable effect device LED and the sub display device LED are turned off when the power is restored during the variable display of the special symbol or during the jackpot game, but the movable effect device LED and the sub display are turned off. The device LED may be turned on in the same light emitting mode as when the power supply is restored to restore the customer waiting state.

The sixth feature of the board accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 39 (a) is that the movable accessory 115 has a return abnormality regardless of whether the power is turned on or the power is restored. If there is no return abnormality in the sub image display unit (not shown), the initial operation of the sub image display unit (not shown) is performed without performing the initial operation of the movable accessory 115, and the return abnormality occurs in the movable accessory 115. If there is no return abnormality in the sub image display unit (not shown), the initial operation of the movable accessory 115 is performed and the initial operation of the sub image display unit (not shown) is not performed. Can be mentioned. By doing so, it is possible to perform a suitable initial operation depending on the presence or absence of a return abnormality.

(Frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table)
FIG. 39B is a diagram showing a frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table referred to when determining an initial operation pattern of the frame accessory (effect button 161).

The type of the command when the power is turned on and the selected initial operation pattern are associated with the frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table, and the operation mode at the time of initial operation and the number of steps of the initial operation are described for reference. ing.

The "effect button large rise" is an operation in which the effect button 161 rises from the standby position (initial position) to the effect position (upper position), and the "effect button origin return" means that the effect button 161 is in the standby position. It is an operation to return to.

The first feature of the frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 39B is that the frame combination is used when the power is turned on with the initialization of the RAM 203 and when the power is restored without the initialization of the RAM 203. The operation mode (number of processes, operation of each process) of the initial operation of the object (effect button 161) is different. Therefore, it is possible to easily grasp whether it is the initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or the initial operation by restoring the power (the control state of the game is restored).

The second feature of the frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 39B is that the initial operation of the effect button 161 when the power is turned on is not included in the initial operation of the effect button 161 when the power is restored. There is a point that the operation is made to be executed. Therefore, it becomes possible to more easily grasp whether it is the initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or the initial operation by restoring the power (the control state of the game is restored). ..

The operation mode (number of processes, operation of each process) of the initial operation of the effect button 161 may be the same when the power is turned on and when the power is restored. By doing so, it is possible to appropriately confirm whether or not there is an abnormality in the operation of the frame accessory regardless of whether the power is turned on or restored.

The third feature of the frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 39 (b) is that the frame accessory (effect button 161) is used when the power is turned on and when the power is restored to the customer waiting state. The point that the light emission mode of the initial light emission during the initial operation is different can be mentioned. Therefore, it is possible to grasp whether it is the initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or the initial operation by restoring the power (the control state of the game is restored).

The fourth feature of the frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 39 (b) is that the power is turned on, the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, or the power is restored during the jackpot game. It is mentioned that the light emission mode of the initial light emission during the initial operation of the frame accessory (effect button 161) is different. Therefore, it is possible to grasp whether it is the initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or the initial operation by restoring the power (the control state of the game is restored).

The effect button LED is turned off when the power is restored during the variable display of the special symbol or during the jackpot game, but it is the same as when the power is restored to restore the effect button LED to the customer waiting state. It may be turned on in a light emitting mode.

The fifth feature of the frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 39B is the number of emission colors in the initial emission of the effect button 161 when the power is turned on and the initial emission of the effect button 161 when the power is restored. The point is that the number of emission colors in the above is different. Therefore, it becomes possible to more easily grasp whether it is the initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or the initial operation by restoring the power (the control state of the game is restored). ..

The number of emission colors in the initial emission of the effect button 161 when the power is turned on is larger than the number of emission colors in the initial emission of the effect button 161 when the power is restored, but it may be reversed.

The sixth feature of the frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 39B is that the emission color in the initial emission of the effect button 161 when the power is turned on is the initial light emission of the effect button 161 when the power is restored. There is a point that the emission color that is not included in the emission color in is included. Therefore, it becomes possible to more easily grasp whether it is the initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or the initial operation by restoring the power (the control state of the game is restored). ..

The emission color in the initial emission of the effect button 161 when the power is restored may include an emission color that is not included in the emission color in the initial emission of the effect button 161 when the power is turned on.

The seventh feature of the frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 39 (b) is that the time during which the effect button 161 vibrates when the power is turned on or when the power is restored is effective during the execution of the variable effect. There is a point different from the time when the effect button 161 vibrates during the operation effect executed by operating the effect button 161 during the period. Therefore, it is possible to grasp that the vibration is in the initial operation of the effect button 161.

The eighth feature of the frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 39 (b) is that the initial vibration of the button vibration motor, which does not detect whether or not it is at the origin position, is at the origin position. It can be mentioned that the effect button 161 for which the presence or absence is detected is overlapped with the initial operation of the effect button 161 to be executed. Therefore, the operation confirmation of the effect button 161 and the operation confirmation of the button vibration motor can be performed at the same time, and the time required for the operation confirmation can be shortened.

(Specific example when various drive sources are initially operated while changing settings)
A specific example of the initial operation of various drive sources during the setting change will be described with reference to FIG. 40. FIG. 40 is a diagram showing a timing chart and an example of effect when various drive sources are initially operated while the setting is changed.

First, at the timing of T0, the power of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned off. At this time, a movable body (electric tulip) that affects the result of the game, such as changing whether or not the game ball enters the predetermined area (second start opening 122, large winning opening 125) (ball entry difficulty). Various drive sources (electric tulip opening / closing part 213, big winning door opening / closing part 216) for operating 123, the big prize opening door 125D) are in a stopped state.

In addition, the large winning opening LED that causes the large winning opening (large winning opening 125) to emit light in a predetermined manner during the round game is turned off, and the display 130 (first special symbol display 221 and second special symbol) is turned off. Display 222, normal symbol display 223, first special symbol hold display 218, second special symbol hold display 219, normal symbol hold display 220, round number display 225, status display 224, status confirmation display. 226), the image display unit 114, and the information display 230 are in a non-display (non-operating, turning off, erasing) state.

At the timing of T1, when the setting change operation (setting key switch 229 is ON, RAM clear switch 228 is ON) is performed when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned on, the setting change mode is started in the game control unit 200. It becomes the state before the start before the progress control of the game is started.

At this time, a status confirmation display indicating that the setting is being changed is displayed on the status confirmation display 226, and operation (drive source = ON) is started as an initial operation of various drive sources. In addition, the setting change notification (display of the setting changing screen, setting changing voice "setting is being changed" and initial operation confirmation voice "solenoid operation" to prompt the operation confirmation of various drive sources and that the setting is being changed "Please check" (alternate output) is started. Further, the current set value (here, "6") is displayed on the 7-segment display 230d at the right end of the information display 230.

At the timing of T2, when the operation time of various drive sources (0.512 seconds in this case) elapses, the operation of various drive sources is stopped (drive source = OFF), and thereafter, various drives are performed from the timing of T3 to the timing of T10. The source is repeatedly activated and stopped.

At the timing of T10, if the set value confirmation operation (setting key switch 229 is OFF) is performed while the operating time of various drive sources started from the timing of T9 has not elapsed, the setting change mode and the setting change notification are sent. Upon termination, the operation of various drive sources is immediately stopped (drive source = OFF), the initial operation of various drive sources is terminated, and the set value is displayed on the 7-segment display 230d at the right end of the information display 230. finish. Then, the game control unit 200 shifts from the state before the start to the game-enabled state in which the progress control of the game is performed.

At this time, various displays (display of special symbol, display of normal symbol, display of number of reserved special figures, display of number of reserved symbols, etc.) on the display 130 are started, and the above-mentioned power-on notification is started. To. In addition, the return operation and the initial operation of various accessories (movable accessories 115 (115a, 115b), sub-image display unit (not shown), effect button 161) controlled by the effect control unit 300 are started, and information is provided. In the display 230, all the 7-segment displays 230a to 230d are all lit and the lighting confirmation is started. The initial operation of various accessories ends after the lighting confirmation of the information display 230 is completed.

At the timing of T11, when the confirmation time (here, 5 seconds) elapses from the start of the lighting confirmation of the information display 230, all the lighting of the 7-segment displays 230a to 230d is completed and the performance information (here, the current one) is completed. The display of the normal base value of the game section) is started. After that, every time the display switching time (5 seconds) elapses, the performance information (normal base value) of the four game sections consisting of the current game section and the past three game sections is displayed in order.

(Specific example when various drive sources are initially operated while preparing to clear RAM)
A specific example of the initial operation of various drive sources during RAM clear preparation will be described with reference to FIG. 41. FIG. 41 is a diagram showing a timing chart and an production example when various drive sources are initially operated during RAM clear preparation.

First, at the timing of T0, the power of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned off. At this time, a movable body (electric tulip) that affects the result of the game, such as changing whether or not the game ball enters the predetermined area (second start opening 122, large winning opening 125) (ball entry difficulty). Various drive sources (electric tulip opening / closing part 213, big winning door opening / closing part 216) for operating 123, the big prize opening door 125D) are in a stopped state.

In addition, the large winning opening LED that causes the large winning opening (large winning opening 125) to emit light in a predetermined manner during the round game is turned off, and the display 130 (first special symbol display 221 and second special symbol) is turned off. Display 222, normal symbol display 223, first special symbol hold display 218, second special symbol hold display 219, normal symbol hold display 220, round number display 225, status display 224, status confirmation display. 226), the image display unit 114, and the information display 230 are in a non-display (non-operating, turning off, erasing) state.

When the RAM clear operation (RAM clear switch 228 is turned on) is performed when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned on at the timing of T1, the game control unit 200 starts the RAM clear preparation mode to control the progress of the game. It will be in the pre-start state before it is started.

At this time, a status confirmation display indicating that the RAM is being cleared is displayed on the status confirmation display 226, and operation (drive source = ON) is started as an initial operation of various drive sources. In addition, the RAM clear preparation notification (display of the clear preparation screen, "Please press RAM clear again" and "solenoid operation" are confirmed to prompt the user to confirm the operation of various drive sources and that the RAM is being prepared for clearing. Alternate output of the initial operation confirmation voice of "Please") is started.

At the timing of T2, when the operation time (here, 0.512 seconds) elapses from the start of operation of various drive sources, the operation of various drive sources is stopped (drive source = OFF), and thereafter, the timing of T3 to the timing of T10. The operation and stop of various drive sources are repeated until.

At the timing of T10, when the RAM clear approval operation (RAM clear switch 228 is ON) is performed while the operating time of various drive sources started from the timing of T9 has not elapsed, the RAM clear preparation mode and the RAM clear preparation are performed. As soon as the notification ends, the operation of the various drive sources is immediately stopped (drive source = OFF), the initial operation of the various drive sources ends, and the game control unit 200 controls the progress of the game from the state before the start. Move to the possible state.

At this time, various displays (display of special symbol, display of normal symbol, display of number of reserved special figures, display of number of reserved symbols, etc.) on the display 130 are started, and the above-mentioned power-on notification is started. To. In addition, the return operation and the initial operation of various accessories (movable accessories 115 (115a, 115b), sub-image display unit (not shown), effect button 161) controlled by the effect control unit 300 are started, and information is provided. In the display 230, all the 7-segment displays 230a to 230d are all lit and the lighting confirmation is started. The initial operation of the movable accessory 115 ends after the lighting confirmation of the information display 230 is completed.

At the timing of T11, when the confirmation time (here, 5 seconds) elapses from the start of the lighting confirmation of the information display 230, all the lighting of the 7-segment displays 230a to 230d is completed and the performance information (here, the current one) is completed. The display of the normal base value of the game section) is started. After that, every time the display switching time (5 seconds) elapses, the performance information (normal base value) of the four game sections consisting of the current game section and the past three game sections is displayed in order.

(Specific example when various drive sources are initially operated while checking the settings)
A specific example of the initial operation of various drive sources during the setting confirmation will be described with reference to FIG. 42. FIG. 42 is a diagram showing a timing chart and an production example when various drive sources are initially operated during setting confirmation.

First, at the timing of T0, the power of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned off. At this time, a movable body (electric tulip) that affects the result of the game, such as changing whether or not the game ball enters the predetermined area (second start opening 122, large winning opening 125) (ball entry difficulty). Various drive sources (electric tulip opening / closing part 213, big winning door opening / closing part 216) for operating 123, the big prize opening door 125D) are in a stopped state.

In addition, the large winning opening LED that causes the large winning opening (large winning opening 125) to emit light in a predetermined manner during the round game is turned off, and the display 130 (first special symbol display 221 and second special symbol) is turned off. Display 222, normal symbol display 223, first special symbol hold display 218, second special symbol hold display 219, normal symbol hold display 220, round number display 225, status display 224, status confirmation display. 226), the image display unit 114, and the information display 230 are in a non-display (non-operating, turning off, erasing) state.

When the setting confirmation operation (setting key switch 229 is ON) is performed when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned on at the timing of T1, the game control unit 200 starts the setting confirmation mode and starts the game progress control. It becomes the state before the start before it is done.

At this time, a status confirmation display indicating that the setting is being confirmed is displayed on the status confirmation display 226, and operation (drive source = ON) is started as an initial operation of various drive sources. In addition, the setting confirmation notification (display of the setting confirmation screen, setting confirmation voice "setting is being confirmed" and initial operation confirmation voice "solenoid operation" to prompt the operation confirmation of various drive sources and that the setting is being confirmed "Please check" (alternate output) is started. Further, the current set value (here, "6") is displayed on the 7-segment display 230d at the right end of the information display 230.

At the timing of T2, when the operation time (here, 0.512 seconds) elapses from the start of operation of various drive sources, the operation of various drive sources is stopped (drive source = OFF), and thereafter, the timing of T3 to the timing of T10. The operation and stop of various drive sources are repeated until.

At the timing of T10, if the confirmation end operation (setting key switch 229 is OFF) is performed while the operating time of various drive sources started from the timing of T9 has not elapsed, the setting confirmation mode and the setting confirmation notification are completed. At the same time, the operation of various drive sources is immediately stopped (drive source = OFF), the initial operation of various drive sources is completed, and the display of the set value on the 7-segment display 230d at the right end of the information display 230 is also completed. do. Then, the game control unit 200 shifts from the state before the start to the game-enabled state in which the progress control of the game is performed.

At this time, various displays (display of special symbol, display of normal symbol, display of number of reserved special figures, display of number of reserved symbols, etc.) on the display 130 are started, and the above-mentioned power recovery notification is started. To. In addition, the return operation and the initial operation of various accessories (movable accessory 115, sub-image display unit (not shown), effect button 161) controlled by the effect control unit 300 are started, and all of them are displayed on the information display 230. The 7-segment displays 230a to 230d are all lit and the lighting confirmation is started. The initial operation of the movable accessory 115 ends after the lighting confirmation of the information display 230 is completed.

At the timing of T11, when the confirmation time (here, 5 seconds) elapses from the start of the lighting confirmation of the information display 230, all the lighting of the 7-segment displays 230a to 230d is completed and the performance information (here, the current one) is completed. The display of the normal base value of the game section) is started. After that, every time the display switching time (5 seconds) elapses, the performance information (normal base value) of the four game sections consisting of the current game section and the past three game sections is displayed in order.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, in order to operate the movable body (electric tulip 123, grand prize opening door 125D) that affects the result of the game in the state before the start before the progress control of the game is started. Since the various drive sources (electric tulip opening / closing part 213, large prize opening door opening / closing part 216) are initially operated, the game progresses when the pachinko gaming machine 100 is shipped from the factory or replaced at a game store. It becomes possible to easily confirm the operation of the drive source controlled by the main control means for controlling.

Further, according to the present embodiment, when various drive sources for operating various drive sources that affect the result of the game are initially operated (during the state before the start), the display excluding the state confirmation display 226 is displayed. Instrument 130 (1st special symbol display 221, 2nd special symbol display 222, normal symbol display 223, 1st special symbol hold display 218, 2nd special symbol hold display 219, normal symbol hold display 220, Since the round number display 225 and the status display 224) are in a non-display (non-operating) state, it is possible to prevent an extra processing load from being applied to the game control unit 200, and to check the operation of various drive sources. It becomes possible to concentrate on.

Further, according to the present embodiment, when the various drive sources for operating the movable body that affect the result of the game are initially operated, the setting is being changed and the operation confirmation of the various drive sources is urged. Setting change notification for (RAM clear preparation notification for prompting RAM clear preparation and operation confirmation of various drive sources, setting confirmation notification for setting confirmation and setting confirmation notification for prompting operation confirmation of various drive sources) Therefore, it is possible to inform the workers (workers, game shop staff) who check the operation of the pachinko gaming machine 100 that it is time to check the operation of various drive sources, and check the operation appropriately. Can be done.

Further, according to the present embodiment, various drive sources for operating a movable body that affects the result of the game are initially operated in the setting change mode (RAM clear preparation mode, setting confirmation mode). It is not necessary to create a plurality of states in the pre-start state before the game progress control is started, and it is possible to reduce the development cost (shortening the development period, etc.) of the pachinko gaming machine 100.

Further, according to the present embodiment, when the set value confirmation operation (RAM clear approval operation, confirmation end operation) is performed and the pre-start state ends, the operation time of various drive sources is immediately reached even before the operation time has elapsed. Since the operation of various drive sources is terminated, the initial operation of various drive sources is no longer performed in a game-enabled state, and it may be confused with the operation of various drive sources according to the progress of the game. It is possible to avoid inconvenience.

Further, according to the present embodiment, the progress control of the game is performed by performing the initial operation of various drive sources for operating the movable body that affects the result of the game in the state before the start before the progress control of the game is performed. Since the initial operation of the movable accessory 115 that does not affect the result of the game is performed in the playable state to be performed, two types of initial operations can be confirmed in order, and the operation is appropriately confirmed. It becomes possible.

Further, according to the present embodiment, when various drive sources for operating the large winning opening door 125D are initially operated, the large winning opening LED is left off, so that the light from the large winning opening LED is turned off. This makes it possible to avoid inconveniences such as difficulty in confirming the operation of the large winning door 125D, and it is possible to appropriately confirm the operation.

Further, according to the present embodiment, when various drive sources for operating the large winning opening door 125D are initially operated, the opening signal is not output even though the large winning opening 125 is open. Therefore, it is possible not to give an extra processing load to the game control unit 200, and an information collecting device such as a hall computer that collects information output from the pachinko gaming machine 100 advances the game. It is possible to avoid inconveniences such as collecting information that does not correspond to the above.

Further, according to the present embodiment, the performance information (normal base value) of the gaming machine is not displayed on the information display 230 until the progress control of the gaming machine is started from the power-on of the gaming machine (the display of the performance information is displayed). Since it is regulated), it is possible not to give an extra processing load to the game control unit 200.

Further, according to the present embodiment, the performance information (normal base value) of the gaming machine is displayed (the display of the performance information is permitted) after the progress control of the game is started. It is possible to confirm whether or not the progress control of the game has been started, and it is possible to inform that the performance information is related to the game.

Further, according to the present embodiment, the performance information is not displayed on the 7-segment displays 230a to 230c other than the 7-segment display 230d on which the current setting value is displayed in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. As a result, the current set value can be appropriately notified, and the convenience of the game store can be ensured.

In this embodiment, "during the initial operation of the drive source" or "check the operation of the solenoid" that prompts the visual confirmation of the initial operation of various drive sources in the setting change notification, the RAM clear preparation notification, and the setting confirmation notification. Etc. were not displayed, but such characters may be displayed.

Further, in the present embodiment, after the progress control of the game is started, all the 7-segment displays 230a to 230d of the information display 230 are turned on to confirm the lighting. After the RAM clear preparation mode or the setting confirmation mode, the lighting confirmation may not be performed.

(Modification example when various drive sources are initially operated)
Hereinafter, a modification of the case where various drive sources are initially operated will be specifically described with reference to the drawings. It should be noted that this modification differs from the above embodiment in that the drive source processing operation processing is performed after the setting change mode, the RAM clear preparation mode, and the setting confirmation mode are completed.

(Specific example when various drive sources are initially operated after changing the settings)
A specific example of the case where various drive sources are initially operated after the setting is changed in the modified example will be described with reference to FIG. 43. FIG. 43 is a diagram showing a timing chart and an effect example when various drive sources are initially operated after changing the settings in the modified example.

First, at the timing of T0, the power of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned off. At this time, a movable body (electric tulip) that affects the result of the game, such as changing whether or not the game ball enters the predetermined area (second start opening 122, large winning opening 125) (ball entry difficulty). Various drive sources (electric tulip opening / closing part 213, big winning door opening / closing part 216) for operating 123, the big prize opening door 125D) are in a stopped state.

In addition, the large winning opening LED that causes the large winning opening (large winning opening 125) to emit light in a predetermined manner during the round game is turned off, and the display 130 (first special symbol display 221 and second special symbol) is turned off. Display 222, normal symbol display 223, first special symbol hold display 218, second special symbol hold display 219, normal symbol hold display 220, round number display 225, status display 224, status confirmation display. 226), the image display unit 114, and the information display 230 are in a non-display (non-operating, turning off, erasing) state.

At the timing of T1, when the setting change operation (setting key switch 229 is ON, RAM clear switch 228 is ON) is performed when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned on, the setting change mode is started in the game control unit 200. It becomes the state before the start before the progress control of the game is started. At this time, the status confirmation display indicating that the setting is being changed is displayed on the status confirmation display 226, and the above-mentioned setting change notification is started. Further, the current set value (here, "6") is displayed on the 7-segment display 230d at the right end of the information display 230.

When the set value confirmation operation (setting key switch 229 is OFF) is performed at the timing of T2, the setting change mode and the setting change notification are terminated, the initial operation of various drive sources is started, and the right end of the information display 230 is used. The set value displayed on the 7-segment display 230d is erased and hidden. At this time, the status confirmation display on the status confirmation display 226 ends, and the initial operation notification (display of the screen during initial operation, initial operation confirmation voice "Check the operation of the solenoid" to prompt the operation confirmation of various drive sources is completed. Please output) is started.

At the timing of T3, when the operation standby time (7 seconds in this case) elapses after the initial operation notification is started, the first operation of various drive sources (drive source = ON) is started, and at the timing of T4, various types are started. When the operation time of the drive source (here, 0.512 seconds) elapses, the operation of various drive sources is stopped (drive source = OFF).

At the timing of T5, when the stop time (0.512 seconds in this case) elapses after the operation of the various drive sources is stopped, the second operation of the various drive sources is started, and at the timing of T6, the various drive sources When the operating time (here, 0.512 seconds) elapses, the operation of various drive sources is stopped (drive source = OFF).

At the timing of T7, when the stop time (0.512 seconds in this case) elapses after the operation of the various drive sources is stopped, the third operation of the various drive sources is started, and at the timing of T8, the various drive sources When the operating time (here, 0.512 seconds) elapses, the operation of various drive sources is stopped (drive source = OFF).

At the timing of T9, when the stop time (0.512 seconds in this case) elapses after the operation of the various drive sources is stopped, the initial operation and the initial operation notification of the various drive sources are terminated, and the game control unit 200 is before the start. The state shifts to a game-enabled state in which the progress of the game is controlled.

At this time, various displays (display of special symbol, display of normal symbol, display of number of reserved special figures, display of number of reserved symbols, etc.) on the display 130 are started, and the above-mentioned power-on notification is started. To. In addition, the return operation and the initial operation of various accessories (movable accessory 115, sub-image display unit (not shown), effect button 161) controlled by the effect control unit 300 are started, and all of them are displayed on the information display 230. The 7-segment displays 230a to 230d are all lit and the lighting confirmation is started. The initial operation of various accessories ends after the lighting confirmation of the information display 230 is completed.

At the timing of T10, when the confirmation time (here, 5 seconds) elapses from the start of the lighting confirmation of the information display 230, all the lighting of the 7-segment displays 230a to 230d is completed and the performance information (here, the current one) is completed. The display of the normal base value of the game section) is started. After that, every time the display switching time (5 seconds) elapses, the performance information (normal base value) of the four game sections consisting of the current game section and the past three game sections is displayed in order.

(Specific example when various drive sources are initially operated after clearing RAM)
A specific example of the case where various drive sources are initially operated after the RAM is cleared in the modified example will be described with reference to FIG. 44. FIG. 44 is a diagram showing a timing chart and an effect example when various drive sources are initially operated after the RAM is cleared in the modified example.

First, at the timing of T0, the power of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned off. At this time, a movable body (electric tulip) that affects the result of the game, such as changing whether or not the game ball enters the predetermined area (second start opening 122, large winning opening 125) (ball entry difficulty). Various drive sources (electric tulip opening / closing part 213, big winning door opening / closing part 216) for operating 123, the big prize opening door 125D) are in a stopped state.

In addition, the large winning opening LED that causes the large winning opening (large winning opening 125) to emit light in a predetermined manner during the round game is turned off, and the display 130 (first special symbol display 221 and second special symbol) is turned off. Display 222, normal symbol display 223, first special symbol hold display 218, second special symbol hold display 219, normal symbol hold display 220, round number display 225, status display 224), image display unit 114 and the information display 230 are in a non-display (non-operating, turning off, erasing) state.

When the RAM clear operation (RAM clear switch 228 is turned on) is performed when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned on at the timing of T1, the game control unit 200 starts the RAM clear preparation mode to control the progress of the game. It will be in the pre-start state before it is started. At this time, the RAM clear preparation notification described above is started.

When the RAM clear approval operation (RAM clear switch 228 is ON) is performed at the timing of T2, the RAM clear preparation mode ends and the initial operation of various drive sources is started. At this time, the initial operation notification (display of the screen during initial operation, output of the initial operation confirmation voice of "Please confirm the operation of the solenoid") for prompting the operation confirmation of various drive sources is started.

At the timing of T3, when the operation standby time (7 seconds in this case) elapses after the initial operation notification is started, the first operation of various drive sources (drive source = ON) is started, and at the timing of T4, various types are started. When the operation time of the drive source (here, 0.512 seconds) elapses, the operation of various drive sources is stopped (drive source = OFF).

At the timing of T5, when the stop time (0.512 seconds in this case) elapses after the operation of the various drive sources is stopped, the second operation of the various drive sources is started, and at the timing of T6, the various drive sources When the operating time (here, 0.512 seconds) elapses, the operation of various drive sources is stopped (drive source = OFF).

At the timing of T7, when the stop time (0.512 seconds in this case) elapses after the operation of the various drive sources is stopped, the third operation of the various drive sources is started, and at the timing of T8, the various drive sources When the operating time (here, 0.512 seconds) elapses, the operation of various drive sources is stopped (drive source = OFF).

At the timing of T9, when the stop time (0.512 seconds in this case) elapses after the operation of the various drive sources is stopped, the initial operation and the initial operation notification of the various drive sources are terminated, and the game control unit 200 is before the start. The state shifts to a game-enabled state in which the progress of the game is controlled.

At this time, various displays (display of special symbol, display of normal symbol, display of number of reserved special figures, display of number of reserved symbols, etc.) on the display 130 are started, and the above-mentioned power-on notification is started. To. In addition, the return operation and the initial operation of various accessories (movable accessory 115, sub-image display unit (not shown), effect button 161) controlled by the effect control unit 300 are started, and all of them are displayed on the information display 230. The 7-segment displays 230a to 230d are all lit and the lighting confirmation is started. The initial operation of various accessories ends after the lighting confirmation of the information display 230 is completed.

At the timing of T10, when the confirmation time (here, 5 seconds) elapses from the start of the lighting confirmation of the information display 230, all the lighting of the 7-segment displays 230a to 230d is completed and the performance information (here, the current one) is completed. The display of the normal base value of the game section) is started. After that, every time the display switching time (5 seconds) elapses, the performance information (normal base value) of the four game sections consisting of the current game section and the past three game sections is displayed in order.

(Specific example when various drive sources are initially operated after checking the settings)
A specific example of the case where various drive sources are initially operated after confirming the settings in the modified example will be described with reference to FIG. 45. FIG. 45 is a diagram showing a timing chart and an effect example when various drive sources are initially operated after confirming the settings in the modified example.

First, at the timing of T0, the power of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned off. At this time, a movable body (electric tulip) that affects the result of the game, such as changing whether or not the game ball enters the predetermined area (second start opening 122, large winning opening 125) (ball entry difficulty). Various drive sources (electric tulip opening / closing part 213, big winning door opening / closing part 216) for operating 123, the big prize opening door 125D) are in a stopped state.

In addition, the large winning opening LED that causes the large winning opening (large winning opening 125) to emit light in a predetermined manner during the round game is turned off, and the display 130 (first special symbol display 221 and second special symbol) is turned off. Display 222, normal symbol display 223, first special symbol hold display 218, second special symbol hold display 219, normal symbol hold display 220, round number display 225, status display 224, status confirmation display. 226), the image display unit 114, and the information display 230 are in a non-display (non-operating, turning off, erasing) state.

When the setting confirmation operation (setting key switch 229 is ON) is performed when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned on at the timing of T1, the game control unit 200 starts the setting confirmation mode and starts the game progress control. It becomes the state before the start before it is done. At this time, the status confirmation display indicating that the setting is being confirmed is displayed on the status confirmation display 226, and the setting confirmation notification described above is started. Further, the current set value (here, "6") is displayed on the 7-segment display 230d at the right end of the information display 230.

When the confirmation end operation (setting key switch 229 is OFF) is performed at the timing of T2, the setting confirmation mode and the setting confirmation notification are terminated, the initial operation of various drive sources is started, and the 7 at the right end of the information display 230 is started. The set value displayed on the segment display 230d is erased and hidden. At this time, the status confirmation display on the status confirmation display 226 ends, and the initial operation notification (display of the screen during initial operation, initial operation confirmation voice "Check the operation of the solenoid" to prompt the operation confirmation of various drive sources is completed. Please output) is started.

At the timing of T3, when the operation standby time (7 seconds in this case) elapses after the initial operation notification is started, the first operation of various drive sources (drive source = ON) is started, and at the timing of T4, various types are started. When the operation time of the drive source (here, 0.512 seconds) elapses, the operation of various drive sources is stopped (drive source = OFF).

At the timing of T5, when the stop time (0.512 seconds in this case) elapses after the operation of the various drive sources is stopped, the second operation of the various drive sources is started, and at the timing of T6, the various drive sources When the operating time (here, 0.512 seconds) elapses, the operation of various drive sources is stopped (drive source = OFF).

At the timing of T7, when the stop time (0.512 seconds in this case) elapses after the operation of the various drive sources is stopped, the third operation of the various drive sources is started, and at the timing of T8, the various drive sources When the operating time (here, 0.512 seconds) elapses, the operation of various drive sources is stopped (drive source = OFF).

At the timing of T9, when the stop time (0.512 seconds in this case) elapses after the operation of the various drive sources is stopped, the initial operation and the initial operation notification of the various drive sources are terminated, and the game control unit 200 is before the start. The state shifts to a game-enabled state in which the progress of the game is controlled.

At this time, various displays (display of special symbol, display of normal symbol, display of number of reserved special figures, display of number of reserved symbols, etc.) on the display 130 are started, and the above-mentioned power-on notification is started. To. In addition, the return operation and the initial operation of various accessories (movable accessory 115, sub-image display unit (not shown), effect button 161) controlled by the effect control unit 300 are started, and all of them are displayed on the information display 230. The 7-segment displays 230a to 230d are all lit and the lighting confirmation is started. The initial operation of various accessories ends after the lighting confirmation of the information display 230 is completed.

At the timing of T10, when the confirmation time (here, 5 seconds) elapses from the start of the lighting confirmation of the information display 230, all the lighting of the 7-segment displays 230a to 230d is completed and the performance information (here, the current one) is completed. The display of the normal base value of the game section) is started. After that, every time the display switching time (5 seconds) elapses, the performance information (normal base value) of the four game sections consisting of the current game section and the past three game sections is displayed in order.

As described above, according to this modification, in order to operate the movable body (electric tulip 123, grand prize opening door 125D) that affects the result of the game in the state before the start before the progress control of the game is started. Since the various drive sources (electric tulip opening / closing part 213, large prize opening door opening / closing part 216) are initially operated, the game progresses when the pachinko gaming machine 100 is shipped from the factory or replaced at a game store. It becomes possible to easily confirm the operation of the drive source controlled by the main control means for controlling.

Further, according to this modification, when various drive sources for operating various drive sources that affect the result of the game are initially operated (during the state before the start), the display excluding the state confirmation display 226 is displayed. Instrument 130 (1st special symbol display 221, 2nd special symbol display 222, normal symbol display 223, 1st special symbol hold display 218, 2nd special symbol hold display 219, normal symbol hold display 220, Since the round number display 225 and the status display 224) are in a non-display (non-operating) state, it is possible to prevent an extra processing load from being applied to the game control unit 200, and to check the operation of various drive sources. It becomes possible to concentrate on.

Further, according to this modification, when various drive sources for operating various drive sources that affect the result of the game are initially operated, the initial operation notification for prompting the operation confirmation of the various drive sources is performed. Therefore, it is possible to inform the workers (workers, game clerk) who check the operation of the pachinko gaming machine 100 that it is time to check the operation of various drive sources, and check the operation appropriately. It will be possible to make it.

Further, according to this modification, even if the state is before the start of the game progress control, the result of the game is affected after the setting change mode (RAM clear preparation mode, setting confirmation mode) is completed. Since various drive sources for operating the given movable body are initially operated, it is not necessary to check the operation of various drive sources while changing the settings (RAM clear, setting confirmation). , It is possible to properly check the operation.

Further, according to this modification, various drive sources for operating a movable body that affects the result of the game after the operation standby time has passed after the setting change mode (RAM clear preparation mode, setting confirmation mode) is completed. Since the operation is started, it is possible to allow time from the completion of the setting change (setting confirmation) to the operation confirmation of various drive sources, and the operation confirmation should be performed appropriately. Is possible.

Further, according to this modification, whether the initial operation of various drive sources for operating the movable body that affects the result of the game is after the end of the setting change mode or after the end of the RAM clear preparation mode. Since the same initial operation notification is performed regardless of whether the setting confirmation mode is completed, the control of the initial operation notification can be simplified and the development cost of the pachinko gaming machine 100 can be simplified. (Reduction of development period, etc.) can be achieved.

Further, according to this modification, when various drive sources for operating the large winning opening door 125D are initially operated, the large winning opening LED is left off, so that the light from the large winning opening LED is turned off. This makes it possible to avoid inconveniences such as difficulty in confirming the operation of the large winning door 125D, and it is possible to appropriately confirm the operation.

Further, according to this modification, the progress control of the game is performed by performing the initial operation of various drive sources for operating the movable body that affects the result of the game in the state before the start before the progress control of the game is performed. Since the initial operation of the movable accessory 115 that does not affect the result of the game is performed in the playable state to be performed, two types of initial operations can be confirmed in order, and the operation is appropriately confirmed. It becomes possible.

Further, according to this modification, when various drive sources for operating the large winning opening door 125D are initially operated, the opening signal is not output even though the large winning opening 125 is open. Therefore, it is possible not to give an extra processing load to the game control unit 200, and an information collecting device such as a hall computer that collects information output from the pachinko gaming machine 100 advances the game. It is possible to avoid inconveniences such as collecting information that does not correspond to the above.

Further, according to this modification, the performance information (normal base value) of the gaming machine is not displayed on the information display 230 from the turning on of the power of the gaming machine to the start of the progress control of the game (the display of the performance information is displayed). Since it is regulated), it is possible not to give an extra processing load to the game control unit 200.

Further, according to this modification, the performance information (normal base value) of the gaming machine is displayed (the display of the performance information is permitted) after the progress control of the game is started. It is possible to confirm whether or not the progress control of the game has been started, and it is possible to inform that the performance information is related to the game.

Further, according to this modification, in the setting change mode, the RAM clear preparation mode, or the setting confirmation mode, the 7-segment displays 230a to 230c other than the 7-segment display 230d on which the current setting value is displayed are displayed. However, by not displaying the performance information, the current set value can be appropriately notified, and the convenience of the game store can be ensured.

Further, according to this modification, since the set value and the performance information of the gaming machine are not displayed on the information display 230 during the initial operation of the various drive sources, the initial operation of the various drive sources can be confirmed. On the other hand, it is possible to concentrate the consciousness of the employees of the amusement shop, and it is possible to accurately judge the failure of various drive sources.

[Variable production pattern table]
46 to 50 are diagrams showing an example of setting a variable effect pattern and a table used in the variable effect pattern selection (S2813) in the effect selection process of FIG. 29 (b). Note that FIG. 46 shows a variable effect pattern table used when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the low-probability time-saving non-game state is a big hit. Further, FIG. 47 shows a variable effect pattern table used when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the low-probability time-saving non-game state is a small hit or a miss. Further, FIG. 48 shows a variable effect pattern table used when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the winning of the second starting port 122 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state is a big hit. Further, FIG. 49 shows a variable effect pattern table used when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the winning of the second starting port 122 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state is a small hit or a miss. Further, FIG. 50 shows a variation effect pattern table used when a game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 121 in a high-probability time-saving game state.

A plurality of variable effect patterns are set in the variable effect pattern table used when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the low probability time saving non-game state shown in FIG. 46 is a big hit. Has been done. For the variation patterns "PA1" to "PA6", "PB1" to "PB14", and "PC1 to PC2" set using FIG. 21 above, the variation effect patterns "EA1" to "EA6", ""EB1" to "EB14" and "EC1 to EC2" are associated with each other on a one-to-one basis.
Further, there are a plurality of variable effect pattern tables shown in FIG. 47, which are used when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the low-probability time-saving non-game state is a small hit or a miss. A variable effect pattern is set. The variation effect patterns "ES1 to ES2" and "ER1" to "ER13" are one-to-one with respect to the variation patterns "PD1 to PD2" and "PR1" to "PR13" set using FIG. 21 above. It is associated.
Further, in the variable effect pattern table used when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the winning of the second starting port 122 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state shown in FIG. 48 is a big hit, a plurality of variable effect patterns are displayed. It is set. The variation effect patterns "ED1" to "ED10" are associated one-to-one with the variation patterns "PD1" to "PD10" set using FIG. 22 above.
Further, the variation effect pattern table used when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the winning of the second starting port 122 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state shown in FIG. 49 is a small hit or a miss, has a plurality of variations. The production pattern is set. One pair of variation effect patterns "EF1 to EF2" and "EG1" to "EG8" is used for the variation patterns "PF1 to PF2" and "PG1" to "PG8" set using FIG. 22 above. It is associated with 1.
Further, a plurality of variable effect patterns are set in the variable effect pattern table used when the game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state shown in FIG. 50. "EH1" to "EH8", "EJ1" and "EK1" are one-to-one with respect to the fluctuation patterns "PH1" to "PH8", "PJ1" and "PK1" set using FIG. 23 above. It is associated with.

The number of variable effect patterns is not limited to the numbers shown in FIGS. 46 to 50.
For example, the first in the low-probability time-saving no-game state is larger than the number of variable effect patterns used when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the low-probability time-saving no-game state is a big hit. The number of variable effect patterns used when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the winning of the starting port 121 is out of order may be larger. In addition, the number of variable effect patterns used when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the winning of the second start port 122 in the high-probability time-saving game state is a big hit, the second start port in the high-probability time-saving game state. The number of variable effect patterns used when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the winning of 122 is out of order may be larger. Then, in this case, in the high-probability time-saving game state, the number of variable effect patterns used when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving game state is a big hit. The number of variable effect patterns used when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the winning of the first starting port 121 is out of order may be smaller.
In this case, if the game ball wins in the first starting port 121 in the low-probability time-saving non-game state, or if the game ball wins in the second starting port 122 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state, the lottery result of the special symbol lottery. Even if it is out of the question, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by various productions. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the winning of the first starting port 121 is out of order in the high-probability time-saving game state, it is difficult to improve the interest of the game because the number of variable effect patterns is small. Therefore, the player should make the first starting port 121 win the game ball in the low-probability time-saving non-game state, and should make the second starting port 122 win the game ball in the high-probability time-saving gaming state. Can be recognized by.

Further, for example, in the low-probability time-saving no-game state, the number of variable effect patterns used when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the low-probability time-saving no-game state is a big hit. The number of variable effect patterns used when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the winning of the first starting port 121 is out of order may be larger. In addition, the number of variable effect patterns used when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the winning of the second starting port 122 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state is out of order, is larger than the number of variable effect patterns used in the high-probability time-saving gaming state. The number of variable effect patterns used when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the winning of 122 is a big hit may be larger. Then, in this case, in the high-probability time-saving game state, the number of variable effect patterns used when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving game state is a big hit. The number of variable effect patterns used when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the winning of the first starting port 121 is out of order may be smaller.

Here, the variable effect is an effect for notifying the determination result of the special symbol lottery (that is, whether or not a big hit) in a dramatic manner by displaying the decorative symbol in a variable manner and then stopping the display.
Further, in the illustrated variation effect pattern, "pseudo continuous number of times", "normal", "SP reach", "SPSP reach", "final display color", "zone", "reach fanning", "effect", ""Characteristics","sound" and "button" are set. In addition, "-" in each column of the illustrated table indicates that the corresponding effect is not executed.

Here, the "pseudo-continuous number of times" is the number of times of pseudo-continuous production (pseudo-ream). This pseudo-continuous effect is an effect that makes it appear as if a plurality of times of variable display of the decorative symbol is performed in the variable display of one variation of the special symbol. In the pseudo continuous effect, the effect control unit 300 changes the decorative symbol before the reach state, temporarily stops the decorative symbol, and then starts the variable display of the decorative symbol again. In other words, in the pseudo-continuous production, after the start of the change of the decorative symbol, the temporary stop and re-variation of the decorative symbol are repeated for the set pseudo-continuous number of times, and then the fixed stop is performed to make one change of the special symbol. End the variable display. Here, the temporary stop is a pseudo-stop state in which the decorative design seems to be stopped at first glance, but the design is actually slightly swaying. In other words, the temporary stop of the decorative symbol is treated as if the fluctuation is continuing in terms of game control. Further, the fixed stop of the decorative symbol means a state in which the fixed symbol is fixed as a stop symbol in the variable display for one variation of the special symbol. In the pseudo-continuous effect, the effect control unit 300 may start the variable display of the decorative symbol again after the reach state is set. Further, in the pseudo continuous effect, the effect control unit 300 may change the decorative symbol and then start the variable display of the decorative symbol again without temporarily stopping the decorative symbol.
In the illustrated example, the "pseudo-continuous number" is set to "-", "1", "2", "3", that is, between 0 and 3 times. In addition, the number of pseudo-consecutive times is set in association with the degree of expectation (reliability) that makes a big hit expected. That is, it is set so that the degree of expectation increases as the number of pseudo-consecutive times increases.

"Normal" indicates the type of reach effect. In the illustrated example, any one of "N1", "N2", and "N3" is executed as the type of reach effect.
"SP reach" indicates the type of SP reach effect. In the illustrated example, any one of "SP1", "SP2", and "SP3" is executed as the type of SP reach effect. Further, in the order of "SP1", "SP2", and "SP3", the larger the number, the higher the expectation.

“SPSP reach” indicates the type of SPSP reach effect. In the illustrated example, any one of "SPSP1", "SPSP2", and "SPSP3" is executed as the type of SPSP reach effect. Further, in the order of "SPSP1", "SPSP2", and "SPSP3", the larger the number, the higher the expectation.

The "final display color" indicates the final display color of the variable image (described later). In the present embodiment, by changing the display color of the variable image or the like, the player is notified or suggested of the expected degree of winning the jackpot. In the illustrated example, any of "blue", "green", "red", and "rainbow color" is selected as the final display color. For example, the display color of the variable image may be set in the order of white, blue, green, red, and rainbow so that the later the order, the higher the expectation. Further, the variable effect in which the rainbow-colored variable image is displayed may be a variable effect in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit. That is, the rainbow-colored variable image may have an expectation of 100%.

The "zone" indicates the type of zone effect. The zone effect is, for example, an effect that is expected to be a big hit in the fluctuation of a special symbol. The zone effect may be executed based on the pre-determination result by the pre-determination process. The zone effect performed based on the pre-judgment result may be an effect that is expected to be a big hit in the special symbol change in which the zone effect is started, or the next special of the special symbol change in which the zone effect is started. It may be a production that is expected to be a big hit in the pattern fluctuation. In the illustrated example, any one of "ZO1", "ZO2", and "ZO3" is executed as the type of zone effect. Further, in the order of "ZO1", "ZO2", and "ZO3", the larger the number, the higher the expectation.

"Reach fanning" indicates the type of reach fanning effect. The reach fanning effect is an effect that fuels whether or not the reach effect is executed. In the illustrated example, any one of "RE1", "RE2", and "RE3" is executed as the type of the reach fanning effect. Further, in the order of "RE1", "RE2", and "RE3", the larger the number, the higher the expectation.

"Effect" indicates the type of effect effect. The effect effect is an effect that is expected to be a big hit in the fluctuation of the special symbol by displaying the effect image on the image display unit 114. The effect image is an image used to enhance the effect of the effect image on the visual sense of the player, such as an image of any one of a plurality of colors. For example, the color of the effect image may be set in the order of blue, green, red, and rainbow so that the later the order, the higher the expectation. Further, in the variable effect in which the rainbow-colored effect image is displayed, the variable effect in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit may be used. That is, the rainbow-colored effect image may have an expectation of 100%. Further, the effect image may be, for example, an image imitating light. Further, the effect effect may be executed based on the pre-determination result by the pre-determination process. The effect effect performed based on the pre-judgment result may be an effect that is expected to be a big hit in the special symbol change in which the effect effect is started, or the next special of the special symbol change in which the effect effect is started. It may be a production that is expected to be a big hit in the pattern fluctuation. In the illustrated example, any one of "EF1", "EF2", and "EF3" is executed as the type of effect effect. Further, in the order of "EF1", "EF2", and "EF3", the larger the number, the higher the degree of expectation.

The "character" indicates the type of character production. The accessory effect is an effect in which the movable accessory 115 operates. The character effect may be executed based on the pre-determination result by the pre-determination process. The character effect performed based on the pre-judgment result may be an effect that is expected to be a big hit in the special symbol change in which the character effect is started, or the special symbol change in which the character effect is started. It may be a production that is expected to be a big hit in the next special symbol change. In the illustrated example, any one of "CH1", "CH2", and "CH3" is executed as the type of the accessory effect. Further, in the order of "CH1", "CH2", and "CH3", the larger the number, the higher the expectation.

"Sound" indicates the type of sound production. The sound effect is an effect of outputting sound from the speaker 156. The sound effect may be executed based on the pre-determination result by the pre-determination process. The sound effect performed based on the pre-judgment result may be an effect that is expected to be a big hit in the special symbol change in which the sound effect is started, or the next special of the special symbol change in which the sound effect is started. It may be a production that is expected to be a big hit in the pattern fluctuation. In the illustrated example, any one of "SO1", "SO2", and "SO3" is executed as the type of sound effect. Further, in the order of "SO1", "SO2", and "SO3", the larger the number, the higher the expectation.

The "button" indicates the type of button operation effect. The button operation effect is an effect that encourages the player to operate the effect button 161. The button operation effect may be executed based on the pre-determination result by the pre-determination process. The button operation effect performed based on the pre-judgment result may be an effect that is expected to be a big hit in the special symbol change in which the button operation effect is started, or the special symbol change in which the button operation effect is started. It may be a production that is expected to be a big hit in the next special symbol change. In the illustrated example, any one of "BU1", "BU2", and "BU3" is executed as the type of the button operation effect. Further, in the order of "BU1", "BU2", and "BU3", the larger the number, the higher the degree of expectation.

By the way, the effect control unit 300 determines the variable effect pattern based on the tables shown in FIGS. 46 to 50. Specifically, the effect control unit 300 selects a variation effect pattern corresponding to the variation pattern set in the variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 13) based on the tables shown in FIGS. 46 to 50.
For example, in FIG. 46, when the "big hit symbol" is "high probability symbol A" and the variation pattern is "PB1", "EB1" is selected as the variation effect pattern. In this variable effect pattern "EB1", "-" is set for "pseudo-continuous number of times", "zone", and "reach fanning". That is, when "EB1" is selected as the variable effect pattern, the pseudo continuous effect, the zone effect, and the reach fanning effect are not executed. Further, in the variable effect pattern "EB1", "N1" is executed as "normal", "SP1" is executed as "SP reach", "SPSP1" is executed as "SPSP reach", and "final display color" is executed. Is changed to "red", "EF1" is executed as "effect", "CH1" is executed as "feature", "SO1" is executed as "sound", and "BU1" is executed as "button". Will be executed.
Further, in the variable effect pattern table used when the game ball wins in the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state shown in FIG. 50, the "pseudo-continuous number", "normal", and "normal" of any variable effect pattern. "-" Is also set for "SP reach", "SPSP reach", "final display color", "zone", "reach fan", "effect", "character", "sound" and "button". There is. That is, when the first start port 121 is won in the high-probability time-saving game state, pseudo continuous effect, reach effect, SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect, change in display color of variable image, zone effect, reach fan effect, Effect effects, character effects, sound effects, and button operation effects are not executed.

Although not shown, in the present embodiment, the pre-determination effect pattern table used for selecting the pre-determination effect is provided as in the variation effect pattern table. More specifically, similar to the variable effect pattern table, the pre-judgment effect pattern table used when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the low probability time saving non-game state is a big hit. The pre-judgment effect pattern table used when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the low-probability time-saving non-game state is a small hit or a miss, and the first in the high-probability time-saving game state. 2 The pre-judgment effect pattern table used when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the winning of the starting port 122 is a big hit, and the special symbol lottery based on the winning of the second starting opening 122 in the high probability time-saving gaming state. A pre-judgment effect pattern table used when the lottery result is a small hit or a miss, and a pre-determination effect pattern table used when a game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 121 in a high-probability time-saving game state are provided. There is. These pre-determination effect pattern tables are used in the pre-determination effect pattern selection (S2803) in the pre-determination effect selection process of FIG. 29 (a). Then, when the pre-determination effect pattern is selected from the pre-determination effect pattern table, the pre-determination effect is performed based on the selected pre-determination effect pattern.

[Direction image]
FIG. 51 is a diagram showing one aspect of the effect performed by the effect control unit 300 using the image display unit 114 or the like.
Next, the effect image to be displayed on the image display unit 114 by the effect control unit 300 will be described.
As shown in FIG. 51, the effect image is displayed on the image display unit 114 by being controlled by the effect control unit 300. In the present embodiment, the effect image displayed on the image display unit 114 includes a decorative symbol 41, a variable image 51, a reserved image 52, a reserved number display 55, a small symbol 56, and a stage image 61. Further, the image display unit 114 has a change image 62, a chance eye image 63, a zone notification image 64, a zone identification image 65, a zone effect image 66, an SP reach image 67, an SPSP reach image 68, a button operation image 69, and a pseudo-ream. Image 70, Pseudo-ream effect image 71, Pseudo-ream number image 72, Opening image 74, Right-handed image 75, Round middle image 76, Round number image 77, High accuracy start image 78, Time saving remaining number image 79, Reach fanning effect image 94, a right-handed promotion image 90, a jackpot suggestion image 91, an accessory effect image 92, and a second start effect image 93 may be displayed.

(Decorative pattern 41)
As shown in FIG. 51 (1), three decorative patterns 41 are displayed on the image display unit 114. When explaining each of the three symbols constituting the decorative symbol 41 individually, the symbol arranged on the left side is the "left decorative symbol 41", the symbol arranged in the center is the "middle decorative symbol 41", and the right side. The symbol arranged in may be referred to as "right decorative symbol 41". Further, when the left decorative symbol 41 and the right decorative symbol 41 are collectively described, they may be referred to as "left and right decorative symbols 41". Further, when the left decorative symbol 41, the middle decorative symbol 41, and the right decorative symbol 41 are collectively described, they may be referred to as "three decorative symbols 41". Further, the three decorative symbols 41 having the same numbers may be referred to as "doublet decorative symbols 41".

In the present embodiment, as the display mode of the decorative pattern 41, a highly decorative display mode in which a character image or the like is displayed in addition to characters such as numbers (see FIG. 51 (1)) and characters such as numbers are displayed. There is a display mode with low decorativeness (see FIG. 54 (19)) to be displayed as a main body. Here, the display mode of the decorative symbol 41 is switched according to a change in the gaming state or the progress of the effect. The details will be described later, but for example, the decorative symbol 41 with low decorativeness is displayed in the SP reach effect, the SPSP reach effect, and the high-probability time-saving gaming state, and the decorative symbol 41 with high decorativeness is displayed in other cases. Is displayed.
In addition to characters such as numbers, a simple picture or an image such as a character may be displayed on the decorative pattern 41 having low decorativeness. That is, if the "decorative symbol 41 with low decorativeness" shown in FIG. 54 (19) and the like has a lower decorativeness than the "decorative symbol 41 with high decorativeness" shown in FIG. 51 (1) and the like. good.

The effect control unit 300 variablely displays the three decorative symbols 41 by, for example, vertical scrolling (scrolling downward) in the variable effect of the decorative symbol 41, and then first, first, the left decorative symbol 41 (for example, the number "2"). ”) Is temporarily stopped, then the right decorative symbol 41 (for example, the number“ 3 ”) is temporarily stopped, and then the middle decorative symbol (for example, the number“ 1 ”) is temporarily stopped. After all the decorative symbols 41 are temporarily stopped in this way, finally, all the decorative symbols 41 are fixedly stopped according to the stop display of the special symbol. In addition, the combination "213" of the decorative symbol 41 which was stopped and displayed, shown in FIG. 51 (1), is an example of the combination when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out of order.

(Variable image 51)
As shown in FIG. 51 (2), in the image display unit 114, the special symbol is being variablely displayed (during the variable display of the decorative symbol 41) by the special symbol fluctuation control unit 233 (see FIG. 5 and the like). The variable image 51 showing the above is displayed. That is, the variable image 51 is displayed as an image related to the variable display of the special symbol during the variable display of the special symbol. Then, the variable image 51 is displayed in the area where the variable image 51 is displayed (in the illustrated example, the lower side in the display area of the image display unit 114) when the variable display of the special symbol is started, and the special symbol is displayed. The display disappears when the stop display is displayed. In the illustrated example, the variable image 51 has a spherical shape. Further, a variable pedestal is displayed in the area where the variable image 51 is displayed.

(Reserved image 52)
As shown in FIG. 51 (3), the image display unit 114 displays the reserved image 52 based on the information in the storage area corresponding to the current reserved ball in the RAM 303 (see FIG. 3 and the like). That is, the reserved image 52 is an image showing that the right to determine the jackpot is reserved. Further, in the present embodiment, the display mode of the reserved image 52 on the screen is determined based on the pre-determination result by the pre-determination process.
The display size of the reserved image 52 is smaller than that of the variable image 51. Further, in the illustrated example, the reserved image 52 has a spherical shape. Further, a holding pedestal is displayed in the area where the holding image 52 is displayed. The variable pedestal of the variable image 51 and the reserved pedestal of the reserved image are displayed in different modes.

Further, the reserved image 52 changes the display mode such as the display color based on the pre-determination result by the pre-determination process, and notifies or suggests the expectation of winning the jackpot. Further, when the pre-judgment result by the pre-judgment process is a big hit, the color of the type having a higher expectation is displayed than when it is out of order. For example, when white, blue, green, red, and rainbow are set as the colors of the reserved image 52, the later the color, the higher the expectation may be. Further, the expectation of the rainbow-colored reserved image 52 may be 100%. In the following, the display mode of the white variable image 51 and the display mode of the white reserved image 52 may be referred to as a normal display mode.

Here, as described above, the winning of the first starting port 121 causes a maximum of four holds. Therefore, by winning a prize in the first starting port 121, a maximum of four reserved images 52 are displayed on the image display unit 114. Further, in the present embodiment, the plurality of reserved images 52 generated by winning the first starting port 121 are sequentially arranged in the region on the left side of the variable image 51 toward a position away from the position close to the variable image 51. That is, they are displayed side by side from the right side to the left side.

Although detailed description will be omitted, a maximum of four holdings will occur even if the game ball wins the second starting port 122. Therefore, by winning a prize in the second starting port 122, a maximum of four reserved images 52 are displayed on the image display unit 114. In the present embodiment, the plurality of reserved images 52 generated by winning the second starting port 122 are arranged in order in the region on the right side of the variable image 51 toward a position away from the position close to the variable image 51, that is, on the left side. It is displayed side by side from to the right side.
Further, in the present embodiment, the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 are basically composed of the same or similar forms, respectively. However, the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 may be configured in different forms.

Further, in the following description, with respect to the four reserved images 52 displayed at the maximum, the "first reserved image 52", the "second reserved image 52", and the "third" are arranged in the order of proximity to the variable image 51, respectively. It may be referred to as "holding image 52" or "fourth holding image 52".

(Holding number display 55)
As shown in FIG. 51 (1), the image display unit 114 displays the hold number display 55 based on the information of the storage area corresponding to the hold ball in the RAM 303 (see FIG. 3 and the like). The hold number display 55 is an image showing the hold number. Here, the number of the reserved images 52 displayed on the image display unit 114 changes according to the number of reserved images for winning each of the first starting port 121 and the second starting port 122. In the hold number display 55, the number of holds for winning the first starting port 121 is displayed on the left side, and the number of holds for winning the second starting port 122 is displayed on the right side.

(Small design 56)
As shown in FIG. 51 (1), the image display unit 114 has a special symbol on the image display unit 114 based on the winning of the first starting port 121 or the second starting port 122 by the special symbol fluctuation control unit 233 (see FIG. 5 and the like). A small symbol 56 indicating that the variable display is in progress (the decorative symbol 41 is being variablely displayed) is displayed. The small symbol 56 is controlled by the effect control unit 300, and is variablely displayed in accordance with the variable display of the special symbol, and is stopped and displayed in accordance with the stop display of the special symbol.

In the illustrated example, the small symbol 56 is three images corresponding to the decorative symbol 41, respectively, and is displayed on the right side in the image display area of the image display unit 114. The small symbol 56 is displayed as an image smaller in size than the decorative symbol 41. Further, as described above, the decorative symbol 41 may be displayed in a display mode with high decorativeness or in a display mode with low decorativeness, but the small symbol 56 is a decoration mainly composed of characters. It is displayed only in a low-quality display mode. However, the small symbol 56 may be displayed depending on the display mode in which an image such as a picture or a character is displayed in addition to the characters.

The small symbol 56 is variablely displayed (for example, vertically scrolled) in an manner indicating that the special symbol is being variablely displayed due to the winning of the first starting port 121 or the second starting port 122. In the small symbol 56, during scrolling, the numerical image is displayed while increasing by 1 from "1" to "9", and then is repeatedly displayed by increasing by 1 from "1" again. Then, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the small symbol 56 is stopped and displayed. In the illustrated example, the number indicated by the stopped display small symbol 56 matches the number indicated by the decorative symbol 41. Further explaining, in the example of FIG. 51 (1), the number corresponding to "213" of the decorative symbol 41 is displayed as the small symbol 56.

(Stage image 61)
As shown in FIG. 51 (1), the stage image 61 is displayed on the image display unit 114 as a background of the decorative pattern 41 or the like. The stage image 61 is, for example, an image (stage or the like) related to the content (idol, animation character, or the like) that is the subject of the pachinko gaming machine 100. Further, the stage image 61 may be a moving image. In the illustrated example, a moving image with a space theme is displayed as the stage image 61. The stage image 61 is switched, for example, when the variation effect in one stage is performed a predetermined number of times. Further, the stage image 61 may be switched, for example, when a specific variation effect (for example, a variation effect in which the SPSP reach effect is performed) is performed. Further, the stage image 61 may be switched according to the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 100.

(Change image 62)
As shown in FIG. 52 (7), the change image 62 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The change image 62 is an image displayed on the variable image 51 or the reserved image 52, which is a display mode different from the normal display mode. The change image 62 is displayed, for example, when the change effect is executed. The change effect is an effect of changing the display mode of the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52. More specifically, the change effect is an effect of changing the display color, pattern, shape, etc. (hereinafter, referred to as "display color") of the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52. The change effect may be executed based on the pre-determination result by the pre-determination process. The change image 62 may be displayed without performing the change effect. That is, the changed image 62 may be displayed at the start of displaying the variable image 51 or the reserved image 52. In the illustrated example, a blue image is displayed on the third reserved image 52 as the change image 62.
Further, the change image 62 may be displayed overlapping the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52, or the changed image 62 may be displayed instead of the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52. When the change image 62 is displayed instead of the variation image 51 or the hold image 52, the change image 62 is captured as the variation image 51 or the hold image 52.

(Chance eye image 63)
As shown in FIG. 52 (8), the chance eye image 63 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The chance eye image 63 is an image displayed when the chance eye effect is being executed. The chance eye effect is an effect of displaying the chance eye based on the pre-determination result by the pre-determination process. The chance eye is three decorative symbols 41 which are predetermined symbols of the same color and are combined by symbols containing different numbers. The chance-eye effect, for example, informs or suggests that there is a high possibility that a big hit will occur in the subsequent special symbol change after the special symbol change in which the chance-eye effect is started. Further, in the variable production of a plurality of times, the chance eye production may be performed a plurality of times.
The chance eye image 63 is displayed on the decorative pattern 41. In the illustrated example, as the chance eye image 63, a blue image is displayed on each character and character of the three decorative symbols 41. The chance eye image 63 may be displayed on each character of the three decorative symbols 41, but may not be displayed on the character. Further, the chance eye image 63 may be displayed on each character of the three decorative symbols 41 but not on the characters. That is, the chance eye image 63 may be displayed on at least a part of each of the three decorative symbols 41.

(Zone notification image 64)
As shown in FIG. 52 (12), the zone notification image 64 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The zone notification image 64 is an image that notifies that the zone effect is being executed. In the illustrated example, the text "Enter the chance zone!" Is shown as the zone notification image 64.

(Zone identification image 65)
As shown in FIG. 53 (13), the zone identification image 65 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The zone identification image 65 is an image for identifying the type of zone effect being executed. In the illustrated example, the text of "chance zone" is shown as the zone identification image 65.

(Zone effect image 66)
As shown in FIG. 53 (14), the zone effect image 66 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The zone effect image 66 is an effect image displayed when the zone effect is executed. The zone effect image 66 is displayed based on the pre-determination result by the pre-determination process. In the illustrated example, a blue image is displayed around the image display unit 114 as the zone effect image 66.

(SP reach image 67)
As shown in FIG. 54 (19), the SP reach image 67 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The SP reach image 67 is an image showing that the SP reach effect is being executed. The SP reach image 67 is, for example, a moving image in which a character appearing in the content that is the subject of the pachinko gaming machine 100 plays a mini game.

(SPSP reach image 68)
As shown in FIG. 54 (20), the SPSP reach image 68 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The SPSP reach image 68 is an image showing that the SPSP reach effect is being executed. The SPSP reach image 68 is, for example, a moving image in which characters appearing in the content that is the subject of the pachinko gaming machine 100 fight.

(Button operation image 69)
As shown in FIG. 54 (21), the button operation image 69 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The button operation image 69 is an image displayed when the button operation effect is being executed. By displaying this button operation image 69, it is possible to recognize that it is the timing for the player to operate the effect button 161. In the illustrated example, an image imitating the effect button 161 is displayed as the button operation image 69.

(Pseudo-continuous image 70)
As shown in FIG. 55 (3), the pseudo-continuous image 70 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The pseudo-continuous image 70 is an image showing that the pseudo-continuous effect is executed. In the illustrated example, the text "NEXT" is shown as the pseudo-continuous image 70.

(Pseudo-ream effect image 71)
As shown in FIG. 55 (3), the pseudo-continuous effect image 71 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The pseudo-continuous effect image 71 is an effect image displayed when the pseudo-continuous effect is being executed. In the illustrated example, a blue image is displayed around the pseudo-continuous image 70 as the pseudo-continuous effect image 71.

(Pseudo-ream number image 72)
As shown in FIG. 55 (4), the pseudo-continuous number image 72 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The pseudo-continuous number image 72 is an image showing the pseudo-continuous number of times. In the illustrated example, since it is the second variation display, the text of "x2" is displayed on the pseudo-ream number image 72.

(Opening image 74)
As shown in FIG. 57 (15), the opening image 74 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The opening image 74 is an image for notifying the player of the start of the jackpot game. In the illustrated example, the text "BIG Bonus! Congratulations" is displayed as the opening image 74. The opening image 74 has contents suggesting the type of jackpot (for example, the total number of rounds) and the gaming state after the jackpot game is completed.

(Right-handed image 75)
As shown in FIG. 57 (15), the right-handed image 75 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The right-handed image 75 is an image for urging the player to shoot the game ball toward the right side in the game area 111. In the illustrated example, the right-handed image 75 is displayed with an arrow mark pointing to the right and the text of "right-handed". The right-handed image 75 is displayed, for example, during a jackpot game or in a time-saving game state.

(Image 76 during the round)
As shown in FIG. 57 (16), the image 76 during the round is displayed on the image display unit 114. The image 76 during this round is a moving image of a character appearing in the content that is the subject of the pachinko gaming machine 100. The in-round image 76 is displayed during the round in the jackpot game.

(Round number image 77)
As shown in FIG. 57 (16), the round number image 77 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The round number image 77 is an image for notifying the player of the number of rounds of the round currently being executed in the jackpot game. In the illustrated example, the text "Round 1" is displayed as the round number image 77.

(High accuracy start image 78)
As shown in FIG. 57 (17), the high-accuracy start image 78 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The high-probability start image 78 is an image that notifies the start of the high-probability time-saving gaming state. In the illustrated example, the text "Excite mode entered !!" is displayed as the high-accuracy start image 78.

(Time saving remaining number image 79)
As shown in FIG. 57 (18), the image display unit 114 displays the time-saving remaining number of times image 79. The time-reduced remaining number image 79 is an image showing the remaining number of times of the special symbol lottery in the time-reduced state. In the illustrated example, as the time-saving remaining number image 79, the text of "100 times" indicating that the remaining number of times of the special symbol lottery in the time-saving state is 100 times is displayed.

(Reach fanning effect image 94)
As shown in FIG. 60 (13), the reach fanning effect image 94 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The reach fanning effect image 94 is an image displayed when the reach fanning effect is being executed. In the reach fanning effect, after the left decorative symbol 41 is temporarily stopped, the scrolling right decorative symbol 41 slows down, and an effect of fanning whether or not the symbol matching the left decorative symbol 41 is stopped is executed.
The reach fanning effect image 94 is displayed around the right decorative pattern 41. In the illustrated example, a blue image is displayed around the right decorative pattern 41 as the reach fanning effect image 94.

(Right-handed promotion image 90)
As shown in FIG. 66 (2), the right-handed promotion image 90 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The right-handed promotion image 90 is an image for urging the player to shoot the game ball toward the right side in the game area 111. In the illustrated example, the right-handed promotion image 90 is displayed with an arrow mark pointing to the right and the text "right-handed". Further, the right-handed promotion image 90 has a larger display size than the right-handed image 75.

(Big hit suggestion image 91)
As shown in FIG. 71 (3), the jackpot suggestion image 91 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The jackpot suggestion image 91 is displayed when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot, and is not displayed when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is not a jackpot. Therefore, by displaying the jackpot suggestion image 91, it is suggested to the player that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot. The jackpot suggestion image 91 may be a moving image. Further, while the jackpot suggestion image 91 is displayed in the variation effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state, the variation effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the low-probability time-saving non-game state. Alternatively, the jackpot suggestion image 91 may not be displayed in the variable effect based on the winning of the second starting port 122 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state. That is, the jackpot suggestion image 91 may be displayed only when a variable effect is performed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state is a jackpot.

(Character effect image 92)
As shown in FIG. 75 (12), the accessory effect image 92 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The accessory effect image 92 is an effect image displayed when the accessory effect is being executed. In the illustrated example, a blue image as the accessory effect image 92 is displayed around the region overlapping the medium movable accessory 115B on the image display unit 114.

(2nd start production image 93)
As shown in FIG. 79 (5), the second start effect image 93 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The second start effect image 93 is displayed in the variable effect based on the winning of the second start port 122. That is, the second start effect image 93 is not displayed in the variable effect based on the winning of the first start port 121.

(Variable production example 1)
Next, with reference to FIGS. 51 to 54, a variation effect (variation effect example 1) of the decorative symbol 41 performed by the effect control unit 300 using the image display unit 114 or the like will be specifically described. The variation effect example 1 is an example of variation effect of the decorative symbol 41 based on the fact that the game ball wins the first starting port 121 in the low probability time saving non-game state. Further, in the variation effect example 1, the variation effect is performed five times.
The five variation effects shown in FIGS. 51 to 54 were selected in the order of "ER1", "ER3", "ER2", "ER2", and "ER6" as the "variation effect pattern" in FIG. 47. It is a variable production performed in the case.

As shown in FIG. 51 (1), the effect control unit 300 stops and displays the previous special symbol, and the image display unit 114 confirms and stops the highly decorative decorative symbol 41. And. Further, at this time, the decorative symbol 41, the reserved number display 55, the small symbol 56, and the stage image 61 are displayed on the image display unit 114. Further, at this time, the hold number display 55 of the first start port 121 indicates "0" which is the hold number for winning a prize in the first start port 121, and the hold number display 55 of the second start port 122 is the second. 2 Indicates "0", which is the number of reservations for winning a prize at the starting port.

Then, when the game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 121, as shown in FIG. 51 (2), the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 start to change with the start of the variation display of the special symbol. In the present embodiment, the left decorative symbol 41, the middle decorative symbol 41, the right decorative symbol 41, and the small symbol 56 are displayed in a variable manner by displaying the numbers "1" to "9" in order, respectively. That is, in the present embodiment, the numbers of the left decorative symbol 41, the middle decorative symbol 41, the right decorative symbol 41, and the small symbol 56 can be individually changed. The left decorative symbol 41, the middle decorative symbol 41, the right decorative symbol 41, and the small symbol 56 may display characters different from the numbers, such as English characters. Further, as the game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 121, a winning sound for notifying the winning of the first starting port 121 is output from the speaker 156.
In addition, when it is shown in the drawing that the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 are in a state of being difficult to see by variable display (scrolling) at a particularly high speed, the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 are shown, respectively, in order to make it easy to understand. Displayed by the arrow (↓). Further, in the example shown in FIG. 51 (2), in the decorative symbol 41, the left decorative symbol 41, the middle decorative symbol 41, and the right decorative symbol 41 are arranged side by side in the left-right direction, and move in the vertical direction when the decorative symbol 41 is variablely displayed. (Scrolls), but is not limited to this aspect. For example, in the decorative symbol 41, the left decorative symbol 41, the middle decorative symbol 41, and the right decorative symbol 41 may be arranged side by side in the vertical direction, and each of them may be moved (scrolled) in the horizontal direction.
Further, the state in which the decorative symbol 41 is displayed by an arrow (↓) in the drawing is not limited to the state in which the decorative symbol 41 is difficult to see. For example, the state in which the decorative symbol 41 is displayed by an arrow (↓) in the drawing may be a state in which the decorative symbol 41 is hidden. That is, the state in which the decorative symbol 41 is displayed by the arrow (↓) in the drawing may be a state in which the decorative symbol 41 is invisible or difficult to see.

Further, as in the state shown in FIG. 51 (1), in a state where the winning of the first starting port 121 is not held and the special symbol does not change, the game ball is inserted in the first starting port 121. When a prize is won, first, a hold for winning a prize in the first starting port 121 occurs. Then, in this state, the variation pattern is selected from the variation pattern table (see FIG. 21). Therefore, the “number of hold” when the fluctuation pattern is selected is “1”. Then, when the fluctuation pattern is selected, the number of reservations for winning the first starting port 121 is subtracted. Further, although not shown, if the game ball wins a prize in the second starting opening 122 in a state where the winning of the second starting opening 122 has not been held and the special symbol has not changed, first, the first. 2 There is a hold on winning the prize at the starting port 122. Then, in this state, the fluctuation pattern is selected from the fluctuation pattern table. Therefore, the “number of hold” when the fluctuation pattern is selected is “1”. Then, when the variation pattern is selected, the number of reservations for winning the second starting port 122 is subtracted.

Further, as shown in FIG. 51 (1), in a state where the winning of the first starting port 121 is not held and the special symbol does not change, the game ball is inserted in the first starting port 121. When the prize is won, "1" is displayed on the hold number display 55 of the first start port 121, and the hold image 52 is displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 51 (2), "0" is displayed on the hold number display 55 of the first starting port 121. Further, the reserved image 52 moves to the display position of the variable image 51.
Further, if a game ball wins a prize in the second starting opening 122 in a state where the winning of the second starting opening 122 has not been held and the special symbol has not changed, the number of holdings of the second starting opening 122 is displayed. “1” is displayed in 55, and the reserved image 52 is displayed. After that, "0" is displayed on the hold number display 55 of the second starting port 122. Further, the reserved image 52 moves to the display position of the variable image 51.

Next, when four game balls win a prize in the first starting port 121, four reserved images 52 are displayed as shown in FIG. 51 (3). At this time, every time the game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 121, a winning sound notifying the winning of the first starting port 121 is output from the speaker 156. Further, "4" is displayed on the hold number display 55 of the first starting port 121.

Next, as shown in FIG. 51 (4), the left decorative symbol 41 scrolls at a low speed and then temporarily stops at a position where it has been fixedly stopped until the start of fluctuation. More specifically, the number "4", which is the left decorative symbol 41, is temporarily stopped. When the decorative symbol 41 is temporarily stopped in the drawing, it is expressed by using the same display as the double quotation mark around the decorative symbol 41 for easy understanding.

Next, as shown in FIG. 51 (5), the right decorative symbol 41 scrolls at a low speed and then temporarily stops at a position where it has been fixedly stopped until the start of fluctuation. More specifically, the number "1", which is the right decorative symbol 41, is temporarily stopped.
Next, after scrolling at a low speed, the intermediate decorative symbol 41 temporarily stops at a position where it has been fixedly stopped until the start of fluctuation. More specifically, the number "2", which is the intermediate decorative symbol 41, is temporarily stopped. Then, after the three decorative symbols 41 are temporarily stopped, the three decorative symbols 41 are fixedly stopped as shown in FIG. 51 (6) as the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped. The combination "421" of the decorative symbols 41 is an example of a combination when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out of order. In addition, the small symbol 56 also stops as the fluctuation of the special symbol stops. At this time, the combination "421" of the small symbols 56 matches the combination of the decorative symbols 41.

Next, as shown in FIG. 52 (7), the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 start to change with the start of the next variation display of the special symbol. Further, the hold number display 55 of the first starting port 121 is switched from "4" to "3". Further, the second, third, and fourth reserved images 52 move so as to approach the display position of the variable image 51. Further, at this time, the first reserved image 52 moves to the display position of the variable image 51. Further, after the hold image 52 is moved, the change effect is executed, and the change image 62 is displayed on the third hold image 52. In the illustrated example, the blue change image 62 is displayed on the third reserved image 52 due to the change effect. Further, when the change effect is being executed, the sound effect of the change effect is output from the speaker 156.

Next, as shown in FIG. 52 (8), the three decorative symbols 41 "125" are displayed together and the confirmation is stopped. At this time, the first chance eye effect is executed, and the chance eye image 63 is displayed on the three decorative symbols 41. In the illustrated example, the blue chance eye image 63 is displayed on the three decorative symbols 41 by the first chance eye effect. In addition, the small symbol 56 also stops as the fluctuation of the special symbol stops. At this time, the combination "125" of the small symbols 56 matches the combination of the decorative symbols 41.

Next, as shown in FIG. 52 (9), the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 start to change with the start of the next variation display of the special symbol. Further, the hold number display 55 of the first starting port 121 is switched from "3" to "2".
Next, as shown in FIG. 52 (10), the three decorative symbols 41 "853" are all displayed and the confirmation is stopped. At this time, the second chance eye effect is executed, and the chance eye image 63 is displayed on the three decorative symbols 41. In the illustrated example, the green chance eye image 63 is displayed on the three decorative symbols 41 by the second chance eye effect. In addition, the small symbol 56 also stops as the fluctuation of the special symbol stops. At this time, the combination "853" of the small symbols 56 matches the combination of the decorative symbols 41.

Next, as shown in FIG. 52 (11), the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 start to change with the start of the next variation display of the special symbol. Further, the hold number display 55 of the first starting port 121 is switched from "2" to "1".
Next, as a zone effect based on the pre-determination result by the pre-determination process, the zone notification image 64 is displayed as shown in FIG. 52 (12). In the illustrated example, the zone broadcast image 64 includes the text "Enter the chance zone!". This zone effect is an effect that is expected to be a big hit in the next change of the change of the special symbol being executed. Further, at this time, the character effect is executed based on the pre-determination result by the pre-determination process. In the illustrated example, the left movable accessory 115A moves to cover a part of the image display unit 114 due to the accessory effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 53 (13), the three decorative symbols 41 "553" are all displayed and the confirmation is stopped. At this time, the third chance eye effect is executed, and the chance eye image 63 is displayed on the three decorative symbols 41. That is, the final chance eye effect of the three chance eye effects is executed. In the illustrated example, the red chance eye image 63 is displayed on the three decorative symbols 41 by the third chance eye effect. In addition, the small symbol 56 also stops as the fluctuation of the special symbol stops. At this time, the combination "553" of the small symbols 56 matches the combination of the decorative symbols 41. At this time, the zone identification image 65 is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 53 (14), the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 start to change with the start of the next variation display of the special symbol. Further, the hold number display 55 of the first starting port 121 is switched from "1" to "0". Further, at this time, the zone effect image 66 is displayed as an effect effect based on the pre-determination result by the pre-determination process. In the illustrated example, the blue zone effect image 66 is displayed due to the effect effect. Further, at this time, the sound effect is executed based on the pre-determination result by the pre-determination process, and the voice "Ikuyo" is output from the speaker 156. The sound production that outputs the voice "Ikuyo" is a production that makes the player expect that the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit.

Next, as shown in FIG. 53 (15), the character effect is executed. In the illustrated example, the medium movable accessory 115B moves to cover a part of the image display unit 114 due to the accessory effect. Further, at this time, the change effect is executed, and the change image 62 is displayed on the change image 51. In the illustrated example, the green change image 62 is displayed on the change image 51 due to the change effect. Further, when the change effect is being executed, the sound effect of the change effect is output from the speaker 156.

Next, as shown in FIG. 53 (16), the number "4", which is the left decorative symbol 41, temporarily stops.
Next, as shown in FIG. 53 (17), the reach fanning effect is executed. In the illustrated example, the reach fanning effect by the number "4" which is the right decorative symbol 41 is executed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 53 (18), the reach effect is executed. More specifically, the number "4", which is the right decorative symbol 41, temporarily stops and enters the reach state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 54 (19), the SP reach effect is executed. During the execution of the SP reach effect, the stage image 61 is hidden and the SP reach image 67 is displayed. Further, when the SP reach effect is being executed, the left and right decorative symbols 41 are displayed in a display mode in which the display size is reduced and the decorativeness is low. Further, the left and right decorative symbols 41 are displayed on the upper side of the image display unit 114. In the illustrated example, the left decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the upper left corner of the image display unit 114, and the right decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the upper right corner of the image display unit 114.
The display positions of the left and right decorative symbols 41 when the SP reach effect is being performed are not limited to the illustrated example. When the SP reach effect is being performed, the left and right decorative symbols 41 are at any position on the image display unit 114 as long as they are at positions different from the display positions before the execution of the SP reach effect (see FIG. 53 (18)). It may be displayed in.

Next, as shown in FIG. 54 (20), the SPSP reach effect is executed. The SPSP reach image 68 is displayed during the execution of the SPSP reach effect.
Next, as shown in FIG. 54 (21), the button operation effect is executed, and the button operation image 69 is displayed.
Then, when the player operates the effect button 161 while the button operation image 69 is displayed, the number "5", which is the intermediate decorative symbol 41, is temporarily stopped as shown in FIG. 54 (22). At this time, the intermediate decorative symbol 41 is displayed in a display mode with low decorativeness and with a display size larger than that of the left and right decorative symbols 41.

Next, as shown in FIG. 54 (23), the three highly decorative decorative symbols 41 are temporarily stopped. At this time, the stage image 61 is displayed again.
Then, as the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped, as shown in FIG. 54 (24), the three decorative symbols 41 are fixedly stopped. The combination "454" of the decorative symbols 41 is an example of a combination when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out of order. In addition, the small symbol 56 also stops as the fluctuation of the special symbol stops. At this time, the combination "454" of the small symbols 56 matches the combination of the decorative symbols 41. At this time, the variable image 51 is hidden.

In addition, in the variation effect example 1, the accessory effect of the medium movable accessory 115B (see FIG. 53 (15)), the change effect of the variable image 51 (see FIG. 53 (15)), and the reach fanning effect (FIG. 53 (17)). (See), reach effect (see FIG. 53 (18)), SP reach effect (see FIG. 54 (19)), SPSP reach effect (see FIG. 54 (20)), button operation effect (see FIG. 54 (21)). , Is an effect that includes being executed in the variable effect pattern "ER6" (see FIG. 47) selected in the effect selection process (see FIG. 29 (b)). On the other hand, the change effect of the reserved image 52 (see FIG. 52 (7)), the third chance effect effect (see FIGS. 52 (8), (10) and 53 (13)), and the role of the left movable accessory 115A. The object effect (see FIG. 52 (12)), the zone effect (see FIG. 52 (12)), the sound effect (see FIG. 53 (14)), and the effect effect (see FIG. 53 (14)) are included in the effect selection process. It is an effect that is not included in any of the selected variable effect patterns. That is, each of the above effects based on the pre-determination result is shown in the pre-determination effect pattern table (not shown) used in the pre-determination effect selection process (see FIG. 29 (a)). In other words, the pre-determination effect pattern selected in the pre-determination effect selection process includes the execution of each of the above effects.

(Variable production example 2)
55 to 57 are diagrams showing one aspect of the effect performed by the effect control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example (variation effect example 2) of the variation effect of the decorative symbol 41 will be described with reference to FIGS. 55 to 57. The variation effect example 2 is an example of variation effect of the decorative symbol 41 based on the fact that the game ball wins the first starting port 121 in the low probability time saving non-game state.
It should be noted that FIGS. 55 to 57 are variation effects executed when "EB4" is selected as the "variation effect pattern" in FIG. 46. Further, in the following description, the points different from the above-mentioned variation effect example 1 will be mainly described, and the points that match the variation effect example 1 may be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 55 (1), the decorative symbol 41 is fixedly stopped in the image display unit 114 by the effect control unit 300 as the variation of the previous special symbol ends. At this time, the stage image 61 and the reserved image 52 are displayed. Further, at this time, "1" is displayed on the hold number display 55 of the first starting port 121.

Next, as shown in FIG. 55 (2), the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 start to change with the start of the next variation display of the special symbol. Further, the hold number display 55 of the first starting port 121 is switched from "1" to "0". Further, at this time, the sound effect is executed based on the pre-determination result by the pre-determination process, and the voice "Big hit !?" is output from the speaker 156. This sound effect that outputs the voice "big hit !?" is executed in the variable effect in which the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, and is not executed in the variable effect in which the lottery result of the special symbol is not a big hit. That is, the sound effect that outputs the voice of "big hit !?" is an effect that suggests that the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit based on the preliminary determination result by the preliminary determination process.

Next, as shown in FIG. 55 (3), the pseudo continuous effect is executed, and the pseudo continuous image 70 is displayed. Further, at this time, the pseudo-continuous effect image 71 is displayed. In the illustrated example, a blue pseudo-continuous effect image 71 is displayed around the pseudo-continuous image 70.
Next, as shown in FIG. 55 (4), the variation of the decorative symbol 41 is restarted. Further, at this time, the pseudo-ream number image 72 is displayed. In the illustrated example, since it is the second variation display, the text of "x2" is included in the pseudo-ream number image 72.

Next, as shown in FIG. 55 (5), the zone effect is executed and the zone notification image 64 is displayed. In the illustrated example, the zone notification image 64 includes the text "Entering a super hot zone!". This zone production is a production that is expected to be a big hit in the fluctuation of the special symbol being executed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 55 (6), the number "3", which is the left and right decorative symbols 41, is temporarily stopped, and the reach effect is executed. Further, at this time, the zone identification image 65 is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 56 (7), the change effect of the variable image 51 is executed, and the change image 62 is displayed on the variable image 51. In the illustrated example, the red change image 62 is displayed on the change image 51 due to the change effect. Further, when the change effect is being executed, the sound effect of the change effect is output from the speaker 156.
Next, as shown in FIG. 56 (8), the SP reach effect is executed, and the stage image 61 is hidden.
Next, as shown in FIG. 56 (9), the SPSP reach effect is executed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 56 (10), the button operation effect is executed, and the button operation image 69 is displayed.

Then, when the player operates the effect button 161 while the button operation image 69 is displayed, the accessory effect is executed as shown in FIG. 56 (11). In the illustrated example, the medium movable accessory 115B moves to cover a part of the image display unit 114 due to the accessory effect.
Next, as shown in FIG. 56 (12), the doublet decorative symbol 41 temporarily stops. In the illustrated example, by displaying the decorative symbol 41 in the combination of "333", the player is notified that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit. Further, at this time, the display size of the decorative symbol 41 is larger than that of the display mode (see FIG. 56 (9)) during the execution of the SPSP reach effect. Further, the small symbol 56 maintains the state of being variablely displayed.

As shown in FIG. 57 (13), the three decorative symbols 41 are temporarily stopped in a highly decorative display mode. At this time, the stage image 61 is displayed again.
Then, as the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped, the decorative symbol 41 is fixedly stopped as shown in FIG. 57 (14). The combination of numbers "333" of the decorative symbol 41 is an example of a combination when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit. Further, "333" is displayed as the small symbol 56. That is, the display of the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 is in a state of matching with the combination of "333".

Next, as shown in FIG. 57 (15), the opening image 74 is displayed. At this time, the right-handed image 75 is displayed.
Next, when the jackpot game is started, the image 76 during the round and the image number 77 during the round are displayed as shown in FIG. 57 (16). In the illustrated example, the text "Round 1" is displayed on the round number image 77.

Then, when the jackpot game is completed, the high-accuracy start image 78 is displayed as shown in FIG. 57 (17).
Next, in the high-probability time-saving gaming state, as shown in FIG. 57 (18), "333", which is a decorative symbol 41 having low decorativeness, is fixedly stopped in the image display unit 114. The decorative symbol 41 displayed at this time corresponds to a sequence of numbers that are finally stopped before the jackpot game is executed, that is, when the jackpot is won. Then, the small symbol 56 is also fixedly stopped by the arrangement of the numbers of "333" like the decorative symbol 41. Further, at this time, the stage image 61 corresponding to the high-probability time-saving gaming state is displayed. In the illustrated example, a moving image with the theme of the sea is displayed as a stage image. Further, at this time, the time-saving remaining number of times image 79 is displayed. In the illustrated example, the text of "100 times" indicating the remaining number of times of the special symbol lottery in the time-saving state is displayed as the time-saving remaining number image 79.

In addition, in the variation effect example 2, a pseudo continuous effect (see FIG. 55 (3)), an effect effect (see FIG. 55 (3)), a zone effect (see FIG. 55 (5)), and a reach effect (see FIG. 55 (6)). (See), change effect of the variable image 51 (see FIG. 56 (7)), SP reach effect (see FIG. 56 (8)), SPSP reach effect (see FIG. 56 (9)), button operation effect (FIG. 56 (10)). ), The bonus effect of the medium movable accessory 115B (see FIG. 56 (11)) is the variable effect pattern “EB4” (see FIG. 46) selected in the effect selection process (see FIG. 29 (b)). ) Is a production that includes being performed. On the other hand, the sound effect (see FIG. 55 (2)) is not included in the variable effect pattern (see FIG. 46) selected in the effect selection process (see FIG. 29 (b)). Is. That is, this sound effect based on the pre-determination effect is shown in the pre-determination effect pattern table (not shown) used in the pre-determination effect selection process. In other words, the pre-determination effect pattern selected in the pre-determination effect selection process includes the execution of the above-mentioned sound effect.

(Variable production example 3)
58 to 61 are diagrams showing one aspect of the effect performed by the effect control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example (variation effect example 3) of the variation effect of the decorative symbol 41 will be described with reference to FIGS. 58 to 61. The variation effect example 3 is an example of variation effect of the decorative symbol 41 based on the fact that the game ball wins the second starting port 122 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state. Further, in the variation effect example 3, the variation effect is performed five times.
The five variation effects shown in FIGS. 58 to 61 were selected in the order of "EG1", "EG3", "EG2", "EG2", and "EG5" as the "variation effect pattern" in FIG. 49. It is a variable production performed in the case. Further, in the following description, the points different from each variation effect example described above will be mainly described, and the points that match each variation effect example may be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 58 (1), as the variation of the previous special symbol ends, the effect control unit 300 definitely stops the decorative symbol 41 having low decorativeness in the image display unit 114. There is. At this time, the stage image 61, the right-handed image 75, and the time-saving remaining number image 79 are displayed. In the illustrated example, the text of "90 times" is displayed as the time-saving remaining number image 79.
Then, when the game ball wins a prize in the second starting port 122, as shown in FIG. 58 (2), the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 start to change with the start of the variation display of the special symbol. Further, at this time, the time-saving remaining number image 79 is switched from "90 times" to "89 times". At this time, the variable image 51 is displayed. When the game ball wins in the second starting opening 122, the winning sound notifying that the second starting opening 122 has won is not output.

Next, when four game balls win a prize in the second starting port 122, four reserved images 52 are displayed as shown in FIG. 58 (3). Further, "4" is displayed on the hold number display 55 of the second starting port 122. It should be noted that no winning sound is output in any of the four winnings to the second starting port 122.
Next, as shown in FIG. 58 (4), the three decorative symbols 41 "421" are all displayed and the confirmation is stopped. In addition, the small symbol 56 also stops as the fluctuation of the special symbol stops. At this time, the combination "421" of the small symbols 56 matches the combination of the decorative symbols 41.

Next, as shown in FIG. 58 (5), the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 start to vary with the start of the variation display of the next special symbol. Further, the hold number display 55 of the second starting port 122 is switched from "4" to "3". In addition, the time-saving remaining number image 79 is switched from "89 times" to "88 times".
Next, as shown in FIG. 58 (6), the three decorative symbols 41 "125" are displayed together and the confirmation is stopped. In addition, the small symbol 56 also stops as the fluctuation of the special symbol stops. At this time, the combination "125" of the small symbols 56 matches the combination of the decorative symbols 41.

Next, as shown in FIG. 59 (7), the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 start to change with the start of the next variation display of the special symbol. Further, the hold number display 55 of the second starting port 122 is switched from "3" to "2". Further, the time-saving remaining number image 79 is switched from "88 times" to "87 times".
Next, as shown in FIG. 59 (8), the three decorative symbols 41 "853" are all displayed and the confirmation is stopped. In addition, the small symbol 56 also stops as the fluctuation of the special symbol stops. At this time, the combination "853" of the small symbols 56 matches the combination of the decorative symbols 41.

Next, as shown in FIG. 59 (9), the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 start to vary with the start of the variation display of the next special symbol. Further, the hold number display 55 of the second starting port 122 is switched from "2" to "1". In addition, the time-saving remaining number image 79 is switched from "87 times" to "86 times".
Next, as shown in FIG. 59 (10), the three decorative symbols 41 "731" are all displayed and the confirmation is stopped. In addition, the small symbol 56 also stops as the fluctuation of the special symbol stops. At this time, the combination "731" of the small symbols 56 matches the combination of the decorative symbols 41.

Next, as shown in FIG. 59 (11), the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 start to change with the start of the next variation display of the special symbol. Further, the hold number display 55 of the second starting port 122 is switched from "1" to "0". In addition, the time-saving remaining number image 79 is switched from "86 times" to "85 times". Further, at this time, the character effect is executed based on the pre-determination result by the pre-determination process. In the illustrated example, the left movable accessory 115A moves to cover a part of the image display unit 114 due to the accessory effect. Further, at this time, the sound effect is executed based on the pre-determination result by the pre-determination process, and the voice "Ikuyo" is output from the speaker 156.

Next, as shown in FIG. 59 (12), the number "4", which is the left decorative symbol 41, temporarily stops.
Next, as shown in FIG. 60 (13), the reach fanning effect is executed. In the illustrated example, the reach fanning effect by the number "4" which is the right decorative symbol 41 is executed. Further, at this time, the reach fanning effect image 94 is displayed. In the illustrated example, a blue reach fanning effect image 94 is displayed around the right decorative pattern 41.
Next, as shown in FIG. 60 (14), the number "4", which is the right decorative symbol 41, is temporarily stopped, and the reach effect is executed. In addition, at this time, the character production is executed. In the illustrated example, the medium movable accessory 115B moves to cover a part of the image display unit 114 due to the accessory effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 60 (15), the SP reach effect is executed, and the stage image 61 is hidden. When the SP reach effect is being executed, the display size of the left and right decorative symbols 41 becomes smaller, and the display area of the image display unit 114 changes. In the illustrated example, the left and right decorative symbols 41 are displayed on the upper side of the image display unit 114.
Next, as shown in FIG. 60 (16), the SPSP reach effect is executed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 60 (17), the button operation effect is executed, and the button operation image 69 is displayed.

Then, when the player operates the effect button 161 while the button operation image 69 is displayed, the number "5", which is the intermediate decorative symbol 41, is temporarily stopped as shown in FIG. 60 (18). At this time, the middle decorative symbol 41 is displayed in a display size larger than that of the left and right decorative symbols 41.

Next, as shown in FIG. 61 (19), the three decorative symbols 41 are temporarily stopped according to the display size before the execution of the SP reach effect. At this time, the stage image 61 is displayed again.
Then, as the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped, as shown in FIG. 61 (20), the three decorative symbols 41 are fixedly stopped. The combination "454" of the decorative symbols 41 is an example of a combination when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out of order. In addition, the small symbol 56 also stops as the fluctuation of the special symbol stops. At this time, the combination "454" of the small symbols 56 matches the combination of the decorative symbols 41. At this time, the variable image 51 is hidden.

In addition, in the variation effect example 3, the reach effect (see FIG. 60 (13)), the effect effect (see FIG. 60 (13)), the reach effect (see FIG. 60 (14)), and the accessory of the medium movable accessory 115B. The effect (see FIG. 60 (14)), the SP reach effect (see FIG. 60 (15)), the SPSP reach effect (see FIG. 60 (16)), and the button operation effect (see FIG. 60 (17)) are the effect selection processes. It is an effect that includes being executed in "EG5" (see FIG. 49), which is the variation effect pattern selected in (see FIG. 29 (b)). On the other hand, the left movable accessory 115A's accessory effect and sound effect (see FIG. 59 (11)) are effects that are not included in any of the variable effect patterns selected in the effect selection process. .. That is, the above-mentioned bonus effect and sound effect based on the pre-determination result are shown in the pre-determination effect pattern table (not shown) used in the pre-determination effect selection process (see FIG. 29 (a)). In other words, the pre-determination effect pattern selected in the pre-determination effect selection process includes the execution of the above-mentioned character effect and sound effect.

(Variable production example 4)
62 to 65 are diagrams showing one aspect of the effect performed by the effect control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example (variation effect example 4) of the variation effect of the decorative symbol 41 will be described with reference to FIGS. 62 to 65. The variation effect example 4 is an example of variation effect of the decorative symbol 41 based on the fact that the game ball wins the second starting port 122 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state. Further, in the variation effect example 4, the variation effect is performed four times.
It should be noted that the four variation effects shown in FIGS. 62 to 65 are when "EG3", "EG2", "EG2", and "ED7" are selected in this order as the "variation effect pattern" in FIGS. 48 and 49. It is a variable production that is executed in. Further, in the following description, the points different from each variation effect example described above will be mainly described, and the points that match each variation effect example may be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 62 (1), as the variation of the previous special symbol ends, the effect control unit 300 definitely stops the decorative symbol 41 having low decorativeness in the image display unit 114. There is. At this time, "4" is displayed on the hold number display 55 of the second start port 122, and four hold images 52 are displayed. At this time, the stage image 61, the right-handed image 75, and the time-saving remaining number image 79 are displayed. In the illustrated example, the text of "80 times" is displayed as the time-saving remaining number image 79.

Next, as shown in FIG. 62 (2), the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 start to change with the start of the next variation display of the special symbol. At this time, the hold number display 55 of the second starting port 122 is switched from "4" to "3". In addition, the time-saving remaining number image 79 is switched from "80 times" to "79 times". Further, at this time, the change effect of the hold image 52 is executed, and the change image 62 is displayed on the third hold image 52. In the illustrated example, the blue change image 62 is displayed on the third reserved image 52 due to the change effect. Further, when the change effect is being executed, the sound effect of the change effect is output from the speaker 156.

Next, as shown in FIG. 62 (3), the three decorative symbols 41 "125" are displayed together and the confirmation is stopped. At this time, the first chance eye effect is executed, and the chance eye image 63 is displayed on the three decorative symbols 41. In the illustrated example, the blue chance eye image 63 is displayed on the three decorative symbols 41 by the first chance eye effect. In addition, the small symbol 56 also stops as the fluctuation of the special symbol stops. At this time, the combination "125" of the small symbols 56 matches the combination of the decorative symbols 41.

Next, as shown in FIG. 62 (4), the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 start to change with the start of the next variation display of the special symbol. Further, the hold number display 55 of the second starting port 122 is switched from "3" to "2". In addition, the time-saving remaining number image 79 is switched from "79 times" to "78 times".
Next, as shown in FIG. 62 (5), the three decorative symbols 41 "853" are all displayed and the confirmation is stopped. At this time, the second chance eye effect is executed, and the chance eye image 63 is displayed on the three decorative symbols 41. In the illustrated example, the green chance eye image 63 is displayed on the three decorative symbols 41 by the second chance eye effect. In addition, the small symbol 56 also stops as the fluctuation of the special symbol stops. At this time, the combination "853" of the small symbols 56 matches the combination of the decorative symbols 41.

Next, as shown in FIG. 62 (6), the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 start to change with the start of the next variation display of the special symbol. Further, the hold number display 55 of the second starting port 122 is switched from "2" to "1". In addition, the time-saving remaining number image 79 is switched from "78 times" to "77 times".
Next, as shown in FIG. 63 (7), the zone notification image 64 is displayed as a zone effect based on the pre-determination result by the pre-determination process. This zone effect is an effect that is expected to be a big hit in the next change of the change of the special symbol being executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 63 (8), the three decorative symbols 41 "553" are all displayed and the confirmation is stopped. At this time, the third chance eye effect is executed, and the chance eye image 63 is displayed on the three decorative symbols 41. That is, the final chance eye effect of the three chance eye effects is executed. In the illustrated example, the red chance eye image 63 is displayed on the three decorative symbols 41 by the third chance eye effect. In addition, the small symbol 56 also stops as the fluctuation of the special symbol stops. At this time, the combination "553" of the small symbols 56 matches the combination of the decorative symbols 41. At this time, the zone identification image 65 is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 63 (9), the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 start to change with the start of the next variation display of the special symbol. Further, the hold number display 55 of the second starting port 122 is switched from "1" to "0". In addition, the time-saving remaining number image 79 is switched from "77 times" to "76 times". At this time, the zone identification image 65 is displayed. Further, at this time, the zone effect image 66 is displayed as an effect effect based on the pre-determination result by the pre-determination process. In the illustrated example, a blue zone effect image 66 is displayed around the image display unit 114 due to the effect effect. Further, at this time, the voice of "big hit !?" is output as a sound effect based on the pre-determination result by the pre-determination process. The sound effect that outputs the voice of "big hit !?" is an effect that suggests that the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit based on the pre-determination result by the pre-determination process.

Next, as shown in FIG. 63 (10), the change effect of the variable image 51 is performed, and the change image 62 is displayed on the variable image 51. In the illustrated example, the red change image 62 is displayed on the change image 51 due to the change effect. Further, when the change effect is being executed, the sound effect of the change effect is output from the speaker 156.
Next, as shown in FIG. 63 (11), the number "3", which is the left decorative symbol 41, temporarily stops.
Next, as shown in FIG. 63 (12), the number "3", which is the right decorative symbol 41, is temporarily stopped, and the reach effect is executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 64 (13), the SP reach effect is executed, and the stage image 61 is hidden.
Next, as shown in FIG. 64 (14), the SPSP reach effect is executed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 64 (15), the button operation effect is executed, and the button operation image 69 is displayed.

Then, when the player operates the effect button 161 while the button operation image 69 is displayed, the accessory effect is executed as shown in FIG. 64 (16). In the illustrated example, the medium movable accessory 115B moves to cover a part of the image display unit 114 due to the accessory effect.
Next, as shown in FIG. 64 (17), the doublet decorative symbol 41 temporarily stops. In the illustrated example, by displaying the decorative symbol 41 in the combination of "333", the player is notified that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit. Further, the small symbol 56 maintains the state of being variablely displayed. At this time, the stage image 61 is redisplayed.

Then, as the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped, as shown in FIG. 64 (18), the three decorative symbols 41 having low decorativeness are fixedly stopped. The combination of numbers "333" of the decorative symbol 41 is an example of a combination when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit. Further, "333" is displayed as the small symbol 56. That is, the display of the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 is in a state of matching with the combination of "333".
If the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit, the stage image 61 may be kept hidden even when the doublet decorative symbol 41 is displayed. That is, in the variable effect in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit, after the SP reach effect is started and the stage image 61 is hidden, the variable effect ends without the stage image 61 being redisplayed. You may.

Next, as shown in FIG. 65 (19), the opening image 74 is displayed. At this time, the right-handed image 75 is displayed.
Next, when the jackpot game is started, the image 76 during the round and the image number 77 during the round are displayed as shown in FIG. 65 (20). In the illustrated example, the text "Round 1" is displayed on the round number image 77.
Then, when the jackpot game is completed, the high-accuracy start image 78 is displayed as shown in FIG. 65 (21).

Next, in the high-probability time-saving gaming state, as shown in FIG. 65 (22), "333", which is a decorative symbol 41 having low decorativeness, is fixedly stopped in the image display unit 114. Then, the small symbol 56 is also fixedly stopped by the arrangement of the numbers of "333" like the decorative symbol 41. Further, at this time, the text of "100 times" is displayed as the time-saving remaining number image 79.

In addition, in the variation effect example 4, the variation effect of the variation image 51 (see FIG. 63 (10)), the reach effect (see FIG. 63 (12)), the SP reach effect (see FIG. 64 (13)), and the SPSP reach effect (see FIG. 64 (13)). FIG. 64 (14)), button operation effect (see FIG. 64 (15)), and effect effect of the medium movable accessory 115B (see FIG. 64 (16)) are effect selection processes (see FIG. 29 (b)). It is an effect including that it is executed in "ED7" (see FIG. 48), which is a variable effect pattern selected in. On the other hand, the change effect of the reserved image 52 (see FIG. 62 (2)), the chance eye effect (see FIGS. 62 (3), (5), 63 (8)), and the zone effect (see FIG. 64 (7)). , The effect effect (see FIG. 63 (9)) and the sound effect (see FIG. 63 (9)) are effects that are not included in any of the variable effect patterns selected in the effect selection process. .. That is, each of the above effects based on the pre-determination result is shown in the pre-determination effect pattern table (not shown) used in the pre-determination effect selection process (see FIG. 29 (a)). In other words, the pre-determination effect pattern selected in the pre-determination effect selection process includes the execution of each of the above effects.

(Variable production example 5)
66 to 70 are diagrams showing one aspect of the effect performed by the effect control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example (variation effect example 5) of the variation effect of the decorative symbol 41 will be described with reference to FIGS. 66 to 70. The variation effect example 5 is an example of variation effect of the decorative symbol 41 based on the fact that the game ball wins the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state. Further, in the variation effect example 5, the variation effect is performed five times.
The five variation effects shown in FIGS. 66 to 70 are variation effects executed when "EK1" is selected as the "variation effect pattern" in FIG. 50. Further, in the following description, the points different from each variation effect example described above will be mainly described, and the points that match each variation effect example may be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 66 (1), as the variation of the previous special symbol ends, the effect control unit 300 definitely stops the decorative symbol 41 having low decorativeness in the image display unit 114. There is. At this time, the stage image 61, the right-handed image 75, and the time-saving remaining number image 79 are displayed. In the illustrated example, the text of "90 times" is displayed as the time-saving remaining number image 79.

Next, when the game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 121, as shown in FIG. 66 (2), the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 start to change with the start of the variation display of the special symbol. Further, at this time, the time-saving remaining number image 79 is switched from "90 times" to "89 times". On the other hand, the variable image 51 is not displayed. Further, the winning sound notifying that the game ball has won the prize is not output to the first starting port 121. At this time, the right-handed promotion image 90 is displayed. Further, at this time, the speaker 156 outputs a voice "Please hit right" to encourage the game ball to be launched toward the right side area of the game area 111.

Next, when four game balls win a prize in the first starting opening 121, the right-handed promotion image 90 is displayed as shown in FIG. 66 (3). In the present embodiment, the right-handed promotion image 90 is displayed every time the game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 121. Further, every time a game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 121, a voice "Please hit right" is output from the speaker 156. On the other hand, the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 are not displayed. No winning sound is output in any of the four winnings to the first starting port 121. Further, at this time, "4" is displayed on the hold number display 55 of the first starting port 121. Further, at this time, the first special symbol holding indicator 218 is displayed as "4" corresponding to the number of holdings for winning a prize in the first starting port 121. Further, at this time, the sub first hold indicator 83 is displayed as "4".

Next, as shown in FIG. 66 (4), the number "4", which is the left decorative symbol 41, temporarily stops.
Next, as shown in FIG. 66 (5), the number "2", which is the right decorative symbol 41, temporarily stops.
Next, as shown in FIG. 66 (6), the number "1", which is the intermediate decorative symbol 41, is temporarily stopped.
Next, as shown in FIG. 67 (7), the three decorative symbols 41 "412" are fixedly stopped. In addition, the small symbol 56 also stops as the fluctuation of the special symbol stops. At this time, the combination "412" of the small symbols 56 matches the combination of the decorative symbols 41.

Next, as shown in FIG. 67 (8), the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 start to change with the start of the next variation display of the special symbol. Further, at this time, the time-saving remaining number image 79 is switched from "89 times" to "88 times". Further, at this time, the hold number display 55 of the first starting port 121 is switched from "4" to "3". Further, at this time, the first special symbol holding indicator 218 displays "3" corresponding to the number of holdings for winning a prize in the first starting port 121. Further, at this time, the sub first hold indicator 83 is displayed as "3".

Next, as shown in FIG. 67 (9), the number "1", which is the left decorative symbol 41, temporarily stops.
Next, as shown in FIG. 67 (10), the number "5", which is the right decorative symbol 41, temporarily stops.
Next, as shown in FIG. 67 (11), the number "2", which is the intermediate decorative symbol 41, is temporarily stopped.
Next, as shown in FIG. 67 (12), the three decorative symbols 41 "125" are fixedly stopped. In addition, the small symbol 56 also stops as the fluctuation of the special symbol stops. At this time, the combination "125" of the small symbols 56 matches the combination of the decorative symbols 41.

Next, as shown in FIG. 68 (13), the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 start to change with the start of the next variation display of the special symbol. Further, at this time, the time-saving remaining number image 79 is switched from "88 times" to "87 times". Further, at this time, the hold number display 55 of the first starting port 121 is switched from "3" to "2". Further, at this time, the first special symbol holding indicator 218 displays "2" corresponding to the number of holdings for winning a prize in the first starting port 121. Further, at this time, the sub first hold indicator 83 is displayed as "2".

Next, as shown in FIG. 68 (14), the number "8", which is the left decorative symbol 41, temporarily stops.
Next, as shown in FIG. 68 (15), the number "3", which is the right decorative symbol 41, temporarily stops.
Next, as shown in FIG. 68 (16), the number "5", which is the intermediate decorative symbol 41, is temporarily stopped.
Next, as shown in FIG. 68 (17), the three decorative symbols 41 "853" are fixedly stopped. In addition, the small symbol 56 also stops as the fluctuation of the special symbol stops. At this time, the combination "853" of the small symbols 56 matches the combination of the decorative symbols 41.

Next, as shown in FIG. 68 (18), the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 start to change with the start of the next variation display of the special symbol. Further, at this time, the time-saving remaining number image 79 is switched from "87 times" to "86 times". Further, at this time, the hold number display 55 of the first starting port 121 is switched from "2" to "1". Further, at this time, the first special symbol holding indicator 218 displays "1" corresponding to the number of holdings for winning a prize in the first starting port 121. Further, at this time, the sub first hold indicator 83 is displayed as "1".

Next, as shown in FIG. 69 (19), the number "7", which is the left decorative symbol 41, temporarily stops.
Next, as shown in FIG. 69 (20), the number "2", which is the right decorative symbol 41, temporarily stops.
Next, as shown in FIG. 69 (21), the number "1", which is the intermediate decorative symbol 41, is temporarily stopped.
Next, as shown in FIG. 69 (22), the three decorative symbols 41 "712" are fixedly stopped. In addition, the small symbol 56 also stops as the fluctuation of the special symbol stops. At this time, the combination "712" of the small symbols 56 matches the combination of the decorative symbols 41.

Next, as shown in FIG. 69 (23), the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 start to change with the start of the next variation display of the special symbol. Further, at this time, the time-saving remaining number image 79 is switched from "86 times" to "85 times". Further, at this time, the hold number display 55 of the first starting port 121 is switched from "1" to "0". Further, at this time, the first special symbol holding indicator 218 displays "0" corresponding to the number of holdings for winning a prize in the first starting port 121. Further, at this time, the sub first hold indicator 83 is displayed as “0”.

Next, as shown in FIG. 69 (24), the number "1", which is the left decorative symbol 41, temporarily stops.
Next, as shown in FIG. 70 (25), the number "6", which is the right decorative symbol 41, temporarily stops.
Next, as shown in FIG. 70 (26), the number "3", which is the intermediate decorative symbol 41, is temporarily stopped.
Next, as shown in FIG. 70 (27), the three decorative symbols 41 "136" are fixedly stopped. In addition, the small symbol 56 also stops as the fluctuation of the special symbol stops. At this time, the combination "136" of the small symbols 56 matches the combination of the decorative symbols 41.

As described above, in the variation effect example 5, when the game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 121, the right-handed promotion image 90 is displayed and the voice "Please hit right" is output from the speaker 156. That is, in the present embodiment, it is possible to perform the first notification for prompting the launch of the game ball to the right side in the game area 111 in the high-probability time-saving game state. Then, when the game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 121 while the first notification is being performed, in addition to the first notification, a second notification for prompting the launch of the game ball to the right side in the game area 111 is sent. It is possible to do. Here, the first notification is, for example, the display of the right-handed image 75. Further, the second notification is, for example, the display of the right-handed promotion image 90 or the output from the speaker 156 of the voice "Please right-handed".
In the high-probability time-saving gaming state, the right-handed image 75 is displayed, but the player may shoot the game ball on the left side in the game area 111 without noticing the right-handed image 75. Even in this case, when the game ball wins in the first starting port 121, the right-handed promotion image 90 is displayed and the voice "Please hit right" is output, so that the game is in a high-probability time-saving game state. In, it is possible to urge the player to win a game ball in the second starting port 122.

Further, in the variable effect example 3, the reach effect is executed (see FIG. 60 (14)). Here, in the fluctuation pattern table (see FIG. 22) used when the game ball wins the second starting port 122 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state, the "judgment result" is "missing" and the "variation pattern" is changed to "variation pattern". "With reach" is associated. In other words, there is a possibility that the reach effect is executed in the variable effect in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the winning of the second starting port 122 is out of order in the high-probability time-saving game state. On the other hand, in the variable effect example 5, the reach effect is not executed. Here, in the fluctuation pattern table (see FIG. 23) used when the game ball wins the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state, the "judgment result" is "missing" and the "variation pattern" is changed to "variation pattern". "With reach" is not associated. In other words, the reach effect is not executed in the variable effect in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the winning of the first starting port 121 is out of order in the high-probability time-saving game state. That is, in the present embodiment, when the variable effect in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out of order is executed in the high-probability time-saving game state, the second starting port is more than the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121. The reach effect is easier to execute in the variable effect based on the winning of 122.

In this case, the variable effect based on the winning of the second starting port 122 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state is better than the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state. Even if the lottery result is out of order, it is possible to entertain the player with a high probability of reaching. Therefore, in the variable effect based on the winning of the second starting port 122 in the high-probability time-saving game state, even if the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is wrong, the interest of the game can be improved.

In particular, in the present embodiment, the reach effect is executed in the variable effect example 1 (see FIG. 53 (18)). Here, in the fluctuation pattern table (see FIG. 21) used when the game ball wins the first starting port 121 in the low-probability time-saving non-game state, the "judgment result" is set to the "variation pattern" which is "missing". "With reach" is associated. In other words, there is a possibility that the reach effect will be executed in the variable effect in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the low probability time-saving no-game state is out of order. That is, in the present embodiment, when the variable effect in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out of order is executed, the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state is lower than the variable effect. The reach effect is easier to be executed in the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the gaming state.
In this case, the special symbol lottery is performed by the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the low-probability time-saving non-game state, rather than the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state. Even if the lottery result is out of order, it is possible to entertain the player with a high probability of reaching. Therefore, the player should make the first starting port 121 win the game ball in the low-probability time-saving non-game state, and should make the second starting port 122 win the game ball in the high-probability time-saving gaming state. Can be recognized by.

In this embodiment, it has been explained that the reach effect is not executed (0%) in the variable effect in which the lottery result of the special symbol based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving game state is out of order. , Not limited to this. Even when the variable effect in which the lottery result of the special symbol based on the winning of the first starting port 121 is out of order is executed in the high-probability time-saving game state, the reach effect may be executed.

Further, in the variable effect example 3, the reach fanning effect is executed (see FIG. 60 (13)). Here, in the variable effect pattern table (see FIG. 49) used when the game ball wins in the second starting port 122 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state, the “judgment result” is “missing” in the “variable effect pattern”. Is associated with "reach fanning". In other words, there is a possibility that the reach fanning effect is executed in the variable effect in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the winning of the second starting port 122 in the high-probability time-saving game state is out of order. On the other hand, in the variable effect example 5, the reach fanning effect is not executed. Here, in the variable effect pattern table (see FIG. 50) used when the game ball wins in the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state, the “judgment result” is “missing” in the “variable effect pattern”. Is not associated with "reach fan". In other words, the reach fanning effect is not executed in the variable effect in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving game state is out of order. That is, in the present embodiment, when the variable effect in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out of order is executed in the high-probability time-saving game state, the second starting port is more than the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121. The variable production based on the winning of 122 is easier to execute the reach fanning effect.

In this case, the player has a variation effect based on the winning of the second starting port 122 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state, rather than a variation effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state. Even if the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out of order, it is easy to expect that the reach effect will be executed because the reach fanning effect is easy to be executed. Therefore, in the variable effect based on the winning of the second starting port 122 in the high-probability time-saving game state, even if the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is wrong, the interest of the game can be improved.

In particular, in the present embodiment, the reach fanning effect is executed in the variable effect example 1 (see FIG. 53 (17)). Here, in the variable effect pattern table (see FIG. 47) used when the game ball wins in the first starting port 121 in the low probability time-saving non-game state, the “judgment result” is “missing” in the “variable effect pattern”. Is associated with "reach fanning". In other words, there is a possibility that the reach fanning effect is executed in the variable effect in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the low probability time-saving no-game state is out of order. That is, in the present embodiment, when the variable effect in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out of order is executed, the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state is lower than the variable effect. It is easier to execute the reach fanning effect in the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the gaming state.
In this case, the player has a variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the low-probability time-saving non-game state than the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state. Even if the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out of order, it is easy to expect that the reach effect will be executed because the reach fanning effect is easy to be executed. Therefore, the player should make the first starting port 121 win the game ball in the low-probability time-saving non-game state, and should make the second starting port 122 win the game ball in the high-probability time-saving gaming state. Can be recognized by.

In this embodiment, it is explained that the reach fanning effect is not executed (0%) in the variable effect in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving game state is out of order. However, it is not limited to this. Even when a variable effect in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the winning of the first starting port 121 is out of order is executed in the high-probability time-saving game state, the reach fanning effect may be executed.

Further, as shown in the variation effect example 3, in the variation effect in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the holding number of the second starting port 122 being "4" in the high-probability time-saving gaming state is out of order, there are three. The decorative symbols 41 are all displayed (see FIG. 58 (6)). On the other hand, as shown in the variation effect example 5, in the variation effect in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the holding number of the first starting port 121 being "4" in the high-probability time-saving gaming state is out of order, 3 The two decorative symbols are displayed in order (see FIGS. 67 (9) to (11)). That is, in the present embodiment, when the variable effect in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out of order is performed in the high-probability time-saving game state, the variable effect based on the number of reservations of the first starting port 121 being "4" is obtained. However, in the variation effect based on the number of holdings of the second starting port 122 being "4", the variation in which the three decorative symbols 41 change from an invisible or difficult-to-see state to an easy-to-see state is aligned. The production is easy to execute. Here, the state in which the decorative symbol 41 is invisible is a state in which the decorative symbol 41 is hidden. Further, the state in which the decorative symbol 41 is difficult to see is a state in which the decorative symbol 41 is variablely displayed at high speed. Further, the state in which the decorative symbol 41 is easily visible is, for example, a state in which the decorative symbol 41 is temporarily stopped. Further, when the decorative symbol 41 is fixedly stopped without being temporarily stopped, the state in which the decorative symbol 41 is easily visible is the state in which the decorative symbol 41 is fixedly stopped.

In this case, the number of holdings of the second starting port 122 is "4" in the high-probability time-saving gaming state, rather than the variation effect based on the number of holdings of the first starting port 121 being "4" in the high-probability time-saving gaming state. A variable effect based on a certain value can entertain the player with a high probability of "a powerful variable effect in which the display timings of the three decorative symbols 41 are aligned". Therefore, in the variable effect based on the winning of the second starting port 122 in the high-probability time-saving game state, even if the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is wrong, the interest of the game can be improved.

In particular, in the present embodiment, as shown in the variation effect example 1, the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the holding number of the first starting port 121 being "4" in the low probability time-saving no-game state is out of order. In the variable effect, the three decorative symbols 41 are displayed together (see FIG. 52 (8)). That is, in the present embodiment, when the variable effect in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out of order is performed, the variable effect based on the fact that the number of reservations of the first starting port 121 is "4" in the high-probability time-saving gaming state is obtained. However, it is easier to execute the variable effect in which the display timings of the three decorative symbols 41 are aligned in the variable effect based on the number of reservations of the first starting port 121 being "4" in the low probability time-saving no-game state.
In this case, the number of reservations of the first starting port 121 is "4" in the low-probability time-saving non-game state, rather than the variable effect based on the fact that the number of holdings of the first starting port 121 is "4" in the high-probability time-saving gaming state. The variable effect based on the above can entertain the player with a high probability of "a powerful variable effect in which the display timings of the three decorative symbols 41 are aligned". Therefore, the player should make the first starting port 121 win the game ball in the low-probability time-saving non-game state, and should make the second starting port 122 win the game ball in the high-probability time-saving gaming state. Can be recognized by.

In the present embodiment, in the variable effect in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the holding number of the first starting port 121 being "4" in the high-probability time-saving gaming state is out of order, the three decorative symbols 41 are used. It has been explained that the variable effect in which the display timings are aligned is not executed (0%), but the present invention is not limited to this. Even in a variable effect in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the holding number of the first starting port 121 being "4" in the high-probability time-saving gaming state is out of order, the display timings of the three decorative symbols 41 are aligned. A variable effect may be performed.

Further, in the present embodiment, when a variable effect in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out of order is performed in a high-probability time-saving game state, the variable effect based on the number of reservations of the second starting port 122 being "4" is obtained. However, in the variation effect based on the number of holdings of the first starting port 121 being "4", the display timing at which the three decorative symbols 41 change from an invisible or difficult-to-see state to an easy-to-see state is different. The production is easy to execute.
In this case, in the variable effect based on the winning of the second starting port 122 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state, the number of reservations is "" as compared with the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state. As a variation effect based on "4", the variation effect can be entertained by the player because it is difficult to execute the "variation effect lacking a sense of speed" in which the decorative symbols 41 are displayed in order. Therefore, in the variable effect based on the winning of the second starting port 122 in the high-probability time-saving game state, even if the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is wrong, the interest of the game can be improved.

In particular, in the present embodiment, when the variation effect in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out of order is executed, the variation based on the number of reservations of the first starting port 121 being "4" in the low-probability time-saving no-game state. It is easier to execute the variable effect in which the decorative symbols 41 are displayed in order in the variable effect based on the number of reservations of the first starting port 121 being "4" in the high-probability time-saving game state, rather than the effect.
In this case, in the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the low-probability time-saving non-game state, the number of reservations is larger than that in the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state. Since it is difficult to execute the "variable effect lacking a sense of speed" in which the decorative symbols 41 are displayed in order as the variable effect based on "4", the variable effect can be entertained by the player. Therefore, the player should make the first starting port 121 win the game ball in the low-probability time-saving non-game state, and should make the second starting port 122 win the game ball in the high-probability time-saving gaming state. Can be recognized by.

In the present embodiment, the decorative symbols 41 are displayed in order in the variable effect in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the holding number of the first starting port 121 being "4" in the high-probability time-saving gaming state is out of order. It has been explained that the variable effect to be performed is always executed (100%), but the present invention is not limited to this. Even if the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the holding number of the first starting port 121 being "4" is out of order in the high-probability time-saving gaming state, the decorative symbols 41 are displayed in order. Does not have to be executed.

Further, in the variable effect example 3, the button operation effect is executed (see FIG. 60 (17)). Here, in the variable effect pattern table (see FIG. 49) used when the game ball wins in the second starting port 122 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state, the “judgment result” is “missing” in the “variable effect pattern”. Is associated with a "button". In other words, there is a possibility that the button operation effect is executed in the variable effect in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the winning of the second starting port 122 in the high-probability time-saving game state is out of order. On the other hand, in the variable effect example 5, the button operation effect is not executed. Here, in the variable effect pattern table (see FIG. 50) used when the game ball wins in the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state, the "determination result" is "off" in the "variable effect pattern". No "button" is associated with. In other words, the button operation effect is not executed in the variable effect in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving game state is out of order.
That is, in the present embodiment, when the variable effect in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out of order is executed in the high-probability time-saving game state, the second starting port is more than the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121. The variable effect based on the winning of 122 is easier to perform the variable effect in which the button operation effect is executed.

In this case, the variable effect based on the winning of the second starting port 122 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state is better than the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state. Even if the lottery result is wrong, it is possible to entertain the player with the button operation effect with high probability. Therefore, in the variable effect based on the winning of the second starting port 122 in the high-probability time-saving game state, even if the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is wrong, the interest of the game can be improved.

In particular, in the present embodiment, the button operation effect is executed in the variation effect example 1 (see FIG. 54 (21)). Here, in the variable effect pattern table (see FIG. 47) used when the game ball wins in the first starting port 121 in the low probability time-saving non-game state, the “judgment result” is “missing” in the “variable effect pattern”. Is associated with a "button". In other words, there is a possibility that the button operation effect is executed in the variable effect in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the low-probability time-saving non-game state is out of order. That is, in the present embodiment, when the variable effect in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out of order is executed, the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state is lower than the variable effect. In the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the gaming state, the variable effect in which the button operation effect is executed is more likely to be performed.
In this case, the special symbol lottery is performed by the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the low-probability time-saving non-game state, rather than the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state. Even if the lottery result is out of order, it is possible to entertain the player with the button operation effect with high probability. Therefore, the player should make the first starting port 121 win the game ball in the low-probability time-saving non-game state, and should make the second starting port 122 win the game ball in the high-probability time-saving gaming state. Can be recognized by.

In this embodiment, it has been explained that the button operation is not executed (0%) in the variable effect in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the winning of the first starting port 121 is out of order in the high-probability time-saving gaming state. However, it is not limited to this. Even if the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the winning of the first starting port 121 is out of order in the high-probability time-saving gaming state, the variable effect in which the button operation effect is executed may be performed.

Further, as shown in Example 3 of the variable effect, the display size of the decorative symbol 41 is changed in the variable effect in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the winning of the second starting port 122 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state is out of order. The production is performed (see FIGS. 60 (14) and (15)). Here, the effect of changing the display size of the decorative symbol 41 may be referred to as a size change effect below. On the other hand, as shown in Example 5 of the variable effect, the size change effect is not executed in the variable effect in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state is out of order. That is, in the present embodiment, when the variable effect in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out of order is executed in the high-probability time-saving game state, the second starting port is more than the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121. The variable effect based on the winning of 122 is easier to perform the variable effect in which the size change effect is executed.
In this case, the variable effect based on the winning of the second starting port 122 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state is better than the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state. Even if the lottery result is wrong, it is possible to entertain the player with the size change effect with high probability. Therefore, in the variable effect based on the winning of the second starting port 122 in the high-probability time-saving game state, even if the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is wrong, the interest of the game can be improved.

In particular, in the present embodiment, as shown in the variation effect example 1, in the variation effect in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the winning of the first starting port 121 is out of order in the low probability time saving non-game state, the size change effect is produced. Is being executed (see FIGS. 53 (18) and 54 (19)). That is, in the present embodiment, when the variable effect in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out of order is executed, the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state is lower than the variable effect. The variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the gaming state is easier to perform the variable effect in which the size change effect is executed.
In this case, the special symbol lottery is performed by the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the low-probability time-saving non-game state, rather than the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state. Even if the lottery result is out of order, it is possible to entertain the player with the size change effect with high probability. Therefore, the player should make the first starting port 121 win the game ball in the low-probability time-saving non-game state, and should make the second starting port 122 win the game ball in the high-probability time-saving gaming state. Can be recognized by.

In this embodiment, it is explained that the size change effect is not executed (0%) in the variable effect in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the winning of the first starting port 121 is out of order in the high probability time-saving game state. However, it is not limited to this. Even if the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the winning of the first starting port 121 is out of order in the high-probability time-saving game state, the variable effect in which the size change effect is executed may be performed.

Further, as shown in the variation effect example 3, in the variation effect in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the winning of the second starting port 122 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state is out of order, the image of the decorative symbol 41 temporarily stopped is displayed. An effect of changing the display position on the display unit 114 is performed (see FIGS. 60 (14) and 60 (15)). Here, the effect of changing the display position on the image display unit 114 of the temporarily stopped decorative pattern 41 may be referred to as a position change effect below. On the other hand, as shown in Example 5 of the variation effect, the position change effect is not executed in the variation effect in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state is out of order. That is, in the present embodiment, when the variable effect in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out of order is performed in the high-probability time-saving gaming state, the variable effect based on the winning of the first start port 121 is performed rather than the variable effect of the second start port 122. The variable effect based on the winning of the prize is easier to perform the variable effect in which the position change effect is executed.
In this case, the variable effect based on the winning of the second starting port 122 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state is better than the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state. Even if the lottery result is wrong, it is possible to entertain the player with the position change effect with high probability. Therefore, in the variable effect based on the winning of the second starting port 122 in the high-probability time-saving game state, even if the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is wrong, the interest of the game can be improved.

In particular, in the present embodiment, as shown in the variation effect example 1, in the variation effect in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the low probability time-saving no-game state is out of order, the position change effect is produced. Is being executed (see FIGS. 53 (18) and 54 (19)). That is, in the present embodiment, when a variable effect in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out of order is performed, a low-probability time-saving no-game is performed as compared with a variable effect based on a prize in the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving game state. The variation effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the state is easier to perform the variation effect in which the position change effect is executed.
In this case, the special symbol lottery is performed by the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the low-probability time-saving non-game state, rather than the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state. Even if the lottery result is out of order, it is possible to entertain the player with the position change effect with high probability. Therefore, the player should make the first starting port 121 win the game ball in the low-probability time-saving non-game state, and should make the second starting port 122 win the game ball in the high-probability time-saving gaming state. Can be recognized by.

In this embodiment, it is explained that the position change effect is not executed (0%) in the variable effect in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving game state is out of order. However, it is not limited to this. Even if the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state is out of order, the variable effect in which the position change effect is executed may be performed.

Further, in the variable effect example 3, the SP reach effect is executed (see FIG. 60 (15)). Here, in the variable effect pattern table (see FIG. 49) used when the game ball wins in the second starting port 122 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state, the “judgment result” is “missing” in the “variable effect pattern”. Is associated with "SP reach". In other words, there is a possibility that the SP reach effect is executed in the variable effect in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the winning of the second starting port 122 in the high-probability time-saving game state is out of order. On the other hand, in the variable effect example 5, the SP reach effect is not executed. Here, in the variable effect pattern table (see FIG. 50) used when the game ball wins in the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state, the "determination result" is "off" in the "variable effect pattern". Is not associated with "SP reach". In other words, the SP reach output is not executed in the variable effect in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state is out of order.
That is, in the present embodiment, when the variable effect in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out of order is performed in the high-probability time-saving gaming state, the variable effect based on the winning of the first start port 121 is performed rather than the variable effect of the second start port 122. It is easier to execute the SP reach effect in the variable effect based on the prize.

In this case, the variable effect based on the winning of the second starting port 122 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state is better than the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state. Even if the lottery result is out of order, it is possible to entertain the player with the SP reach effect with high probability. Therefore, in the variable effect based on the winning of the second starting port 122 in the high-probability time-saving game state, even if the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is wrong, the interest of the game can be improved.

In particular, in the present embodiment, the SP reach effect is executed in the variable effect example 1 (see FIG. 54 (19)). Here, in the variable effect pattern table (see FIG. 47) used when the game ball wins in the first starting port 121 in the low probability time-saving non-game state, the “judgment result” is “missing” in the “variable effect pattern”. Is associated with "SP reach". In other words, there is a possibility that the SP reach effect will be executed in the variable effect in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the low probability time-saving no-game state is out of order. That is, in the present embodiment, when a variable effect in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out of order is performed, a low-probability time-saving no-game is performed as compared with a variable effect based on a prize in the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving game state. The variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the state is easier to execute the SP reach effect.
In this case, the special symbol lottery is performed by the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the low-probability time-saving non-game state, rather than the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state. Even if the lottery result is out of order, it is possible to entertain the player with the SP reach effect with high probability. Therefore, the player should make the first starting port 121 win the game ball in the low-probability time-saving non-game state, and should make the second starting port 122 win the game ball in the high-probability time-saving gaming state. Can be recognized by.

In this embodiment, it is explained that the SP reach effect is not executed (0%) in the variable effect in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving game state is out of order. However, it is not limited to this. Even if the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state is out of order, the variable effect in which the SP reach effect is executed may be performed.

In the present embodiment, the size change effect and the position change effect are the effects performed in association with the SP reach effect. In other words, when the "variable effect pattern" (see FIGS. 46 to 50) in which the "SP reach" is executed is selected, the size change effect and the position change effect are performed.
However, the size change effect and the position change effect may be performed independently of the SP reach effect. That is, even when the SP reach effect is not performed, the size change effect and the position change effect may be performed. Further, even when the SP reach effect is performed, the size change effect and the position change effect may not be performed.

Further, in the variable effect example 3, the accessory effect is executed (see FIG. 60 (14)). Here, in the variable effect pattern table (see FIG. 49) used when the game ball wins in the second starting port 122 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state, the “judgment result” is “missing” in the “variable effect pattern”. Is associated with a "feature". In other words, in the variable effect in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the winning of the second starting port 122 in the high-probability time-saving game state is out of order, there is a possibility that the character effect is executed. On the other hand, in the variable effect example 5, the character effect is not executed. Here, in the variable effect pattern table (see FIG. 50) used when the game ball wins in the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state, the "determination result" is "off" in the "variable effect pattern". "Characteristics" is not associated with. In other words, in the variable effect in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving game state is out of order, the character effect is not executed.
That is, in the present embodiment, when the variable effect in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out of order is performed in the high-probability time-saving gaming state, the variable effect based on the winning of the first start port 121 is performed rather than the variable effect of the second start port 122. It is easier to perform a variable effect in which a character effect is executed in a variable effect based on a prize.

In this case, the variable effect based on the winning of the second starting port 122 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state is better than the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state. Even if the lottery result is out of order, it is possible to entertain the player with the character production with high probability. Therefore, in the variable effect based on the winning of the second starting port 122 in the high-probability time-saving game state, even if the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is wrong, the interest of the game can be improved.

In particular, in the present embodiment, the accessory effect is executed in the variable effect example 1 (see FIG. 53 (15)). Here, in the variable effect pattern table (see FIG. 47) used when the game ball wins in the first starting port 121 in the low probability time-saving non-game state, the “judgment result” is “missing” in the “variable effect pattern”. Is associated with "features". In other words, there is a possibility that the character effect is executed in the variable effect in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the low probability time-saving no-game state is out of order. That is, in the present embodiment, when a variable effect in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out of order is performed, a low-probability time-saving no-game is performed as compared with a variable effect based on a prize in the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving game state. The variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the state is easier to perform the variable effect in which the character effect is executed.
In this case, the special symbol lottery is performed by the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the low-probability time-saving non-game state, rather than the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state. Even if the lottery result is out of order, it is possible to entertain the player with the character production with high probability. Therefore, the player should make the first starting port 121 win the game ball in the low-probability time-saving non-game state, and should make the second starting port 122 win the game ball in the high-probability time-saving gaming state. Can be recognized by.

In this embodiment, it is explained that the character effect is not executed (0%) in the variable effect in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving game state is out of order. However, it is not limited to this. Even if the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state is out of order, the variable effect in which the character effect is executed may be performed.

Further, in the present embodiment, even if the game ball wins the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving game state, the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 are not displayed. On the other hand, when the game ball wins a prize in the second starting port 122 in the high-probability time-saving game state, the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 are displayed.
In this case, the player is more likely to win a prize in the second starting port 122 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state than in the case where the game ball wins in the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state. The variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 can entertain the player. Therefore, when the game ball wins a prize in the second starting port 122 in the high-probability time-saving game state, the interest of the game can be improved.

In particular, in the present embodiment, when the game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 121 in the low-probability time-saving non-game state, the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 are displayed.
In this case, the player is better off when the game ball wins the first start port 121 in the low-probability time-saving non-game state than when the game ball wins in the first start port 121 in the high-probability time-saving game state. The variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 can entertain the player. Therefore, the player should make the first starting port 121 win the game ball in the low-probability time-saving non-game state, and should make the second starting port 122 win the game ball in the high-probability time-saving gaming state. Can be recognized by.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the game ball wins the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving game state, the hold image 52 is not displayed, while the hold number display 55 is updated.
When the game ball wins in the first start opening 121 in the high-probability time-saving game state, not only the hold image 52 is not displayed but also the hold number display 55 is not updated, the player plays a game in the first start opening 121. It becomes impossible to recognize whether or not the ball has won a prize. Therefore, in the present embodiment, by updating the hold number display 55, the player cannot expect that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit through the hold image 52, but the first start port 121 It is possible to recognize that the game ball has won a prize.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving game state, the time-saving remaining number image 79 is updated. As a result, even when the special symbol lottery based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving game state is performed, the player is made to recognize that the remaining number of times of the special symbol lottery in the time-saving state is reduced. be able to.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the second start opening 122 is won in the high probability time-saving gaming state, the hold image 52, the hold number display 55, the second special symbol hold display 219, and the sub second hold display are displayed. 84 informs the information about the hold. On the other hand, when the first start port 121 is won in the high-probability time-saving gaming state, the information regarding the hold is notified by the first special symbol hold indicator 218 and the sub first hold indicator 83, but the hold image 52. And the information regarding the hold is not notified by the hold number display 55. That is, in the present embodiment, in the high-probability time-saving gaming state, there are more types of information regarding the hold when the second start opening 122 is won than when the first start opening 121 is won. ..
In this case, the case where the game ball wins the second starting port 122 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state is more diverse than the case where the game ball wins the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state. Information can entertain the player. Therefore, when the game ball wins in the second starting port 122 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state, the game is played through the information regarding the hold, rather than when the game ball wins in the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state. It is possible to improve the interest of.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the first start opening 121 is won in the low probability time-saving non-game state, the hold image 52, the hold number display 55, the first special symbol hold display 218 and the sub first hold display 83 Will inform you about the hold. That is, in the present embodiment, the case where the first starting port 121 is won in the low-probability time-saving non-game state is notified as information regarding the hold, rather than the case where the first starting port 121 is won in the high-probability time-saving gaming state. There are many types to be done.
In this case, the case where the game ball wins the first starting port 121 in the low-probability time-saving non-game state is more diverse than the case where the game ball wins the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state. The information can entertain the player. Therefore, the player should make the first starting port 121 win the game ball in the low-probability time-saving non-game state, and should make the second starting port 122 win the game ball in the high-probability time-saving gaming state. Can be recognized by.

(Variable production example 6)
71 and 72 are diagrams showing one aspect of the effect performed by the effect control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, another specific example (variation effect example 6) of the variation effect of the decorative symbol 41 will be described with reference to FIGS. 71 and 72. The variation effect example 6 is an example of variation effect of the decorative symbol 41 based on the fact that the game ball wins the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state.
The variation effect shown in FIGS. 71 and 72 is an example of the variation effect of the decorative symbol 41 when "EH4" is selected as the "variation effect pattern" in FIG. 50. Further, in the following description, the points different from each variation effect example described above will be mainly described, and the points that match each variation effect example may be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 71 (1), as the variation of the previous special symbol ends, the effect control unit 300 definitely stops the decorative symbol 41 having low decorativeness in the image display unit 114. There is. At this time, the stage image 61, the right-handed image 75, and the time-saving remaining number image 79 are displayed. In the illustrated example, the text of "80 times" is displayed as the time-saving remaining number image 79. Further, at this time, the special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 221. Further, at this time, the fluctuation display on the sub-first fluctuation display 81 is stopped.

Next, when the game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 121, the variation of the special symbol is started in the first special symbol display 221 as shown in FIG. 71 (2). Further, at this time, the fluctuation display on the sub-first fluctuation display 81 is started. Further, when the variation display of the special symbol is started, the variation of the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 is started. Further, at this time, the time-saving remaining number image 79 is switched from "80 times" to "79 times". At this time, the right-handed promotion image 90 is displayed. At this time, the speaker 156 outputs a voice saying "Please hit right". On the other hand, the variable image 51 is not displayed. Further, the winning sound notifying that the game ball has won the prize is not output to the first starting port 121.

Next, as shown in FIG. 71 (3), the jackpot suggestion image 91 is displayed. At this time, the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 are maintained in a fluctuating state. Further, at this time, the fluctuation of the special symbol continues on the first special symbol display 221. Further, at this time, the fluctuation display on the sub-first fluctuation display 81 continues.

Next, as shown in FIG. 71 (4), the jackpot suggestion image 91 is continuously displayed. At this time, "135" is displayed as the small symbol 56. On the other hand, at this time, the decorative symbol 41 is neither temporarily stopped nor fixedly stopped. Further, at this time, the special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 221 by the mode of notifying that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit. Further, at this time, the fluctuation display on the sub first fluctuation display 81 is stopped.
When the jackpot suggestion image 91 is a moving image, the display content of the jackpot suggestion image 91 shown in FIG. 71 (4) may be updated from the jackpot suggestion image 91 shown in FIG. 71 (3).

Next, as shown in FIG. 71 (5), the opening image 74 is displayed.
Next, when the jackpot game is started, the in-round image 76 and the round number image 77 are displayed as shown in FIG. 71 (6). In the illustrated example, the text "Round 1" is displayed on the round number image 77.

Then, when the jackpot game is completed, the high-accuracy start image 78 is displayed as shown in FIG. 72 (7).
Next, in the high-probability time-saving gaming state, as shown in FIG. 72 (8), "135", which is a decorative symbol 41 having low decorativeness, is fixedly stopped in the image display unit 114. Then, the small symbol 56 is also fixedly stopped by the arrangement of the numbers of "135" like the decorative symbol 41. The small symbol 56 displayed at this time corresponds to the sequence of numbers that are finally stopped and displayed before the jackpot game is executed, that is, when the jackpot is won. Further, at this time, the time-saving remaining number of times image 79 is displayed. In the illustrated example, the text of "100 times" is displayed as the time-saving remaining number image 79.

As described above, in the present embodiment, in the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state, the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the low-probability time-saving non-game state is performed. An original image that is not displayed in the variable effect based on the winning of the second starting port 122 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state is displayed. Examples of the original image include a right-handed promotion image 90 and a jackpot suggestion image 91.
In this case, by showing the player the original image during the variation effect, the player is made to recognize that the variation effect is based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state. Can be done.

Further, as shown in the variation effect example 6, in the variation effect in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state is a big hit, the decorative symbol 41 is temporarily stopped or fixedly stopped. The jackpot game is started without playing. In other words, in the variable effect in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state is a jackpot, the jackpot is not notified by the decorative symbol 41. On the other hand, as shown in Example 4 of the variable effect, in the variable effect when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the winning of the second starting port 122 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state is a big hit, the decorative symbol 41 of doublet eyes 41. After notifying the jackpot (see FIG. 64 (18)), the jackpot game is started.
In this case, the variable effect based on the winning of the second starting port 122 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state is more doublet decoration than the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state. The player can be excited by the amount that the symbol 41 is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the variable effect based on the winning of the second starting port 122 in the high-probability time-saving game state.

Further, as shown in the variation effect example 6, in the variation effect when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the high probability time-saving gaming state is a big hit, the small symbols including different numbers are included. After the stop display of 56 is displayed, the jackpot game is started. On the other hand, as shown in Example 4 of the variable effect, in the variable effect when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the winning of the second starting port 122 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state is a big hit, the small symbols with all the numbers are aligned. After the stop display of 56 is displayed (see FIG. 64 (18)), the jackpot game is started.
In this case, the variable effect based on the winning of the second starting port 122 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state has more numbers than the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state. The player can be excited by the amount that the small symbol 56 is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the variable effect based on the winning of the second starting port 122 in the high-probability time-saving game state.

Further, as shown in the variation effect example 6, when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state is a big hit, at the start of the next fluctuation of the big hit fluctuation. , Display the decorative symbol 41 including different symbols (see FIG. 72 (8)). On the other hand, as shown in the variation effect example 4, when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the winning of the second starting port 122 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state is a big hit, the start of the next fluctuation of the fluctuation that is the big hit. Occasionally, the doublet decorative symbol 41 is displayed (see FIG. 65 (22)).
In this case, the variation effect based on the winning of the second starting port 122 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state is a big hit than the variation effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state. At the start of the next fluctuation of, the player can be excited by the amount that the decorative symbol 41 of doublet is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the variable effect based on the winning of the second starting port 122 in the probability time saving game state.

Further, in the variable effect example 6, the button operation effect is not executed. Here, in the variable effect pattern table (see FIG. 50) used when the game ball wins in the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state, the “judgment result” is the “big hit” “variable effect pattern”. No "button" is associated with. In other words, the button operation effect is not executed in the variable effect in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving game state is a big hit. On the other hand, in the variable effect example 4, the button operation effect is executed (see FIG. 64 (15)). Here, in the variable effect pattern table (see FIG. 48) used when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the winning of the second starting port 122 in the high-probability time-saving game state is a big hit, the "variable effect pattern" is used. A "button" is associated. In other words, there is a possibility that the button operation effect is executed in the variable effect in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the winning of the second starting port 122 in the high-probability time-saving game state is a big hit.
That is, in the present embodiment, when the variable effect in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit is performed in the high-probability time-saving game state, the variable effect based on the winning of the first start port 121 is performed rather than the variable effect of the second start port 122. The variable effect based on the winning of the prize is easier to perform the variable effect in which the button operation effect is executed.

In this case, the variable effect based on the winning of the second starting port 122 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state is better than the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state. When the lottery result is a big hit, the player can be given an opportunity to operate the effect button 161 with high probability. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game in the variable production in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the winning of the second starting port 122 in the high-probability time-saving game state is a big hit.

In particular, in the present embodiment, the button operation effect is executed in the variation effect example 2 (see FIG. 56 (10)). Here, in the variable effect pattern table (see FIG. 46) used when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the low probability time-saving no-game state is a big hit, the "variable effect pattern". Is associated with a "button". In other words, there is a possibility that the button operation effect is executed in the variable effect in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the low probability time saving non-game state is a big hit. That is, in the present embodiment, when a variable effect in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit is performed, a low-probability time-saving no-game is performed as compared with a variable effect based on a prize in the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving game state. The variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the state is easier to perform the variable effect in which the button operation effect is executed.
The lottery result of the special symbol lottery is the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the low-probability time-saving non-game state, rather than the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state. It is possible to give the player an opportunity to operate the effect button 161 with a high probability in the case of a big hit. Therefore, the player should make the first starting port 121 win the game ball in the low-probability time-saving non-game state, and should make the second starting port 122 win the game ball in the high-probability time-saving gaming state. Can be recognized by.

In this embodiment, it is explained that the button operation effect is not executed (0%) in the variable effect in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving game state is a big hit. However, it is not limited to this. Even if the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state is a big hit, the variable effect in which the button operation effect is executed may be performed.

FIG. 73 (A) is an explanatory diagram of the execution time of each variation effect in the variation effect example 1. FIG. 73B is an explanatory diagram of the execution time of each variation effect in the variation effect example 3. FIG. 73C is an explanatory diagram of the execution time of each variation effect in the variation effect example 5. FIG. 73 (D) is an explanatory diagram of the execution time of each variation effect in the variation effect example 6.

As shown in FIG. 73 (A), the variation pattern “PR1” (see FIG. 21) and the variation effect pattern “ER1” when the number of holdings of the first starting port 121 is “1” in the low probability time-saving non-game state. (See FIG. 47) is selected, and the first variation effect is started. The time from the start to the end of the first variation effect, that is, the execution time of the variation effect is defined as the time T1. This time T1 is 8.00 seconds (see FIG. 21), which is the same as the fluctuation time of the special symbol. Further, the first variable effect is a variable effect in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out of order and the reach effect is not executed, and corresponds to FIGS. 51 (2) to 51 (6).
After that, when the number of reservations of the first starting port 121 is "4", the variation pattern "PR3" and the variation effect pattern "ER3" are selected, and the second variation effect is started. The time from the start to the end of the second variation effect, that is, the execution time of the variation effect is defined as the time T2. This time T2 is 4.60 seconds, which is the same as the fluctuation time of the special symbol. Further, the second variable effect is a variable effect in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out of order and the reach effect is not executed, and corresponds to FIGS. 52 (7) and 52 (8).
After that, when the number of reservations of the first starting port 121 is "3", the variation pattern "PR2" and the variation effect pattern "ER2" are selected, and the third variation effect is started. The time from the start to the end of the third variation effect, that is, the execution time of the variation effect is defined as the time T3. This time T3 is 6.80 seconds, which is the same as the fluctuation time of the special symbol. Further, the third variable effect is a variable effect in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out of order and the reach effect is not executed, and corresponds to FIGS. 52 (9) and 52 (10).
After that, when the number of holdings of the first starting port 121 is "2", the variation pattern "PR2" and the variation effect pattern "ER2" are selected, and the fourth variation effect is started. The time from the start to the end of the fourth variation effect, that is, the execution time of the variation effect is defined as the time T4. This time T4 is 6.80 seconds, which is the same as the fluctuation time of the special symbol. Further, the fourth variable effect is a variable effect in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out of order and the reach effect is not executed, and corresponds to FIGS. 52 (11), 52 (12), and 53 (13). ing.
After that, when the number of holdings of the first starting port 121 is "1", the variation pattern "PR6" and the variation effect pattern "ER6" are selected, and the fifth variation effect is started. The time from the start to the end of the fifth variation effect, that is, the execution time of the variation effect is defined as the time T5. This time T5 is 90.01 seconds, which is the same as the fluctuation time of the special symbol. Further, the fifth variable effect is a variable effect in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out of order and the reach effect is executed, and FIGS. 53 (14) to 53 (18) and FIGS. 54 (19) to FIGS. It corresponds to 54 (24).

Further, as shown in FIG. 73B, when the number of holdings of the second starting port 122 is "1" in the high-probability time-saving gaming state, the variation pattern "PG1" (see FIG. 22) and the variation effect pattern ""EG1" (see FIG. 49) is selected, and the first variation effect is started. The time from the start to the end of the first variation effect, that is, the execution time of the variation effect is defined as the time T6. This time T6 is 2.50 seconds (see FIG. 22), which is the same as the fluctuation time of the special symbol. Further, the first variable effect is a variable effect in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out of order and the reach effect is not executed, and corresponds to FIGS. 58 (2) to 58 (4).
After that, when the number of holdings of the second starting port 122 is "4", the variation pattern "PG3" and the variation effect pattern "EG3" are selected, and the second variation effect is started. The time from the start to the end of the second variation effect, that is, the execution time of the variation effect is defined as the time T7. This time T7 is 1.50 seconds, which is the same as the fluctuation time of the special symbol. Further, the second variable effect is a variable effect in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out of order and the reach effect is not executed, and corresponds to FIGS. 58 (5) and 58 (6).
After that, when the number of holdings of the second starting port 122 is "3", the variation pattern "PG2" and the variation effect pattern "EG2" are selected, and the third variation effect is started. The time from the start to the end of the third variation effect, that is, the execution time of the variation effect is defined as the time T8. This time T8 is 2.00 seconds, which is the same as the fluctuation time of the special symbol. Further, the third variable effect is a variable effect in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out of order and the reach effect is not executed, and corresponds to FIGS. 59 (7) and 59 (8).
After that, when the number of holdings of the second starting port 122 is "2", the variation pattern "PG2" and the variation effect pattern "EG2" are selected, and the fourth variation effect is started. The time from the start to the end of the fourth variation effect, that is, the execution time of the variation effect is defined as the time T9. This time T9 is 2.00 seconds, which is the same as the fluctuation time of the special symbol. Further, the fourth variable effect is a variable effect in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out of order and the reach effect is not executed, and corresponds to FIGS. 59 (9) and 59 (10).
After that, when the number of holdings of the second starting port 122 is "1", the variation pattern "PG5" and the variation effect pattern "EG5" are selected, and the fifth variation effect is started. The time from the start to the end of the fifth variation effect, that is, the execution time of the variation effect is defined as the time T10. This time T10 is 60.02 seconds, which is the same as the fluctuation time of the special symbol. Further, the fifth variable effect is a variable effect in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out of order and the reach effect is executed, and FIGS. 59 (11), 59 (12), 60 (13) to FIGS. It corresponds to 60 (18), FIG. 61 (19) and FIG. 61 (20).

Further, as shown in FIG. 73C, when the number of holdings of the first starting port 121 is "1" in the high-probability time-saving gaming state, the variation pattern "PK1" (see FIG. 23) and the variation effect pattern ""EK1" (see FIG. 50) is selected, and the first variation effect is started. The time from the start to the end of the first variation effect, that is, the execution time of the variation effect is defined as the time T11. This time T11 is 5.00 seconds (see FIG. 23), which is the same as the fluctuation time of the special symbol. Further, the first variable effect is a variable effect in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out of order and the reach effect is not executed, and corresponds to FIGS. 66 (2) to 66 (6) and 67 (7). ing.
After that, when the number of holdings of the first starting port 121 is "4", the variation pattern "PK1" and the variation effect pattern "EK1" are selected, and the second variation effect is started. The time from the start to the end of the second variation effect, that is, the execution time of the variation effect is defined as the time T12. This time T12 is 5.00 seconds, which is the same as the fluctuation time of the special symbol. Further, the second variable effect is a variable effect in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out of order and the reach effect is not executed, and corresponds to FIGS. 67 (8) to 67 (12).
After that, when the number of holdings of the second starting port 122 is "3", the variation pattern "PK1" and the variation effect pattern "EK1" are selected, and the third variation effect is started. The time from the start to the end of the third variation effect, that is, the execution time of the variation effect is defined as the time T13. This time T13 is 5.00 seconds, which is the same as the fluctuation time of the special symbol. Further, the third variable effect is a variable effect in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out of order and the reach effect is not executed, and corresponds to FIGS. 68 (13) to 68 (17).
After that, when the number of holdings of the first starting port 121 is "2", the variation pattern "PK1" and the variation effect pattern "EK1" are selected, and the fourth variation effect is started. The time from the start to the end of the fourth variation effect, that is, the execution time of the variation effect is defined as the time T14. This time T14 is 5.00 seconds, which is the same as the fluctuation time of the special symbol. Further, the fourth variable effect is a variable effect in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out of order and the reach effect is not executed, and corresponds to FIGS. 68 (18) and 69 (19) to 69 (22). ing.
After that, when the number of holdings of the first starting port 121 is "1", the variation pattern "PK1" and the variation effect pattern "EK1" are selected, and the fifth variation effect is started. The time from the start to the end of the fifth variation effect, that is, the execution time of the variation effect is defined as the time T15. This time T15 is 5.00 seconds, which is the same as the fluctuation time of the special symbol. Further, the fifth variable effect is a variable effect in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out of order and the reach effect is not executed, and FIGS. 69 (23), 69 (24), 70 (25) to 70. It corresponds to (27).

Further, as shown in FIG. 73 (D), in the high-probability time-saving gaming state, when the number of holdings of the first starting port 121 is "1", the variation pattern "PH4" (see FIG. 23) and the variation effect pattern " "EH4" (see FIG. 50) is selected, and the variation effect is started. The time from the start to the end of the variable effect, that is, the execution time of the variable effect is defined as the time T16. This time T16 is 18.01 seconds (see FIG. 23), which is the same as the fluctuation time of the special symbol. Further, this variable effect is a variable effect in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit, and corresponds to FIGS. 71 (2) to 71 (4).

In the explanation using FIG. 73, it has been explained that the execution time of each variation effect is the same as the variation time of the special symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this.
The execution time of the variation effect may be substantially the same as the variation time of the special symbol related to the variation effect, and may not match.

As described above, as shown in FIG. 73 (C), in the variation effect example 5, the time T11 and the time T12 have the same length of time. Here, based on the fact that the number of reservations of the first starting port 121 is "1" in the case where the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out of order and the reach effect is not executed in the high probability time-saving game state. The selected "variation pattern" (see FIG. 23) and the "variation pattern" selected based on the number of holdings of the first starting port 121 being "4" are fluctuation patterns having the same "time". .. In other words, when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out of order and the reach effect is not executed in the high-probability time-saving game state, the variation based on the number of reservations of the first starting port 121 being "1" is performed. The execution time of the effect is not longer than the execution time of the variable effect based on the number of reservations of the first starting port 121 being "4". On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 73 (B), in the variation effect example 3, the time T6 is longer than the time T7. Here, based on the fact that the number of reservations of the second starting port 122 is "1" in the case where the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out of order and the reach effect is not executed in the high probability time-saving game state. The selected "variation pattern" (see FIG. 22) is set to a longer "time" than the "variation pattern" selected based on the number of holdings of the second starting port 122 being "4". Things are provided. In other words, when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out of order and the reach effect is not executed in the high-probability time-saving game state, the variation based on the number of reservations of the second starting port 122 being "1" is performed. The execution time of the effect may be longer than the execution time of the variable effect based on the number of holdings of the second starting port 122 being "4".
That is, in the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out of order and the reach effect is not executed in the high-probability time-saving game state, the reserved number of the first start port 121 is "4". The rate at which the variable effect based on the fact that the number of reservations of the first starting port 121 is "1" is longer than that based on the variable effect is the first rate. The variation effect based on the number of reservations of the second starting port 122 being "1" has a longer execution time than the variation effect based on the number of reservations of the 2 start port 122 being "4". Is the second rate. And the second ratio is larger than the first ratio.

In this case, the number of reservations is smaller in the variable effect based on the winning of the second starting port 122 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state than in the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state. Even if the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out of order and the reach effect is not executed, the player can enjoy various effects with high probability because the execution time of the variable effect tends to be longer. be able to. Therefore, in the variable effect based on the winning of the second starting port 122 in the high-probability time-saving game state, even if the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out of order and the reach effect is not executed, the interest of the game is improved. Can be done.

Further, as shown in FIG. 73 (A), in the variation effect example 1, the time T1 is longer than the time T2. Here, in the case where the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out of order and the variable effect in which the reach effect is not executed is performed in the low probability time-saving no-game state, the number of reservations of the first starting port 121 is set to "1". The "variation pattern" (see FIG. 21) selected based on is set to a longer "time" than the "variation pattern" selected based on the number of holdings of the first starting port 121 being "4". Is provided. In other words, when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out of order and the reach effect is not executed in the low-probability time-saving no-game state, the number of reservations of the first start port 121 is "1". The execution time of the variation effect may be longer than the execution time of the variation effect based on the number of reservations of the first starting port 121 being "4".
That is, in the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out of order and the variable effect in which the reach effect is not executed is performed, the number of reservations of the first start port 121 is "4" in the high probability time-saving gaming state. The rate at which the variable effect with a longer execution time is performed in the variable effect based on the number of reservations of the first starting port 121 being "1" is the first rate than the variable effect based on the existence. In the low-probability time-saving no-game state, the fluctuation effect based on the number of reservations of the first start port 121 being "1" is higher than the variation effect based on the number of reservations of the first start port 121 being "4". The rate at which the variable effect with a longer execution time is performed is the second rate. And the second ratio is larger than the first ratio.

In this case, the number of reservations is larger for the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the low-probability time-saving no-game state than for the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state. As the execution time of the variable effect tends to become longer as the number decreases, even if the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out of order and the reach effect is not executed, the player can enjoy various effects with high probability. You can do it. Therefore, even if the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out of order and the reach effect is not executed in the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the low probability time saving non-game state, the interest of the game is improved. be able to.

In this embodiment, the first start is performed when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the winning of the first start port 121 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state is out of order and the reach effect is not executed. The execution time of the variable effect based on the number of holdings of the mouth 121 being "1" is not longer than the execution time of the variable effect based on the number of holdings of the first starting port 121 being "4" (0%). ), But it is not limited to this. Even if the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the winning of the first start opening 121 in the high probability time-saving gaming state is out of order and the reach effect is not executed, the first start port 121 is held. The execution time of the variation effect based on the number being "1" may be longer than the execution time of the variation effect based on the number of reservations of the first starting port 121 being "4".

Further, when the time T7 in the variation effect example 3 shown in FIG. 73 (B) and the time T12 in the variation effect example 5 shown in FIG. 73 (C) are compared, the time T12 is longer than the time T7. Here, in the case where the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the holding number of the second starting port 122 being "4" is out of order and the reach effect is not executed in the high-probability time-saving game state, the variable effect is performed. As the "variation pattern" (see FIG. 22), either "time" of "1.50" seconds or "4.00" seconds is selected. On the other hand, in the high-probability time-saving gaming state, when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the holding number of the first starting port 121 being "4" is out of order and the reach effect is not executed, the "variation" is performed. As the "pattern" (see FIG. 23), a pattern having a "time" of "5.00" seconds is selected.
That is, in the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out of order and the reach effect is not executed in the high-probability time-saving game state, the reserved number of the second starting port 122 is "4". The variable effect based on the fact that the number of reservations of the first starting port 121 is "4" is more likely to be performed with the variable effect having a longer execution time than the variable effect based on the above.

In this case, the number of reservations is larger in the variable effect based on the winning of the second starting port 122 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state than in the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state. In some cases, the execution time of the variable effect tends to be short, so if the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out of order and the reach effect is not executed, it is possible to entertain the player with a high-probability and speedy effect. can. Therefore, in the variable effect based on the winning of the second starting port 122 in the high-probability time-saving game state, even if the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out of order and the reach effect is not executed, the interest of the game is improved. Can be done.

In particular, when the time T2 in the variation effect example 1 shown in FIG. 73 (A) and the time T12 in the variation effect example 5 shown in FIG. 73 (C) are compared, the time T12 is longer than the time T2. Here, as described above, in the high-probability time-saving gaming state, the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the holding number of the first starting port 121 being "4" is out of order, and the reach effect is not executed. If so, the "variation pattern" (see FIG. 23) with a "time" of "5.00" seconds is selected. Further, in the case where the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the holding number of the first starting port 121 being "4" is out of order and the reach effect is not executed in the low probability time-saving no-game state, the variable effect is performed. As the "variation pattern" (see FIG. 21), the ratio of selecting "4.60" seconds whose "time" is shorter than "5.00" seconds is "90/100 = 0.9".
That is, in the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out of order and the variable effect in which the reach effect is not executed is performed, the number of reservations of the first start port 121 is "4" in the high probability time-saving gaming state. The variation effect based on the fact that the number of reservations of the first starting port 121 is "4" in the low-probability time-saving non-game state is easier to perform the variation effect with a shorter execution time than the variation effect based on the above.

In this case, the number of reservations is larger for the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the low-probability time-saving no-game state than for the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state. If there are many, the execution time of the variable effect tends to be short, so if the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out of order and the reach effect is not executed, the player will be entertained with a high probability of speedy effect. Can be done. Therefore, the player should make the first starting port 121 win the game ball in the low-probability time-saving non-game state, and should make the second starting port 122 win the game ball in the high-probability time-saving gaming state. Can be recognized by.

In the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out of order and the reach effect is not executed in the high-probability time-saving game state, the reserved number of the second starting port 122 is "4". It has been explained that the variable effect based on the fact that the number of reservations of the first starting port 121 is "4" is always longer (100%) than the execution time of the variable effect based on the above, but the present invention is not limited to this. .. It is based on the fact that the number of reservations of the second starting port 122 is "4" even when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out of order and the reach effect is not executed in the high-probability time-saving game state. A variable effect based on the number of reservations of the first starting port 121 being "4" may be performed with a shorter execution time than the variable effect.

Further, in the variation effect example 5 shown in FIG. 73 (C), the same variation pattern is selected for the first variation effect and the second variation effect. Here, in the variation pattern table (see FIG. 23) used based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state, as the "variation pattern" associated with "off" and "no reach". Only "PK1", which is the same fluctuation pattern as the "variation pattern" in which the number of holdings is "1" and the "variation pattern" in which the number of holdings is "4", is provided. On the other hand, in the variation effect example 3 shown in FIG. 73B, different variation patterns are selected for the first variation effect and the second variation effect. Here, in the variation pattern table (see FIG. 22) used based on the winning of the second starting port 122 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state, as the "variation pattern" associated with "off" and "no reach". The "variation pattern" in which the number of holdings is "1" is provided with "PG1" which is not associated with the "variation pattern" in which the number of holdings is "4".
That is, in the present embodiment, the number of reservations of the first starting port 121 is "4" when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out of order and the reach effect is not executed in the high probability time-saving game state. The rate at which the same variation pattern is selected between the variation effect based on the above and the variation effect based on the number of reservations of the first starting port 121 being "1" is the first rate, and the second starting port 122. The rate at which the same fluctuation pattern is selected between the fluctuation effect based on the number of reservations of "4" and the variation effect based on the number of reservations of the second starting port 122 being "1" is the second. It is a ratio. And the first ratio is larger than the second ratio.

In this case, the variable effect based on the winning of the second starting port 122 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state is more dependent on the number of reservations than the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state. Because it is easy to perform variable effects of various variable patterns, even if the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out of order and the reach effect is not executed, it is possible to entertain the player with various effects with high probability. can. Therefore, in the variable effect based on the winning of the second starting port 122 in the high-probability time-saving game state, even if the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out of order and the reach effect is not executed, the interest of the game is improved. Can be done.

In particular, in the present embodiment, in the variation effect example 1 shown in FIG. 73 (A), different variation patterns are selected for the first variation effect and the second variation effect. Here, in the variation pattern table (see FIG. 21) used based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the low-probability time-saving no-game state, as the "variation pattern" associated with "off" and "no reach". The "variation pattern" in which the number of reservations is "1" is provided with "PR1" which is not associated with the "variation pattern" in which the number of reservations is "4".
That is, in the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out of order and the variable effect in which the reach effect is not executed is performed, the number of reservations of the first start port 121 is "4" in the high probability time-saving gaming state. The rate at which the same variation pattern is selected between the variation effect based on the existence and the variation effect based on the number of reservations of the first starting port 121 being "1" is the first rate, and there is no low probability of time saving. In the gaming state, the same variation pattern is used for the variation effect based on the number of reservations of the first starting port 121 being "4" and the variation effect based on the number of reservations of the first start opening 121 being "1". The rate at which is selected is the second rate. And the first ratio is larger than the second ratio.

In this case, the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the low-probability time-saving no-game state is more pending than the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state. Even if the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out of order and the reach effect is not executed because the variation effect of various variation patterns is easy to be performed, the player can entertain the various effect with high probability. Can be done. Therefore, the player should make the first starting port 121 win the game ball in the low-probability time-saving non-game state, and should make the second starting port 122 win the game ball in the high-probability time-saving gaming state. Can be recognized by.

In the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out of order and the reach effect is not executed in the high-probability time-saving game state, the number of reservations of the first start port 121 is "4". It was explained that the same fluctuation pattern is always selected (100%) between the fluctuation effect based on the above and the variation effect based on the number of reservations of the first starting port 121 being "1", but the limitation is limited to this. Not done. Based on the fact that the number of reservations of the first starting port 121 is "4" even when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out of order and the reach effect is not executed in the high-probability time-saving game state. A different variation pattern may be selected between the variation effect and the variation effect based on the number of reservations of the first starting port 121 being "1".

Further, in the fluctuation pattern table (see FIG. 23) used based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state, the "variation pattern" in which the reserved numbers "1" and "missing" are associated is set to the "variation pattern". Of the fluctuation patterns that can be selected based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state, only the fluctuation pattern "PK1" having the shortest fluctuation time is provided. On the other hand, in the fluctuation pattern table (see FIG. 22) used based on the winning of the second starting port 122 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state, the "variation pattern" in which the reserved numbers "1" and "missing" are associated is set to the "variation pattern". Among the fluctuation patterns that can be selected based on the winning of the second starting port 122 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state, "PG1" or the like, which is a fluctuation pattern different from the fluctuation pattern with the shortest fluctuation time, is provided.
That is, in the present embodiment, there is a high probability that a variable effect is performed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out of order based on the number of reservations of the first starting port 121 being "1" in the high probability time-saving gaming state. The ratio of the variation pattern having the shortest variation time among the variation patterns that can be selected based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the time-saving gaming state is the first ratio. Further, when a variable effect is performed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out of order based on the number of reservations of the second starting port 122 being "1" in the high-probability time-saving game state, the first in the high-probability time-saving game state. 2 The ratio of the fluctuation pattern having the shortest fluctuation time among the fluctuation patterns that can be selected based on the winning of the starting port 122 is the second ratio. And the first ratio is larger than the second ratio.

In this case, the number of reservations is smaller in the variable effect based on the winning of the second starting port 122 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state than in the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state. In some cases, it is easy to perform a variable effect with a long variable time, so even if the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out of order, it is possible to entertain the player with various effects with high probability. Therefore, in the variable effect based on the winning of the second starting port 122 in the high-probability time-saving game state, even if the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out of order, the interest of the game can be improved.

In particular, in the variation pattern table (see FIG. 21) used based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the low-probability time-saving no-game state, the "variation pattern" in which the reserved numbers "1" and "missing" are associated is set. , "PR1", which is a variation pattern different from the variation pattern having the shortest variation time among the variation patterns that can be selected based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the low-probability time-saving no-game state, is provided. .. That is, in the present embodiment, there is a high probability that a variable effect is performed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out of order based on the number of reservations of the first starting port 121 being "1" in the high probability time-saving gaming state. The ratio of the variation pattern having the shortest variation time among the variation patterns that can be selected based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the time-saving gaming state is the first ratio. Further, when a variable effect is performed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out of order based on the number of reservations of the first starting port 121 being "1" in the low probability time saving no game state, the low probability time saving no game state is performed. The ratio of the fluctuation pattern having the shortest fluctuation time among the fluctuation patterns that can be selected based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the above is the second ratio. And the first ratio is larger than the second ratio.
In this case, the number of reservations is larger for the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the low-probability time-saving non-game state than for the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state. Even if the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out of order, it is possible to entertain the player with various effects with high probability because the variation effect with a long variation time is likely to be performed when the variation time is small. Therefore, the player should make the first starting port 121 win the game ball in the low-probability time-saving non-game state, and should make the second starting port 122 win the game ball in the high-probability time-saving gaming state. Can be recognized by.

In the present embodiment, there is a high probability that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out of order based on the number of reservations of the first starting port 121 being "1" in the high probability time-saving gaming state. It has been explained that the variation pattern having the shortest variation time among the variation patterns that can be selected based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the time-saving gaming state is always selected (100%), but the variation pattern is not limited to this. Even if a variable effect is performed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out of order based on the number of reservations of the first starting port 121 being "1" in the high-probability time-saving game state, the high-probability time-saving game state is performed. A variation pattern different from the variation pattern having the shortest variation time among the variation patterns that can be selected based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the above may be selected.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state is out of order and the reach effect is not executed, the variation pattern is selected. A variation effect (special symbol variation) having the same execution time is executed regardless of the number of holdings of the first starting port 121 at the time of execution.
In this case, the variation effect based on the winning of the second starting port 122 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state is different from the variation effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state. It is possible to entertain the player with different fluctuation effects. Therefore, in the high-probability time-saving gaming state, it is possible to make the player recognize that the second starting port 122 should be awarded instead of the first starting port 121.

Further, in the present embodiment, the number of variable patterns (variable effect patterns) that can be selected based on the winning of the first starting port in the high-probability time-saving gaming state is increased to the second starting port 122 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state. There are more fluctuation patterns (variation effect patterns) that can be selected based on the winning prize. Further, in the present embodiment, the number of variable patterns (variable effect patterns) that can be selected when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state is a big hit The number of variable patterns (variable effect patterns) that can be selected when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the winning of the second starting port 122 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state is a big hit is larger. Further, in the present embodiment, the number of variable patterns (variable effect patterns) that can be selected when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state is out of order The number of variable patterns (variable effect patterns) that can be selected when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the winning of the second starting port 122 in the high-probability time-saving game state is out of order is larger. In particular, the number of variable patterns (variable effect patterns) that can be selected when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state is one is one.
In this case, the variable effect based on the winning of the second starting port 122 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state is more diverse than the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state. Can be entertained by the player. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the variable effect based on the winning of the second starting port 122 in the high-probability time-saving game state.

Further, in the present embodiment, the first starting port 121 in the low-probability time-saving no-game state is larger than the number of fluctuation patterns (variation effect patterns) that can be selected based on the winning of the first starting port in the high-probability time-saving gaming state. There are more variation patterns (variation effect patterns) that can be selected based on winning a prize. Further, in the present embodiment, the number of variable patterns (variable effect patterns) that can be selected when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state is a big hit The number of variable patterns (variable effect patterns) that can be selected when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the low-probability short-time non-game state is a big hit is larger. Further, in the present embodiment, the number of variable patterns (variable effect patterns) that can be selected when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state is out of order The number of variable patterns (variable effect patterns) that can be selected when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the low-probability short-time non-game state is larger is larger.
In this case, the variation effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the low-probability time-saving non-game state is more diverse than the variation effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state. The production can be entertained by the player. Therefore, the player should make the first starting port 121 win the game ball in the low-probability time-saving non-game state, and should make the second starting port 122 win the game ball in the high-probability time-saving gaming state. Can be recognized by.

Further, the variation pattern (variation effect pattern) that can be selected when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state is a big hit is the first in the high-probability time-saving gaming state. A fluctuation pattern (variation) that is longer than the fluctuation time (variation effect execution time) in the variation pattern (variation effect pattern) that can be selected when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the winning of the starting port 121 is out of order. Only the production pattern) is provided. On the other hand, the variation pattern (variation effect pattern) that can be selected when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the winning of the second starting port 122 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state is a big hit is the second in the high-probability time-saving gaming state. A fluctuation pattern (variation) that is shorter than the fluctuation time (variation effect execution time) in the variation pattern (variation effect pattern) that can be selected when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the winning of the starting port 122 is out of order. A production pattern) is also provided.
In this case, the variable effect based on the winning of the second starting port 122 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state is better than the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state. Even if the lottery result is out of order, it is possible to entertain the player with a long-term fluctuation effect. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the variable effect based on the winning of the second starting port 122 in the high-probability time-saving game state.

In particular, in the present embodiment, the variable pattern (variable effect pattern) that can be selected when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the low-probability time-saving non-game state is a low probability. It is shorter than the fluctuation time (variation effect execution time) in the variation pattern (variation effect pattern) that can be selected when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the time-saving no-game state is out of order. A fluctuation pattern (variation effect pattern) that is time is also provided.
In this case, the special symbol lottery is performed by the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the low-probability time-saving non-game state, rather than the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state. Even if the lottery result is out of order, it is possible to entertain the player with a long-term fluctuation effect. Therefore, the player should make the first starting port 121 win the game ball in the low-probability time-saving non-game state, and should make the second starting port 122 win the game ball in the high-probability time-saving gaming state. Can be recognized by.

(Variation effect example 5 modification)
74 to 77 are diagrams showing a modification of the variation effect example 5.
In the variation effect example 5, the variation effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state has been described, but the variation effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state is described above. Not limited to the example of.
Hereinafter, a modified example of the variation effect example 5 will be described with reference to FIGS. 74 to 77. This modification is an example of variation of the decorative symbol 41 based on the fact that the game ball wins the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving game state. In the following description, the points different from each variation effect example described above will be mainly described, and the points that match each variation effect example described above may be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 74 (1), as the variation of the previous special symbol ends, the effect control unit 300 definitely stops the decorative symbol 41 having low decorativeness in the image display unit 114. There is. At this time, the stage image 61, the right-handed image 75, and the time-saving remaining number image 79 are displayed. In the illustrated example, the text of "90 times" is displayed as the time-saving remaining number image 79.

Next, when the game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 121, as shown in FIG. 74 (2), the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 start to change with the start of the variation display of the special symbol. Further, at this time, the time-saving remaining number image 79 is switched from "90 times" to "89 times". At this time, the variable image 51 is displayed. On the other hand, the winning sound notifying that the game ball has won the prize is not output to the first starting port 121.
A right-handed promotion image 90 (see FIG. 71 (2)) may be displayed as the game ball wins a prize in the first starting opening 121. Further, when the game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 121, the voice "Please hit right" may be output from the speaker 156.

Next, when four game balls win a prize in the first starting port 121, four reserved images 52 are displayed as shown in FIG. 74 (3). Further, at this time, "4" is displayed on the hold number display 55 of the first starting port 121. On the other hand, when any of the game balls wins in the first starting port 121, the winning sound notifying that the game ball has won in the first starting port 121 is not output.
The right-handed promotion image 90 (see FIG. 71 (2)) may be displayed each time the game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 121. Further, every time the game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 121, a voice "Please hit right" may be output from the speaker 156.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74 (4), the three decorative symbols 41 "412" are fixedly stopped. In addition, the small symbol 56 also stops as the fluctuation of the special symbol stops. At this time, the combination "412" of the small symbols 56 matches the combination of the decorative symbols 41.
Next, as shown in FIG. 74 (5), the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 start to vary with the start of the variation display of the next special symbol. Further, at this time, the time-saving remaining number image 79 is switched from "89 times" to "88 times". Further, at this time, the hold number display 55 of the first starting port 121 is switched from "4" to "3".

Next, as shown in FIG. 74 (6), the three decorative symbols 41 "125" are fixedly stopped. At this time, the first chance eye effect is executed, and the chance eye image 63 is displayed on the three decorative symbols 41. In the illustrated example, the blue chance eye image 63 is displayed on the three decorative symbols 41 by the first chance eye effect. In addition, the small symbol 56 also stops as the fluctuation of the special symbol stops. At this time, the combination "125" of the small symbols 56 matches the combination of the decorative symbols 41.

Next, as shown in FIG. 75 (7), the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 start to vary with the start of the variation display of the next special symbol. Further, the hold number display 55 of the first starting port 121 is switched from "3" to "2". Further, the time-saving remaining number image 79 is switched from "88 times" to "87 times".
Next, as shown in FIG. 75 (8), the three decorative symbols 41 "853" are fixedly stopped. At this time, the second chance eye effect is executed, and the chance eye image 63 is displayed on the three decorative symbols 41. In the illustrated example, the green chance eye image 63 is displayed on the three decorative symbols 41 by the second chance eye effect. In addition, the small symbol 56 also stops as the fluctuation of the special symbol stops. At this time, the combination "853" of the small symbols 56 matches the combination of the decorative symbols 41.

Next, as shown in FIG. 75 (9), the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 start to change with the start of the next variation display of the special symbol. Further, the hold number display 55 of the first starting port 121 is switched from "2" to "1". In addition, the time-saving remaining number image 79 is switched from "87 times" to "86 times".
Next, as shown in FIG. 75 (10), the three decorative symbols 41 "553" are fixedly stopped. In addition, the small symbol 56 also stops as the fluctuation of the special symbol stops. At this time, the combination "553" of the small symbols 56 matches the combination of the decorative symbols 41. In this variable effect, the third chance effect is not executed. In other words, in this variable effect, the final chance effect of the three times is not executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 75 (11), the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 start to vary with the start of the variation display of the next special symbol. Further, the hold number display 55 of the first starting port 121 is switched from "1" to "0". In addition, the time-saving remaining number image 79 is switched from "86 times" to "85 times". Further, at this time, the zone effect is executed and the zone notification image 64 is displayed. In the illustrated example, the text "Entering the super hot zone!" Is displayed, which is expected to be a big hit in the fluctuation of the special symbol being executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 75 (12), the character effect is executed. In the illustrated example, the medium movable accessory 115B moves to cover a part of the image display unit 114 due to the accessory effect. At this time, the accessory effect image 92 is displayed. In the illustrated example, the blue accessory effect image 92 is displayed around the region of the image display unit 114 that overlaps with the medium movable accessory 115B. At this time, the zone identification image 65 is displayed. Further, at this time, the sound effect is executed, and the voice of "hot !?" is output from the speaker 156. The sound effect that outputs this "hot !?" sound is an effect that is expected to be a big hit in the running variable effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 76 (13), the number "4", which is the left and right decorative symbols 41, is temporarily stopped, and the reach effect is executed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 76 (14), the change effect is executed, and the change image 62 is displayed on the variation image 51. In the illustrated example, the blue change image 62 is displayed on the change image 51 due to the change effect. When this change effect is being executed, the sound effect of the change effect is not output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 76 (15), the SP reach effect is executed. At this time, the stage image 61 is hidden.
Next, as shown in FIG. 76 (16), the SPSP reach effect is executed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 76 (17), the button operation effect is executed, and the button operation image 69 is displayed.

Then, when the player operates the effect button 161 while the button operation image 69 is displayed, the number "5", which is the intermediate decorative symbol 41, is temporarily stopped as shown in FIG. 76 (18).
Next, as shown in FIG. 77 (19), the three decorative symbols 41 are temporarily stopped. Further, the stage image 61 is redisplayed.
Then, as the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped, as shown in FIG. 77 (20), the three decorative symbols 41 are fixedly stopped. The combination "454" of the decorative symbols 41 is an example of a combination when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out of order. In addition, the small symbol 56 also stops as the fluctuation of the special symbol stops. At this time, the combination "454" of the small symbols 56 matches the combination of the decorative symbols 41. At this time, the variable image 51 is hidden.

As described above, in the modified example, the change effect of the reserved image 52 is not executed. On the other hand, in the variation effect example 4, the change effect of the reserved image 52 is executed (see FIG. 62 (2)). That is, in the present embodiment, in the high-probability time-saving gaming state, the case where the game ball wins the second start opening 122 is better than the case where the game ball wins the first start opening 121. Change production is easy to execute.
In this case, the case where the game ball wins the second starting port 122 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state is more likely to be reserved than the case where the game ball wins the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state. It is possible to entertain the player with the change effect of the image 52. Therefore, when the game ball wins a prize in the second starting port 122 in the high-probability time-saving game state, the interest of the game can be improved.

In particular, in the present embodiment, the change effect of the reserved image 52 is executed in the variation effect example 1 (see FIG. 52 (7)). That is, in the present embodiment, the case where the game ball wins the first starting port 121 in the low-probability time-saving non-game state is better than the case where the game ball wins the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state. , The change effect of the reserved image 52 is easy to be executed.
In this case, there is a higher probability that the game ball will win the first starting port 121 in the low-probability time-saving non-game state than when the game ball wins in the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state. It is possible to entertain the player with the change effect of the reserved image 52. Therefore, the player should make the first starting port 121 win the game ball in the low-probability time-saving non-game state, and should make the second starting port 122 win the game ball in the high-probability time-saving gaming state. Can be recognized by.

In the present embodiment, it has been explained that when the game ball wins the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving game state, the change effect of the reserved image 52 is not executed (0%), but the present invention is limited to this. Not done. Even when the game ball wins a prize in the first start opening 121 in the high-probability time-saving game state, the change effect of the reserved image 52 may be executed.

Further, in the modified example, the change effect of the variable image 51 is executed after the start of the reach effect (see FIG. 76 (14)), while the change effect of the variable image 51 is executed before the start of the reach effect. No. On the other hand, in the variation effect example 4, the variation effect of the variation image 51 is executed before the start of the reach effect (see FIG. 63 (10)). That is, in the present embodiment, in the high-probability time-saving gaming state, the variable effect based on the winning of the second starting port 122 starts the reach effect rather than the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121. It is easy to execute the change effect of the variation image 51 in front.
In this case, the variable effect based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 122 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state is better than the variable effect based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state. However, even when the reach effect is not executed, it is possible to entertain the player with the change effect with high probability. Therefore, in the variable effect based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 122 in the high-probability time-saving game state, the interest of the game can be improved even when the reach effect is not executed.

In particular, in the present embodiment, in the variation effect example 1, the change effect of the variation image 51 is executed before the start of the reach effect (see FIG. 53 (15)). That is, in the present embodiment, the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 121 in the low-probability time-saving non-game state is more than the fluctuation effect based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state. Based on the variation effect, the variation effect of the variation image 51 before the start of the reach effect is more likely to be executed.
In this case, the variable effect based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 121 in the low-probability time-saving non-game state is rather than the variable effect based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state. It is possible to entertain the player with a high probability of the change effect even when the reach effect is not executed. Therefore, the player should make the first starting port 121 win the game ball in the low-probability time-saving non-game state, and should make the second starting port 122 win the game ball in the high-probability time-saving gaming state. Can be recognized by.

In this embodiment, it has been explained that in the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state, the variable effect of the variable image 51 is not executed (0%) before the start of the reach effect. However, it is not limited to this. Even in the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state, the variable effect of the variable image 51 may be executed before the start of the reach effect.

Further, in the modified example, the first chance effect (see FIG. 74 (6)) and the second chance effect (see FIG. 75 (8)) are executed, while the third chance effect is executed. It has not been. On the other hand, in the variable effect example 4, the third chance effect is executed (see FIG. 63 (8)). That is, in the present embodiment, in the high-probability time-saving gaming state, the variable effect based on the winning of the second starting port 122 is more than the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121. It is easy to execute the tuning effect of the predetermined times. The tuning effect is an effect in which the display of a plurality of decorative symbols 41 is synchronized according to predetermined conditions. Examples of the tuning effect include a chance eye effect based on the pre-determination result by the pre-determination process.
In this case, the variable effect based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 122 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state is better than the variable effect based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state. However, it is possible to entertain the player with the chance eye production of the final round with high probability. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the variable production based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 122 in the high-probability time-saving game state.

In particular, in the present embodiment, the third chance-th effect is executed in the variable effect example 1 (see FIG. 53 (13)). That is, in the present embodiment, the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the low-probability time-saving non-game state is better than the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state. , It is easy to execute the final chance effect of multiple times.
In this case, the variable effect based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 121 in the low-probability time-saving non-game state is rather than the variable effect based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state. It is possible to entertain the player with the chance eye production of the final round with a high probability. Therefore, the player should make the first starting port 121 win the game ball in the low-probability time-saving non-game state, and should make the second starting port 122 win the game ball in the high-probability time-saving gaming state. Can be recognized by.

In this embodiment, it has been explained that in the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving game state, the final chance eye effect of the plurality of times is not executed (0%). , Not limited to this. Even if the variable effect is based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving game state, the final chance eye effect of the three times may be executed.

Further, in the modified example, the zone effect that is expected to be a big hit in the running variation effect is executed (see FIG. 75 (11)), while the big hit is executed in the next variation effect of the running variation effect. The expected zone effect is not executed. In the following, the zone effect that is expected to be a big hit in the variable effect being executed may be referred to as the first expected effect. Further, a zone effect that is expected to be a big hit in the next variable effect of the variable effect being executed may be referred to as a second expected effect in the following. On the other hand, in the variable effect example 4, the second expected effect is executed (see FIG. 63 (7)). That is, in the present embodiment, in the high-probability time-saving gaming state, the variable effect based on the winning of the second starting port 122 is the second expected effect rather than the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121. Is easy to execute.
In this case, the variable effect based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 122 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state is better than the variable effect based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state. However, even if it is a variable effect before the variable effect that is expected to be a big hit, the zone effect can be entertained by the player with high probability. Therefore, in the variable effect based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 122 in the high-probability short-time game state, it is possible to improve the interest of the game even if the variable effect is before the variable effect that is expected to be a big hit. can.

In particular, in the present embodiment, the second expected effect is executed in the variable effect example 1 (see FIG. 52 (12)). That is, in the present embodiment, the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the low-probability time-saving non-game state is better than the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state. , The second expected effect is easy to execute.
In this case, the variable effect based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 121 in the low-probability time-saving non-game state is rather than the variable effect based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state. It is possible to entertain the player with a high probability of the zone production even if the fluctuation production is before the fluctuation production that is expected to be a big hit. Therefore, the player should make the first starting port 121 win the game ball in the low-probability time-saving non-game state, and should make the second starting port 122 win the game ball in the high-probability time-saving gaming state. Can be recognized by.

In the present embodiment, it has been explained that the second expected effect is not executed (0%) in the variable effect based on the winning of the first start port 121 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state, but the present invention is not limited to this. Even if the variable effect is based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving game state, the second expected effect may be executed.

Further, in the modified example, the bonus effect of operating the middle movable accessory 115B is executed (see FIG. 75 (12)), while the role of operating the left movable accessory 115A based on the preliminary determination result by the preliminary determination process. No object production has been performed. In the following, the accessory effect for operating the medium movable accessory 115B may be referred to as the first accessory effect. Further, the accessory effect of operating the left movable accessory 115A based on the result of the preliminary determination may be referred to as a second accessory effect below. On the other hand, in the variable effect example 3, the second accessory effect is executed (see FIG. 59 (11)). That is, in the present embodiment, in the high-probability time-saving gaming state, the variable effect based on the winning of the second starting port 122 is the second character rather than the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121. The production is easy to execute.
In this case, the variable effect based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 122 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state is better than the variable effect based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state. However, it is possible to entertain the player through the role production based on the preliminary judgment result with high probability. Therefore, in the variable production based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 122 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state, the entertainment of the game can be improved by the production based on the preliminary determination result.

In particular, in the present embodiment, the second accessory effect is executed in the variable effect example 1 (see FIG. 52 (12)). That is, in the present embodiment, the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the low-probability time-saving non-game state is better than the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state. , The second character production is easy to be executed.
In this case, the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the low-probability time-saving non-game state has a higher probability than the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state. It is possible to entertain the player with the character production based on the preliminary judgment result. Therefore, the player should make the first starting port 121 win the game ball in the low-probability time-saving non-game state, and should make the second starting port 122 win the game ball in the high-probability time-saving gaming state. Can be recognized by.

In the present embodiment, it has been explained that the second character effect is not executed (0%) in the variable effect based on the winning of the first start port 121 in the high-probability time-saving game state, but the present invention is not limited to this. Even if the variable effect is based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving game state, the second character effect may be executed.

Further, in the modified example, the effect effect of displaying the accessory effect image 92 is executed (see FIG. 75 (12)), while the effect effect of displaying the effect image based on the pre-determination result by the pre-determination process is executed. It has not been. Here, the effect effect for displaying the accessory effect image 92 may be referred to as a first color effect below. Further, the effect effect of displaying the effect image based on the result of the preliminary determination may be referred to as a second color effect below. Then, in the variation effect example 4, the second color effect for displaying the zone effect image 66 is executed based on the preliminary determination result (see FIG. 63 (9)). That is, in the present embodiment, in the high-probability time-saving gaming state, the variable effect based on the winning of the second starting port 122 is more the second color effect than the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121. Is easy to execute.
In this case, the variable effect based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 122 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state is better than the variable effect based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state. However, it is possible to entertain the player with an effect effect based on the pre-judgment result with high probability. Therefore, in the variable production based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 122 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state, the entertainment of the game can be improved by the production based on the preliminary determination result.

In particular, in the present embodiment, in the variation effect example 1, the second color effect for displaying the zone effect image 66 based on the preliminary determination result is executed (see FIG. 53 (14)). That is, in the present embodiment, the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the low-probability time-saving non-game state is better than the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state. , The second color effect is easy to execute.
In this case, the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the low-probability short-time non-gaming state has a higher probability than the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state. It is possible to entertain the player with an effect effect based on the pre-judgment result. Therefore, the player should make the first starting port 121 win the game ball in the low-probability time-saving non-game state, and should make the second starting port 122 win the game ball in the high-probability time-saving gaming state. Can be recognized by.

In the present embodiment, it has been described that the second color effect is not executed (0%) in the variable effect based on the winning of the first start port 121 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state, but the present invention is not limited to this. Even if the variable effect is based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving game state, the second color effect may be executed.

Further, in the modified example, a sound effect of outputting the sound of "hot !?" from the speaker 156 is executed (see FIG. 75 (12)). This sound effect is not based on the pre-determination result, but is based on the variation effect pattern corresponding to the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 13). In the following, this sound effect may be referred to as a first sound effect. On the other hand, in the modified example, the sound effect suggesting that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit is not executed based on the preliminary determination result. In the following, a sound effect that outputs an effect sound suggesting that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit based on the result of the preliminary determination may be referred to as a second sound effect. Then, in the variable effect example 4, the second sound effect is executed (see FIG. 63 (9)). That is, in the present embodiment, in the high-probability time-saving gaming state, the variable effect based on the winning of the second starting port 122 is more the second sound effect than the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121. Is easy to execute.
In this case, the variable effect based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 122 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state is better than the variable effect based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state. However, it is possible to entertain the player with a sound effect based on the pre-judgment result with high probability. Therefore, in the variable production based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 122 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state, the entertainment of the game can be improved by the production based on the preliminary determination result.

In particular, in the present embodiment, the second sound effect is executed in the variation effect example 2 (see FIG. 55 (2)). That is, in the present embodiment, the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the low-probability time-saving non-game state is better than the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state. , The second sound production is easy to execute.
In this case, the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the low-probability time-saving non-game state has a higher probability than the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state. It is possible to entertain the player with the sound production based on the preliminary judgment result. Therefore, the player should make the first starting port 121 win the game ball in the low-probability time-saving non-game state, and should make the second starting port 122 win the game ball in the high-probability time-saving gaming state. Can be recognized by.

In the present embodiment, it has been described that the second sound effect is not executed (0%) in the variable effect based on the winning of the first start port 121 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state, but the present invention is not limited to this. Even if the variable effect is based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving game state, the second sound effect may be executed.

Further, in the modified example, the winning sound is not output even if the game ball wins in the first starting port 121 (see FIG. 74 (3)), and the sound effect of the change effect is output even if the change effect is executed. Not done (see Figure 76 (14)). On the other hand, in the variation effect example 1, a winning sound is output when the game ball wins in the first starting port 121 (see FIG. 51 (3)), and a sound effect of the change effect is output when the change effect is executed. (See FIG. 53 (15)). That is, in the present embodiment, when the game ball wins a prize in the first start port 121 in the low-probability time-saving non-game state, a winning effect sound is output, and the game ball is output to the first start port 121 in the high-probability time-saving game state. If is won, the winning effect sound is not output. Here, the "winning effect sound" is a "sound prompting the launch of the game ball to the right side in the game area 111" that is output when the game ball wins in the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving game state. Is different. Further, when the game ball wins the first start port 121 in the low probability time saving non-game state, it is possible to output the effect sound of the change effect, and the game ball wins the first start port 121 in the high probability time saving game state. If this is the case, the effect sound of the change effect is not output.
In this case, the case where the game ball wins the first start port 121 in the low-probability time-saving non-game state is better than the case where the game ball wins in the first start port 121 in the high-probability time-saving game state. It can entertain the player. Therefore, when a game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 121 in a low-probability time-saving non-game state, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In particular, in the present embodiment, in the variation effect example 3, the winning sound is not output even if the game ball wins the second starting port 122 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state (see FIG. 58 (3)). On the other hand, in the variation effect example 4, the effect sound of the change effect is output (see FIG. 63 (10)).
In this case, when the game ball wins the second starting port 122 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state, the effect sound is played more than when the game ball wins the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state. Can be entertained. Therefore, the player should make the first starting port 121 win the game ball in the low-probability time-saving non-game state, and should make the second starting port 122 win the game ball in the high-probability time-saving gaming state. Can be recognized by.

(Modification 2)
FIG. 78 is a diagram showing another modification of the variation effect example 5.
Next, another modification (modification 2) of the variation effect example 5 will be described with reference to FIG. 78. This modification is an example of an effect in which a game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 121 in a high-probability time-saving game state. In the following description, the points different from each of the above-mentioned variation effect examples and modifications will be mainly described, and the points that match each of the above variation effect examples or modifications may be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 78 (1), as the variation of the previous special symbol ends, the effect control unit 300 definitely stops the decorative symbol 41 having low decorativeness in the image display unit 114. There is. At this time, the hold number display 55, the small symbol 56, the stage image 61, and the right-handed image 75 are displayed. Further, at this time, the special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 221. Further, at this time, the first special symbol holding indicator 218 is displayed as "0" corresponding to the number of holdings of the first starting port 121. Further, at this time, the fluctuation display on the sub-first fluctuation display 81 is stopped. Further, at this time, the sub first hold indicator 83 is displayed as “0”.

Next, when the game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 121, the cycle fluctuation of the special symbol is started in the first special symbol display 221 as shown in FIG. 78 (2), and then the sub first fluctuation display is started. The variation display at 81 is started. On the other hand, the decorative symbol 41 is maintained in a fixed stopped state. Further, in the small symbol 56, the stopped state is maintained. Further, the variable image 51 is not displayed. Further, the winning sound notifying that the game ball has won the prize is not output to the first starting port 121. Further, in the stage image 61, the display of the moving image is maintained. That is, in the image display unit 114, only the display content of the stage image 61 changes.

Next, when the game ball wins in the first starting port 121, the first special symbol hold indicator 218 is displayed as "1" as shown in FIG. 78 (3), and then the sub first hold indicator 83 is displayed. Is displayed as "1". On the other hand, the reserved image 52 is not displayed. Further, the number of holdings of the first starting port 121 remains "0". Further, the winning sound notifying that the game ball has won the prize is not output to the first starting port 121. Further, the cycle fluctuation of the special symbol is continued on the first special symbol display 221 and the fluctuation display on the sub first fluctuation display 81 is continued. Further, the decorative symbol 41 is maintained in a fixed stopped state. Further, in the small symbol 56, the stopped state is maintained. Further, in the stage image 61, the display of the moving image is maintained.

Next, as shown in FIG. 78 (4), the special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 221 and then the fluctuation display on the sub first fluctuation display 81 is stopped. Further, the decorative symbol 41 is maintained in a fixed stopped state. Further, in the small symbol 56, the stopped state is maintained. Further, in the stage image 61, the display of the moving image is maintained.

Next, the number of holdings of the first starting port 121 is subtracted, and as shown in FIG. 78 (5), the cycle fluctuation of the special symbol is started in the first special symbol display 221 and the first special symbol holding display is displayed. The vessel 218 is displayed as "0". After that, the variation display on the sub first variation indicator 81 is started, and the sub first hold indicator 83 is displayed as “0”. On the other hand, the decorative symbol 41 is maintained in a fixed stopped state. Further, in the small symbol 56, the stopped state is maintained. Further, in the stage image 61, the display of the moving image is maintained.

Next, as shown in FIG. 78 (6), the special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 221 and then the fluctuation display on the sub first fluctuation display 81 is stopped. Further, the decorative symbol 41 is maintained in a fixed stopped state. Further, in the small symbol 56, the stopped state is maintained. Further, in the stage image 61, the display of the moving image is maintained.

As described above, in the modified example 2, even if the game ball wins the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving game state, the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 are not changed.
In this case, the player cannot enjoy the effect of the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56. Therefore, the player can recognize that in the high-probability time-saving gaming state, the first starting port 121 should not be awarded the game ball, but the second starting port 122 should be awarded the game ball. ..

Further, in the second modification, even if the first start port 121 is held in the high-probability time-saving gaming state, the held image 52 is not displayed and the holding number display 55 is not updated. That is, even if the first start opening 121 is held in the high-probability time-saving gaming state, the image display unit 114 does not notify that the first start opening 121 has been held.
In this case, the player cannot recognize that the first starting port 121 is held even by looking at the display contents of the image display unit 114. Therefore, the player can recognize that in the high-probability time-saving gaming state, the first starting port 121 should not be awarded the game ball, but the second starting port 122 should be awarded the game ball. ..

Further, in the second modification, when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state is performed, the decorative symbol 41, the small symbol 56, and the hold are performed. While the display content of the number display 55 does not change, the display content of the stage image 61 changes.
In this case, the player can recognize that the display contents of the decorative symbol 41, the small symbol 56, and the reserved number display 55 do not change due to the defect of the image display unit 114.

In the second modification, when the game ball wins the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving game state, the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 are not changed, and the hold number display 55 is not updated. However, it is not limited to this.
For example, when the game ball wins in the first start opening 121 in the high-probability time-saving game state, the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 may not be changed, while the hold number display 55 may be updated. Further, in this case, the right-handed promotion image 90 (see FIG. 66 (2)) may be displayed.
Further, when the game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving game state, the decorative symbol 41 may be changed while the small symbol 56 may be changed. Further, in this case, the right-handed promotion image 90 may be displayed.
Further, when the game ball wins in the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving game state, the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 are not changed, and the hold number display 55 is not updated, while the right-handed promotion image 90. May be displayed.

Further, in the second modification, an example in which the time-saving remaining number image 79 is not displayed has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this.
In the second modification, the time-saving remaining number image 79 may be displayed. Then, when the game ball wins a prize in the first start opening 121 in the high-probability time-saving game state, the display content of the time-saving remaining number image 79 may be updated (subtracted display).

(Modification 3)
79 and 80 are diagrams showing another modification of the variation effect example 5.
Next, another modification (modification 3) of the variation effect example 5 will be described with reference to FIGS. 79 and 80. This modification is an example of an effect in which the game ball wins the second starting port 122 during the change of the special symbol based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state. In the following description, the points different from each of the above-mentioned production examples will be mainly described, and the description of the points corresponding to the above-mentioned production examples may be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 79 (1), as the variation of the previous special symbol ends, the effect control unit 300 definitely stops the decorative symbol 41 having low decorativeness in the image display unit 114. There is. At this time, the hold number display 55, the small symbol 56, the stage image 61, the right-handed image 75, and the time-saving remaining number image 79 are displayed. In the illustrated example, the text of "90 times" is displayed as the time-saving remaining number image 79. Further, at this time, the special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 221. Further, at this time, the first special symbol holding indicator 218 is displayed as "0" corresponding to the number of holdings of the first starting port 121. Further, at this time, the fluctuation display on the sub-first fluctuation display 81 is stopped. Further, at this time, the sub first hold indicator 83 is displayed as “0”. Further, at this time, the special symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 222. Further, at this time, the second special symbol holding indicator 219 is displayed as "0" corresponding to the number of holdings of the second starting port 122. Further, at this time, the fluctuation display on the sub second fluctuation display 82 is stopped. Further, at this time, the sub second hold indicator 84 is displayed as "0".

Next, when the game ball wins in the first starting port 121, the cycle fluctuation of the special symbol is started in the first special symbol display 221 as shown in FIG. 79 (2), and then the sub first fluctuation display is started. The variation display at 81 is started. On the other hand, the decorative symbol 41 is maintained in a fixed stopped state. Further, in the small symbol 56, the stopped state is maintained. Further, the variable image 51 is not displayed. In addition, the time-saving remaining number image 79 is switched from "90 times" to "89 times". Further, the winning sound notifying that the game ball has won the prize is not output to the first starting port 121. Further, in the stage image 61, the display of the moving image is maintained.

Next, when the game ball wins a prize in the second starting port 122, as shown in FIG. 79 (3), after the cycle fluctuation of the special symbol is started in the second special symbol display 222, the sub second fluctuation display is displayed. The variation display at 82 is started. Further, after that, the variation of the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 is started. Further, the variable image 51 is displayed. In addition, the time-saving remaining number image 79 is switched from "89 times" to "88 times". On the other hand, the winning sound notifying that the game ball has won the prize is not output to the second starting port 122. Further, the cycle fluctuation of the special symbol is continued on the first special symbol display 221 and the fluctuation display on the sub first fluctuation display 81 is continued.

Next, when the game ball wins in the second starting port 122, the second special symbol hold indicator 219 is displayed as "1" as shown in FIG. 79 (4), and then the sub second hold indicator 84 is displayed. Is displayed as "1". In addition, the reserved image 52 is displayed. Further, "1" is displayed on the hold number display 55 of the second starting port 122. On the other hand, the winning sound notifying that the game ball has won the prize is not output to the second starting port 122. Further, the cycle fluctuation of the special symbol is continued on the first special symbol display 221 and the fluctuation display on the sub first fluctuation display 81 is continued. Further, the cycle fluctuation of the special symbol is continued on the second special symbol display 222, and the fluctuation display on the sub second fluctuation display 82 is continued.

Next, as shown in FIG. 79 (5), the second start effect image 93 is displayed. Further, the cycle fluctuation of the special symbol is continued on the first special symbol display 221 and the fluctuation display on the sub first fluctuation display 81 is continued. Further, the cycle fluctuation of the special symbol is continued on the second special symbol display 222, and the fluctuation display on the sub second fluctuation display 82 is continued.

Next, as shown in FIG. 79 (6), the special symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 222, and then the fluctuation display on the sub second fluctuation display 82 is stopped. In addition, the three decorative symbols 41, "412", are all displayed and the confirmation is stopped. In addition, the small symbol 56 also stops as the fluctuation of the special symbol stops. At this time, the combination "412" of the small symbols 56 matches the combination of the decorative symbols 41. Further, the cycle fluctuation of the special symbol is continued on the first special symbol display 221 and the fluctuation display on the sub first fluctuation display 81 is continued.

Next, the number of holdings of the second starting port 122 is subtracted, and as shown in FIG. 80 (7), the cycle fluctuation of the special symbol is started in the second special symbol display 222, and the second special symbol holding display is displayed. The vessel 219 is displayed as "0". After that, the fluctuation display on the sub second fluctuation display 82 is started, and the sub second hold display 84 is displayed as “0”. After that, the variation of the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 is started. Further, the time-saving remaining number image 79 is switched from "88 times" to "87 times".
After that, the special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 221 and then the fluctuation display on the sub first variation display 81 is stopped. At this time, the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 continue to change. Further, the cycle fluctuation of the special symbol is continued on the second special symbol display 222, and the fluctuation display on the sub second fluctuation display 82 is continued.

After that, a game ball may win a prize at the first starting port 121. That is, the game ball may win a prize in the first starting port 121 during the change of the special symbol based on the winning in the second starting port 122. In this case, the change of the special symbol based on the winning of the first starting port 121 may not be performed until the change of the special symbol based on the winning of the second starting port 122 is completed. Then, when the variation of the special symbol based on the winning of the second starting port 122 is completed, the variation of the special symbol based on the winning of the first starting port 121 may be started.

As described above, in the modification 3, when the game ball wins in the second starting port 122 during the change of the special symbol based on the winning in the first starting port 121 in the high probability time-saving gaming state, the game goes to the first starting port 121. The change of the special symbol based on the prize and the change of the special symbol based on the prize to the second starting port 122 are simultaneously performed. Further, the decorative symbol 41, the small symbol 56, the hold number display 55, and the variable image 51 are displayed corresponding to the winning of the second starting port 122. That is, a variable effect is performed based on the winning of the second starting port 122.
In this case, the image display unit 114 is better when the game ball is won in the second starting port 122 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state than when the game ball is won in the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state. It is possible to entertain the player with the production in. Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize that the game ball should be won in the second starting port 122 in the high-probability time-saving game state.

In the third modification, when the game ball wins in the second starting opening 122 during the change of the special symbol based on the winning in the first starting opening 121 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state, the winning in the first starting opening 121 is won. It was explained that the change of the special symbol based on the above and the change of the special symbol based on the winning of the second starting port 122 are performed at the same time, and the variation effect based on the winning of the second starting port 122 is performed. Not limited.
For example, if a game ball wins in the second starting port 122 during a change in the special symbol based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in a high-probability time-saving gaming state, the special symbol based on the winning of the first starting port 121 While the variation and the variation of the special symbol based on the winning of the second starting port 122 are simultaneously performed, the variation of the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 corresponding to the winning of the second starting port 122 is not performed, that is, the second. 2 It is not necessary to perform the variable effect based on the winning of the starting port 122. Further, for example, when the game ball wins the second starting opening 122 during the change of the special symbol based on the winning of the first starting opening 121 in the high probability time-saving gaming state, the special based on the winning of the first starting opening 121. The special symbol change based on the winning of the second starting port 122 is not performed until the change of the symbol is completed, and when the change of the special symbol based on the winning of the first starting port 121 is completed, the second starting port 122 is moved to. The variation of the special symbol based on the winning may be started, and the variation effect based on the winning to the second starting port 122 may be started.

Further, in the above-mentioned production example, it has been explained that when the game ball wins a prize in the first start opening 121 in the high-probability time-saving game state, the right-handed promotion image 90 is displayed. Here, in each of the above-mentioned production examples, when the right-handed promotion image 90 is displayed, the voice "Please right-handed" may be output from the speaker 156. Further, in each of the above-mentioned production examples, instead of displaying the right-handed promotion image 90, the voice "Please right-handed" may be output. The sound output instead of displaying the right-handed promotion image 90 may be a warning sound indicating that the game ball has won a prize in the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state. In other words, the sound output when the game ball wins the first starting port in the high-probability time-saving gaming state is output when the game ball wins the first starting port 121 in the low-probability time-saving non-game state. Any sound different from the sound may be used.
Further, when the game ball wins the first starting port in the high-probability time-saving game state, the right-handed promotion image 90 is not displayed, and the sound prompting the launch of the game ball to the right side in the game area 111 is not output. You may.

Further, when the decorative symbol 41 is temporarily stopped or fixedly stopped, the stop sound of the decorative symbol 41 may be output from the speaker 156. In other words, the sound effect accompanying the display of the decorative symbol 41 may be output from the speaker 156. Here, when the game ball wins in the first starting port 121 in the low-probability time-saving non-game state, when the game ball wins in the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state, and in the high-probability time-saving gaming state, the first 2 In any case where a game ball wins a prize at the starting port 122, a sound effect associated with the display of the decorative symbol 41 may be output.

In addition, the decorative symbol 41 is used in both cases where the game ball wins in the first starting port 121 in the low-probability time-saving non-game state and when the game ball wins in the second starting port 122 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state. A sound effect that accompanies the display may be output. On the other hand, when the game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving game state, the sound effect of the display of the decorative symbol 41 may not be output.

Further, in the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the low probability time saving non-game state, the sound effect of the chance eye effect may be output from the speaker 156 when the chance eye effect is executed. Further, even in the variable effect based on the winning of the second starting port 122 in the high-probability time-saving game state, the sound effect of the chance eye effect may be output from the speaker 156 when the chance eye effect is executed. On the other hand, in the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving game state, the sound effect of the chance eye effect may not be output from the speaker 156.

Further, in the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the low probability time saving non-game state, the sound effect of the zone effect may be output from the speaker 156 when the zone effect is executed. Further, even in the variable effect based on the winning of the second starting port 122 in the high-probability time-saving game state, the sound effect of the zone effect may be output from the speaker 156 when the zone effect is executed. On the other hand, in the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving game state, the sound effect of the zone effect may not be output from the speaker 156.

Further, in the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the low-probability time-saving no-game state, the sound effect of the accessory effect may be output from the speaker 156 when the accessory effect is executed. Further, even in the variable effect based on the winning of the second starting port 122 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state, the sound effect of the accessory effect may be output from the speaker 156 when the accessory effect is executed. On the other hand, in the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state, the sound effect of the accessory effect may not be output from the speaker 156.

Further, in the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the low probability time saving non-game state, the sound effect of the effect effect may be output from the speaker 156 when the effect effect is executed. Further, even in the variable effect based on the winning of the second starting port 122 in the high-probability time-saving game state, the sound effect of the effect effect may be output from the speaker 156 when the effect effect is executed. On the other hand, in the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving game state, the sound effect of the effect effect may not be output from the speaker 156.

Further, in the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the low probability time saving non-game state, the sound effect of the reach effect may be output from the speaker 156 when the reach effect is executed. Further, even in the variable effect based on the winning of the second starting port 122 in the high-probability time-saving game state, the sound effect of the reach effect may be output from the speaker 156 when the reach effect is executed. On the other hand, in the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state, the sound effect of the reach effect may not be output from the speaker 156.

Further, in the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the low probability time saving non-game state, the sound effect of the reach fanning effect may be output from the speaker 156 when the reach fanning effect is executed. Further, even in the variable effect based on the winning of the second starting port 122 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state, the sound effect of the reach fanning effect may be output from the speaker 156 when the reach fanning effect is executed. On the other hand, in the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state, the sound effect of the reach fanning effect may not be output from the speaker 156.

Further, in the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the low probability time saving non-game state, the sound effect of the button operation effect may be output from the speaker 156 when the button operation effect is executed. Examples of the sound effect of the button operation effect include the sound effect of the display of the button operation image 69. Further, even in the variable effect based on the winning of the second starting port 122 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state, the sound effect of the button operation effect may be output from the speaker 156 when the button operation effect is executed. On the other hand, in the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state, the sound effect of the button operation effect may not be output from the speaker 156.

Further, in the present embodiment, it has been described that the hold number display 55 of the first start port 121 and the hold number display 55 of the second start port 122 are displayed on the image display unit 114, but the present invention is not limited to this.
For example, the image display unit 114 may display only one hold number display 55. In this case, in the low-probability time-saving no-game state, the hold number display 55 displays the hold number corresponding to the first start port 121. Further, in the high-probability time-saving gaming state, the hold number display 55 displays the hold number corresponding to the second starting port 122. That is, even if the game ball wins the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving game state, the hold number display 55 is not updated.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the high-probability time-saving gaming state, the variable effect based on the winning of the second starting port 122 is more frequent than the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121. I explained that it is easy to execute the chance eye production of the final episode, but it is not limited to this.
For example, in a high-probability time-saving gaming state, the variable effect based on the winning of the second starting port 122 is the first chance out of a plurality of times, rather than the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121. The eye effect may be facilitated. That is, in the high-probability time-saving gaming state, the variable effect based on the winning of the second starting port 122 is more likely than the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121. It suffices to make it easy for the eye effect to be executed. Further, in this case, the predetermined time may be any time.

Further, in the present embodiment, it has been described that the chance eye effect is executed as the synchronization effect, but the present invention is not limited to this.
For example, as the tuning effect, instead of the above-mentioned chance eye effect, a size change effect that changes the display size of the decorative symbol 41 based on the pre-determination result of the pre-determination process may be performed a plurality of times. Then, in the high-probability time-saving gaming state, the variable effect based on the winning of the second starting port 122 is larger than the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121. The change effect may be easily executed.
Further, for example, as a tuning effect, instead of the above-mentioned chance eye effect, a position change effect in which the display position on the image display unit 114 of the decorative symbol 41 temporarily stopped based on the pre-determination result of the pre-determination process is changed is performed a plurality of times. May be done over. Then, in the high-probability time-saving gaming state, the variable effect based on the winning of the second starting port 122 is the predetermined position out of the plurality of times, rather than the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121. The change effect may be easily executed.

Further, the effect performed in the variable effect is not limited to the above example.
For example, the gaming board 110 of the pachinko gaming machine 100 may be provided with a starting port lamp (not shown) that emits light around the first starting port 121. Then, the expectation degree effect suggesting the expectation degree by the emission color of the start port lamp, the movable accessory 115, the board lamp 116, and the frame lamp 157 may be executed. When blue, green, red, and rainbow colors are set as the emission colors, the slower the emission color, the higher the expectation may be. Further, the variable effect in which the emission color is rainbow color may be a variable effect in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit. That is, the expected degree of the variation effect in which the emission color is rainbow color may be 100%. Further, the expectation degree effect may be executed based on the pre-determination result of the pre-determination process.
Further, in the present embodiment, in the high-probability time-saving gaming state, the variation effect based on the prize in the second start port 122 is more expected than the variation effect based on the prize in the first start port 121. It may be easy to execute. Further, in the high-probability time-saving gaming state, the variable effect based on the winning of the second starting port 122 is more expected than the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 before the start of the reach effect. May be easier to execute. Further, in the high-probability time-saving gaming state, the variable effect based on the winning of the second starting port 122 is more expected than the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 after the start of the reach effect. May be easier to execute. Further, in the high-probability time-saving gaming state, the variable effect based on the winning of the second starting port 122 is more the emission color used in the expectation effect than the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121. There may be many types. Further, in the high-probability time-saving gaming state, the variable effect based on the winning of the second starting port 122 is more suitable for the variable effect based on the winning of the second starting port 122 than the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121. The number of light emitting means used among the movable accessory 115, the board lamp 116, and the frame lamp 157 may be large. Further, in the high-probability time-saving gaming state, the expected degree that the emission color is rainbow-colored in the variable effect based on the prize in the second starting port 122 than in the variable effect based on the prize in the first starting port 121. The production may be facilitated.
In addition, the fluctuation effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the low-probability time-saving non-game state is more expected than the variation effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state. It may be easy to execute. Further, the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the low-probability time-saving non-game state is the start of the reach effect, rather than the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state. It may be easy to execute the expectation degree production in front. Further, the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the low-probability time-saving non-game state is the start of the reach effect, rather than the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state. It may be easy to execute the expectation degree production later. Further, the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the low-probability time-saving non-game state is more expected than the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state. Many types of emission colors may be used. Further, the fluctuation effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the low-probability time-saving non-game state is more than the variation effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state. , The number of light emitting means used among the start port lamp, the movable accessory 115, the board lamp 116, and the frame lamp 157 may be large. In addition, the emission color of the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the low-probability time-saving non-game state is rainbow, rather than the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state. The expectation degree effect, which is a color, may be easily executed.

In addition, "in the high-probability time-saving gaming state, the variable effect based on the winning of the second starting port 122 is easier to execute the expected degree effect than the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121." That is, "In the high-probability time-saving gaming state, the variable effect based on the winning of the second starting port 122 is more expected than the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 before the start of the reach effect. "It is easy to execute the effect" and "In the high-probability time-saving game state, the variable effect based on the winning of the second starting port 122 is more reach effect than the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121." It is easy to execute the expectation degree effect after the start of There are more types of emission colors used in the expectation degree production. " The variable effect based on the prize has a larger number of light emitting means used among the start port lamp, the movable accessory 115, the board lamp 116, and the frame lamp 157 in the expectation degree effect. " In the state, the probability effect that the emission color is rainbow color is more likely to be executed in the variation effect based on the prize in the second start port 122 than in the variation effect based on the prize in the first start port 121. , "Variation production based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the low-probability time-saving non-game state is more expected than the fluctuation production based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the low-probability time-saving gaming state. Is easy to execute "," The variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the low-probability time-saving non-game state is better than the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state. However, it is easy to execute the expectation level effect before the start of the reach effect. " The variable effect based on the winning of the mouth 121 is easier to execute the expectation effect after the start of the reach effect, and "the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state". , There are more types of emission colors used in the expectation effect in the variable effect based on the winning of the first start port 121 in the low-probability time-saving game state. " The variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the low-probability time-saving non-game state is better than the variable effect based on the winning of the moving port 121, in the expected degree effect, the starting port lamp, the movable accessory 115, The number of light emitting means used among the board lamp 116 and the frame lamp 157 is large. ” The variation effect based on the winning of the first start port 121 in the above is easier to execute the expectation effect effect in which the emission color is rainbow color. " It is also included that the expectation degree effect is not executed (0%) in the variable effect based on the prize. Further, the expected degree effects of the variation effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state and the variation effect based on the winning of the second starting port 122 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state are described above. The relationship may be related to the expectation degree effect based on the pre-determination result of the pre-determination process. Further, the expectation degree effect of the fluctuation effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state and the variation effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the low-probability time-saving non-game state is described above. Each relationship may be a relationship regarding the expectation degree effect based on the pre-determination result of the pre-determination process.
Further, the expectation degree effect may be an effect performed by at least one of the start port lamp, the movable accessory 115, the board lamp 116, and the frame lamp 157, or may be an effect performed by any of them.

Further, the display means for displaying the effect image is not limited to the image display unit 114.
For example, a display means for displaying the effect image, which is smaller than the image display unit 114, may be provided on the front side (player side) of the image display unit 114. Further, a light guide plate, which is a display means for displaying the effect image, may be provided on the front side (player side) of the image display unit 114. Further, a 3D image display means for displaying a 3D image may be provided on the front side (player side) of the image display unit 114. The display means, the light guide plate, and the 3D image display means smaller than the image display unit 114 are hereinafter referred to as sub-display means. In this case, a sub-effect of displaying an expectation degree image suggesting the expectation degree on the sub-display means may be executed.
Then, in the present embodiment, in the high-probability time-saving gaming state, the sub-effect is executed by the variable effect based on the winning of the second starting port 122 rather than the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121. It may be easy to do. Further, in the high-probability time-saving gaming state, the variable effect based on the winning of the second starting port 122 has a sub-effect before the start of the reach effect, rather than the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121. It may be easy to execute. Further, in the high-probability time-saving gaming state, the variable effect based on the winning of the second starting port 122 has a sub-effect after the start of the reach effect, rather than the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121. It may be easy to execute. Further, as the sub-effect, there may be a plurality of types of sub-effects having different types of expected degree images. In the high-probability time-saving gaming state, there are more types of sub-effects to be executed in the variable effect based on the prize in the second starting port 122 than in the variable effect based on the prize in the first starting port 121. You may.
In addition, the sub-effect is executed by the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the low-probability time-saving non-game state, rather than the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state. It may be easy to do. Further, the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the low-probability time-saving non-game state is the start of the reach effect, rather than the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state. The sub-effect in front may be easily executed. Further, the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the low-probability time-saving non-game state is the start of the reach effect, rather than the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state. It may be easy to execute the sub-effect later. Further, the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the low-probability time-saving non-game state is more executed than the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state. There may be many types of production.

In addition, "in the high-probability time-saving gaming state, the sub-effect is easier to be executed in the variable effect based on the prize in the second starting port 122 than in the variable effect based on the prize in the first starting port 121". , "In the high-probability time-saving gaming state, the variable effect based on the winning of the second starting port 122 has a sub-effect before the start of the reach effect, rather than the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121. "Easy to execute", "In a high-probability time-saving game state, the variable effect based on the winning of the second starting port 122 starts the reach effect rather than the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121. "It is easier to execute the sub-effect later" and "In the high-probability time-saving game state, the variable effect based on the prize at the second starting port 122 is better than the variable effect based on the prize at the first starting port 121." , There are many types of sub-effects to be executed. " It is easier to execute the sub-effect in the variable effect based on The variable effect based on the winning of 121 is easier to execute the sub-effect before the start of the reach effect, and is lower than the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the high probability time-saving gaming state. It is easier to execute the sub-effect after the start of the reach effect in the variable effect based on the winning of the first start port 121 in the probability time-saving non-game state, and to the first start port 121 in the high-probability time-saving game state. There are more types of sub-effects to be executed in the variable effect based on the prize in the first starting port 121 in the low probability time-saving non-game state than in the variable effect based on the prize. " In the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the probability time saving game state, the sub effect is not executed (0%). Further, the sub-effects of the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state and the variable effect based on the winning of the second starting port 122 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state are described above. The relationship may be a relationship for a sub-effect based on the pre-determination result of the pre-determination process. Further, the sub-effects of the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state and the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the low-probability time-saving non-game state are described above. The relationship may be related to the sub-effect based on the pre-determination result of the pre-determination process.

Further, the production performed over a plurality of times is not limited to the above example.
For example, the effect effect may be performed multiple times. The color of the image in the effect image may be different in each of the plurality of effect effects. In addition, zone effects of different types may be performed multiple times. Further, the change effect of the reserved image 52 and the variable image 51 may be performed a plurality of times. Further, the pseudo-continuous production may be performed a plurality of times. Moreover, the expectation degree production may be performed a plurality of times. Further, the sub-effect may be performed a plurality of times. In addition, the character production may be performed multiple times. In each of the plurality of accessory effects, the moving target of the three movable accessories 115 may be different. The above-mentioned effect performed over a plurality of times is referred to as a multiple-time effect. The multiple-time effect may be performed in one variable effect, or may be performed over a plurality of variable effects.
Further, in the present embodiment, in the high-probability time-saving gaming state, the variable effect based on the winning of the second starting port 122 is produced more than once than the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121. It may be easy to execute. Further, in the high-probability time-saving gaming state, the variable effect based on the winning of the second starting port 122 is more than the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121. It may be easy to execute the effect of a predetermined time. Further, in this case, the predetermined time may be any time.
Further, in the present embodiment, the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the low-probability time-saving non-game state is better than the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state. , The effect may be easily executed multiple times. Further, the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the low-probability time-saving non-game state is more than the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state. The effect of a predetermined time out of a plurality of times may be easily executed. Further, in this case, the predetermined time may be any time.

Further, "in the high-probability time-saving gaming state, the variable effect based on the winning of the second starting port 122 is more likely to be executed multiple times than the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121." That is, "In the high-probability time-saving gaming state, the variable effect based on the winning of the second starting port 122 is more than the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121. It is easy to execute the effect of the predetermined number of times. It is easier to execute the effect multiple times in the variable effect based on the variable effect, and the first start port in the low-probability time-saving non-game state is higher than the variable effect based on the winning of the first start port 121 in the high-probability time-saving game state. "It is easier to execute a predetermined production out of a plurality of times in a plurality of productions in a variable production based on a prize in 121", in each case, a prize is awarded to the first starting port 121 in a high-probability time-saving gaming state. In the variable effect based on, it is included that the effect is not executed multiple times (0%). Further, regarding the execution ratio of the multiple effects of the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state and the variable effect based on the winning of the second starting port 122 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state. Each of the above-mentioned relationships may be related to the execution ratio of the multiple times effect based on the pre-determination result of the pre-determination process. Further, the execution ratio of the multiple effects of the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state and the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the low-probability time-saving non-game state. Each of the above-mentioned relationships may be related to the execution ratio of the multiple times effect based on the pre-determination result of the pre-determination process.

Further, in the high-probability time-saving gaming state, the variable effect based on the winning of the second starting port 122 is more used as the effect image in the effect effect than the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121. There may be many types of. Further, the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the low-probability time-saving non-game state is more effective in the effect effect than the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state. There may be many types of colors used as images.
Further, "In the high-probability time-saving gaming state, the variable effect based on the winning of the second starting port 122 is used as the effect image in the effect effect rather than the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121. "There are many kinds of colors", "Variation effect based on winning the first starting port 121 in the low-probability time-saving non-game state, rather than the variation effect based on winning the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state." The fact that there are more types of colors used as effect images in the effect effect "means that the effect effect is not executed (0%) in the variable effect based on the winning of the first start port 121 in the high-probability time-saving game state. Is also included.

Further, in the present embodiment, it has been described that even if the game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state, the sound accompanying the winning is not output, but the present invention is not limited to this.
When a game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 121 in a high-probability time-saving gaming state, a sound accompanying the winning may be output. Even if the winning of the first starting port 121 in the low-probability time-saving non-game state is easier to output the sound accompanying the winning than the winning of the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state. good. In addition, "the winning of the first starting port 121 in the low-probability time-saving non-game state is easier to output the sound accompanying the winning than the winning of the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state". Also includes that even if a game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 121 in a high-probability time-saving gaming state, the sound accompanying the winning is not output.

Further, in the present embodiment, it has been described that the sound effects of the various effects described above are not output in the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state, but the present invention is not limited to this. Even if the variable effect is based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving game state, the sound effects of the various effects described above may be output. Then, in the high-probability time-saving gaming state, the sound effects of various effects are more likely to be output in the variable effect based on the prize in the second starting port 122 than in the variable effect based on the prize in the first starting port 121. You may do so. Further, the variable sound effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the low-probability time-saving non-game state is more effective than the variable sound effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state. The sound may be easily output.
Further, "In the high-probability time-saving gaming state, the sound effects of various effects are output in the variable effect based on the prize in the second starting port 122 than in the variable effect based on the prize in the first starting port 121. "Easy", "Variable sound effects based on winning the first starting port 121 in the low-probability time-saving non-game state are more various than variable sound effects based on winning the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state. In all cases, the sound effects of various effects are not output (0%) in the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving game state. included. Further, "In the high-probability time-saving gaming state, the sound effects of various effects are output in the variable effect based on the prize in the second starting port 122 than in the variable effect based on the prize in the first starting port 121. "Easy", "Variable sound effects based on winning the first starting port 121 in the low-probability time-saving non-game state are more various than variable sound effects based on winning the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state. "Easy to output the sound effect of the effect" means that various effects are not performed (0%) in the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the high probability time-saving game state. It also includes that the sound effect of is not output.

Further, in the high-probability time-saving gaming state, the reserved image 52 of more color types is displayed when the second starting port 122 is won than when the first starting port 121 is won. You may do it. Further, when the first starting port 121 is won in the low-probability time-saving non-game state, the reserved image 52 of more color types is won than when the first starting port 121 is won in the high-probability time-saving gaming state. May be displayed.
Further, "In the high-probability time-saving gaming state, the reserved image 52 of more color types is displayed when the second starting port 122 is won than when the first starting port 121 is won. That is, "more color types are reserved when the first starting port 121 is won in the low-probability time-saving non-game state than when the first starting port 121 is won in the high-probability time-saving gaming state.""The image 52 is displayed" also includes that the reserved image 52 is not displayed when the first starting port 121 is won in the high-probability time-saving gaming state.

Further, in the high-probability time-saving gaming state, the variation image 51 of more color types is displayed when the second start opening 122 is won than when the first start opening 121 is won. You may do it. Further, the variation image 51 of more color types is obtained when the first starting port 121 is won in the low-probability time-saving non-game state than when the first starting port 121 is won in the high-probability time-saving gaming state. May be displayed.
Further, "In the high-probability time-saving gaming state, the variation image 51 of more color types is displayed when the second start opening 122 is won than when the first start opening 121 is won. That is, "more color types change when the first starting port 121 is won in the low-probability time-saving non-game state than when the first starting port 121 is won in the high-probability time-saving gaming state.""The image 51 is displayed" also includes that the variable image 51 is not displayed when the first starting port 121 is won in the high-probability time-saving gaming state.

In addition, in the high-probability time-saving gaming state, when the first starting port 121 is won, the second starting opening 122 is won, and when the second starting opening 122 is won, a plurality of different character effects are operated. It may be easy to execute. In addition, a plurality of different movable accessories 115 operate in the case where the first start opening 121 is won in the low probability time-saving non-game state than in the case where the first start opening 121 is won in the high-probability time-saving gaming state. You may make it easy to carry out the character production of.

Further, in the accessory production, a plurality of operation patterns of the movable accessory 115 may be provided. Then, in the high-probability time-saving gaming state, even if there are more movement patterns of the movable accessory 115 in the accessory production, the case where the second start port 122 is won is higher than the case where the first start port 121 is won. good. Further, the operation of the movable accessory 115 in the character production is better when the first start port 121 is won in the low-probability time-saving non-game state than when the first start port 121 is won in the high-probability time-saving game state. There may be many patterns.

In addition, a special symbol may be displayed in the variable effect. Examples of the special symbol include a pseudo-continuous image 70, an SP symbol, and the like. The SP symbol is a symbol that suggests that the SP reach effect is performed by being displayed. Then, in the high-probability time-saving gaming state, the variable effect based on the winning of the second starting port 122 has a variable effect in which the special symbol is displayed, rather than the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121. It may be easy to execute. In addition, in the high-probability time-saving gaming state, there are more types of special symbols displayed in the variable effect based on the prize in the second starting port 122 than in the variable effect based on the prize in the first starting port 121. You may. In addition, a special symbol is displayed in the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the low-probability time-saving non-game state, rather than the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state. The variable effect to be performed may be easily executed. In addition, the type of special symbol to be displayed is when the first starting port 121 is won in the low-probability time-saving non-game state, rather than the fluctuation effect based on the winning in the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state. May be many.
In addition, "In the high-probability time-saving gaming state, the variable effect based on the winning of the second starting port 122 is more the variable effect based on the winning of the second starting port 122 than the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121. Is easy to execute. ”“ In the high-probability time-saving gaming state, the variable effect based on the winning of the second starting port 122 is displayed rather than the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121. "There are many types of special symbols" and "Variation effects based on winning the first starting port 121 in the low-probability time-saving non-game state, rather than fluctuation effects based on winning the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state." It is easier to execute the variable effect in which the special symbol is displayed, "and" the first in the low-probability time-saving non-game state than the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving game state. " There are more types of special symbols displayed in the variable effect based on the winning of the starting port 121. ”In each case, in the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port in the high probability time-saving gaming state, It also includes the fact that the variable effect in which the special symbol is displayed is not executed (0%).

Further, in the high-probability time-saving gaming state, even if the effect of moving the reserved image 52 is easier to be performed when the second start opening 122 is won than when the first start opening 121 is won. good. The effect of moving the reserved image 52 is, for example, an effect of moving the second reserved image 52 to the display position of the first reserved image 52. Further, the effect of moving the reserved image 52 is, for example, an effect of moving the first reserved image 52 to the display position of the variable image 51. Further, in the low-probability time-saving non-game state, the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 is better than the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state. The moving effect may be facilitated.
In addition, "in the high-probability time-saving gaming state, it is easier to move the reserved image 52 when the second starting port 122 is won than when the first starting port 121 is won.""The hold image 52 moves in the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the low-probability time-saving non-game state than in the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state. "Easy to perform the effect" includes that the effect of moving the reserved image 52 is not performed when the first start port 121 is won in the high-probability time-saving game state. Further, when the first start opening 121 is won in the high-probability time-saving gaming state, the effect of moving the reserved image 52 is not performed, and the first start opening 121 is won in the high-probability time-saving gaming state. Also includes that the effect of moving the hold image 52 is not performed because the hold image 52 is not displayed.

Further, when the decorative symbol 41 with high decorativeness (see FIG. 51 (1)) is displayed, an operation effect in which the decorative symbol 41 operates may be performed. The effect of operating the decorative symbol 41 is an effect of changing the display area of the decorative symbol 41, such as the operation of the character in the decorative symbol 41. Further, the motion effect may be performed before the variation effect is started and the high-speed variation display by the decorative symbol 41 is started. An operation effect may be performed immediately before the decorative symbol 41 is stopped and displayed. That is, the operation effect may be performed when the decorative symbol 41 is stopped and displayed. Further, the motion effect may include a plurality of types of motion effect having different motions.
Then, in the present embodiment, in the high-probability time-saving gaming state, the variable effect based on the winning of the second starting port 122 is more dependent on the decorative symbol 41 than the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121. It is also possible to facilitate the variation effect that the operation effect is performed before the high-speed variation display starts. Further, in the high-probability time-saving gaming state, the variable effect based on the winning of the second starting port 122 is more stopped and displayed when the decorative symbol 41 is stopped and displayed than the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121. It may be possible to facilitate the variable effect of producing the motion. Further, in the high-probability time-saving gaming state, there are more types of motion effects performed in the variable effect based on the prize in the second starting port 122 than in the variable effect based on the prize in the first starting port 121. May be good.
Further, the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the low-probability time-saving non-game state is more the variation effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state than the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121. It is also possible to facilitate the variation effect that the operation effect is performed before the high-speed variation display starts. Further, the decorative symbol 41 is more effective in the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the low-probability time-saving non-game state than in the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state. It may be possible to easily perform a variable effect that produces an operation when the stop display is displayed. Further, the fluctuation effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the low-probability time-saving no-game state is performed more than the variation effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state. There may be many types of.

Further, "In the high-probability time-saving gaming state, the variable effect based on the winning of the second starting port 122 is faster than the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121. It is easy to perform a variable effect that produces an action before the start of the game. " It is easier to perform a variable effect based on the variable effect when the decorative symbol 41 is stopped and displayed. " However, there are more types of motion effects that are performed based on the winning of the second starting port 122, "and" the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state. " In a low-probability time-saving non-game state, it is easier to perform a variation effect based on a prize in the first starting port 121, which is an operation effect before the high-speed variation display by the decorative symbol 41 starts. " The decorative symbol 41 is stopped and displayed in the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the low probability time-saving non-game state than in the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state. "It is easy to perform a variable effect that produces an action when performing", and "a variable effect based on winning a prize in the first start port 121 in a high-probability time-saving gaming state is more likely to occur in a low-probability time-saving non-game state. There are more types of motion effects that are performed based on the prizes in It also includes no (0%).

Further, when the variation effect is started, the variation effect may be performed in which the timing at which the high-speed variation display of the three decorative symbols 41 is started is aligned with the three decorative symbols 41. In other words, a variable effect may be performed in which the display timings of the three decorative symbols 41 change from an easily visible state to an invisible or difficult to see state.
Then, in the present embodiment, when the variable effect in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out of order is performed in the high probability time-saving game state, the variable effect based on the holding number of the first starting port 121 being "4" is performed. However, in the variation effect based on the number of holdings of the second starting port 122 being "4", the variation in which the display timings of the three decorative symbols 41 change from an easy-to-see state to an invisible or difficult-to-see state are aligned. The production may be facilitated. In addition, when a variable effect in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out of order is performed in a high-probability time-saving game state, the second start is performed rather than the variable effect based on the number of reservations of the first start port 121 being "1". The variation effect based on the number of holdings of the mouth 122 being "1" makes it easier to perform the variation effect in which the display timings of the three decorative symbols 41 change from the easily visible state to the invisible or difficult to see state. You may do so. In addition, when a variable effect in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out of order is performed in a high-probability time-saving game state, a variable effect based on the number of reservations of the first starting port 121 being "1" and a second starting port are performed. In the variation effect based on the number of reservations of 122 being "1", the execution ratio of the variation effect in which the display timings of the three decorative symbols 41 change from an easy-to-see state to an invisible or difficult-to-see state is the same. There may be.
Further, when the variable effect in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out of order is performed, the low probability time is shortened as compared with the variable effect based on the holding number of the first starting port 121 being "4" in the high probability time saving game state. In the variable effect based on the number of holdings of the first starting port 121 being "4" in the non-game state, the display timing at which the three decorative symbols 41 change from an easy-to-see state to an invisible or difficult-to-see state is set. It may be possible to facilitate the uniform variation effect. Further, when the variable effect in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out of order is performed, the low probability time is shortened as compared with the variable effect based on the holding number of the first starting port 121 being "1" in the high probability time saving game state. In the variable effect based on the number of holdings of the first starting port 121 being "1" in the non-game state, the display timing at which the three decorative symbols 41 change from an easy-to-see state to an invisible or difficult-to-see state is set. It may be possible to facilitate the uniform variation effect. In addition, when a variable effect in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out of order is performed, a variable effect based on the number of reservations of the first starting port 121 being "1" in the high probability time saving game state and a low probability time saving none. In the variation effect based on the number of holdings of the first starting port 121 being "1" in the game state, the display timings of the three decorative symbols 41 from the easily visible state to the invisible or difficult to see state are aligned. The execution ratio of the effect may be the same.

In addition, "when a variable effect in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out of order is performed in a high-probability time-saving game state, a second variable effect is performed rather than a variable effect based on the number of reservations of the first starting port 121 being" 4 ". In the variable effect based on the number of holdings of the starting port 122 being "4", the variable effect in which the display timings of the three decorative symbols 41 change from an easy-to-see state to an invisible or difficult-to-see state is performed. "Easy" and "When a variable effect is performed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out of order in a high-probability time-saving game state, the variable effect based on the number of reservations of the first starting port 121 being" 1 "is higher than the variable effect. In the variable effect based on the number of holdings of the second starting port 122 being "1", the variable effect in which the display timings of the three decorative symbols 41 change from an easy-to-see state to an invisible or difficult-to-see state is aligned. "Easy to perform", "When a variable effect is performed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out of order in a high-probability time-saving game state, the variable effect is based on the number of reservations of the first starting port 121 being" 1 ". In the variable effect based on the fact that the number of holdings of the second starting port 122 is "1", the variable effect in which the display timings of the three decorative symbols 41 change from an easy-to-see state to an invisible or difficult-to-see state is aligned. It is based on the fact that the execution rate is the same "and" the number of reservations of the first starting port 121 is "4" in the high probability time-saving gaming state when the variable effect in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out of order is performed. In the variable effect based on the number of holdings of the first starting port 121 being "4" in the low-probability time-saving non-game state, the variable effect is invisible or visible from the state where the three decorative symbols 41 are easy to see, rather than the variable effect. "It is easy to perform variable effects with the same display timing that makes it difficult", and "when variable effects are performed where the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out of order, the number of holdings of the first start port 121 in the high probability time-saving game state" The three decorative symbols 41 are more in the variable effect based on the number of reservations of the first starting port 121 being "1" in the low probability time-saving non-game state than in the variable effect based on "1". It is easy to perform a variable effect in which the display timing is aligned from an easy-to-see state to an invisible or difficult-to-see state. " In the variable effect based on the number of holdings of the first starting port 121 being "1", and the variable effect based on the number of holdings of the first starting port 121 being "1" in the low probability time saving non-game state. The lottery results of the special symbol lottery are out of the question for the fact that the execution ratios of the variable effects with the same display timing from the easily visible state to the invisible or difficult to see state of the three decorative symbols 41 are the same. In the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state, the three decorative symbols 41 change from an easy-to-see state to an invisible or difficult-to-see state. It also includes the fact that the variable effect with the same timing is not executed (0%).

Further, when the variation effect is started, the variation effect may be performed in the three decorative symbols 41 having different display timings from the state in which the three decorative symbols 41 are easily visible to the state in which the three decorative symbols 41 are invisible or difficult to see. ..
Then, when a variable effect in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out of order is performed in the high-probability time-saving game state, the first start is performed rather than the variable effect based on the number of reservations of the second start port 122 being "4". In the variation effect based on the number of holdings of the mouth 121 being "4", it is easier to perform the variation effect in which the display timings of the three decorative symbols 41 change from an easy-to-see state to an invisible or difficult-to-see state. You may do so. In addition, when a variable effect in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out of order is performed in a high-probability time-saving game state, the first start is performed rather than the variable effect based on the number of reservations of the second start port 122 being "1". In the variation effect based on the number of holdings of the mouth 121 being "1", it is easier to perform the variation effect in which the display timings of the three decorative symbols 41 change from an easy-to-see state to an invisible or difficult-to-see state. You may do so. When a variable effect in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out of order is performed in a high-probability time-saving game state, the variable effect based on the number of reservations of the second starting port 122 being "1" and the variable effect of the first starting port 121 In the variation effect based on the number of reservations being "1", the execution ratio of the variation effect in which the display timings of the three decorative symbols 41 change from an easy-to-see state to an invisible or difficult-to-see state is the same. May be good.
Further, when the variable effect in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out of order is executed, it is higher than the variable effect based on the number of reservations of the first starting port 121 being "4" in the low probability time-saving no-game state. In the variable time production state based on the number of holdings of the first starting port 121 being "4", the display timing in which the three decorative symbols 41 change from an easy-to-see state to an invisible or difficult-to-see state is used. It may be easy to perform different variable effects. Further, when the variable effect in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out of order is executed, it is higher than the variable effect based on the number of reservations of the first starting port 121 being "1" in the low probability time-saving no-game state. In the variable time production state based on the number of holdings of the first starting port 121 being "1", the display timing in which the three decorative symbols 41 change from an easy-to-see state to an invisible or difficult-to-see state is used. It may be easy to perform different variable effects. Further, when the variable effect in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out of order is executed, the variable effect based on the holding number of the first starting port 121 being "1" in the low probability time-saving no-game state and the high probability. The display timing at which the three decorative symbols 41 change from an easy-to-see state to an invisible or difficult-to-see state is different from the variable effect based on the number of holdings of the first starting port 121 being "1" in the time-saving game state. The execution ratio of the variable effect may be the same.

In addition, "when a variable effect in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out of order is performed in a high-probability time-saving game state, the first variable effect is performed based on the number of reservations of the second starting port 122 being" 4 ". In the variation effect based on the number of holdings of the starting port 121 being "4", the variation effect in which the display timing of the three decorative symbols 41 changes from an easy-to-see state to an invisible or difficult-to-see state is performed. "Easy" and "When a variable effect is performed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out of order in a high-probability time-saving game state, the variable effect based on the number of reservations of the second starting port 122 being" 1 "is higher than the variable effect. In the variation effect based on the number of holdings of the first starting port 121 being "1", the variation effect in which the display timings of the three decorative symbols 41 change from the easily visible state to the invisible or difficult to see state is different. "Easy to perform", "When a variable effect is performed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out of order in a high-probability time-saving game state, the variable effect is based on the number of reservations of the second starting port 122 being" 1 ". , The variable effect based on the number of holdings of the first starting port 121 being "1" is different from the variable effect in which the display timings of the three decorative symbols 41 change from an easy-to-see state to an invisible or difficult-to-see state. It is based on the fact that "the execution rate is the same" and "when a variable effect in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out of order is executed, the number of reservations of the first starting port 121 is" 4 "in the low probability time-saving no-game state. The variable effect based on the number of holdings of the first starting port 121 being "4" in the high-probability time-saving gaming state is invisible or difficult to see from the state in which the three decorative symbols 41 are easy to see, rather than the variable effect. "It is easy to perform variable effects with different display timings," and "when a variable effect is executed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out of order, the first start port 121 is held in a low-probability time-saving no-game state. The three decorative symbols 41 are more in the variable effect based on the number of reservations of the first starting port 121 being "1" in the high probability time-saving gaming state than in the variable effect based on the number being "1". It is easy to perform variable effects with different display timings from an easy-to-see state to an invisible or difficult-to-see state. " Fluctuation effect based on the number of holdings of the first starting port 121 being "1" in the gaming state, and fluctuation based on the number of holdings of the first starting opening 121 being "1" in the high-probability time-saving gaming state. In the production, the three decorative symbols 41 change from an easy-to-see state to an invisible or difficult-to-see state. When a variable effect in which the lottery result of the symbol lottery is out of order is performed, in the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121, the three decorative symbols 41 change from an easy-to-see state to an invisible or difficult-to-see state. It is also included that a variable effect with different display timings is always performed (100%).

Further, a vibration effect in which the effect button 161 vibrates may be performed. The vibration effect may be performed when the effect button 161 is operated, or may be performed when the effect button 161 is not operated. Further, the vibration effect may include a plurality of types of vibration effect having different vibration modes.
Then, in the present embodiment, in the high-probability time-saving gaming state, the vibration effect is performed in the variation effect based on the prize in the second start port 122 rather than the variation effect based on the prize in the first start port 121. It may be easy to break. Further, in the high-probability time-saving gaming state, there are more types of vibration effects performed in the variation effect based on the prize in the second start port 122 than in the variation effect based on the prize in the first start port 121. May be good.
In addition, the vibration effect is performed in the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the low-probability time-saving non-game state, rather than the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state. It may be easy to break. Further, the vibration effect performed based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the low-probability time-saving non-game state is better than the variation effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state. There may be many types of.

In addition, "in the high-probability time-saving gaming state, the fluctuation effect based on the winning of the second starting port 122 is easier to perform the vibration effect than the variation effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121". , "In the high-probability time-saving gaming state, there are more types of vibration effects performed based on the winning of the second starting port 122 than the variation effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121." That is, "The fluctuation effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the low-probability time-saving no-game state is more vibrating than the variation effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state. It is easier to perform, and "variable effects based on winning the first starting port 121 in the low-probability time-saving non-game state are better than variable effects based on winning the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state." "There are many types of vibration effects to be performed" includes that the vibration effects are not performed (0%) in the fluctuation effects based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state.

In addition, a jackpot suggestion effect suggesting that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot may be performed. As the jackpot suggestion effect, for example, after the start of the reach effect, when the effect effect is performed by operating the effect button 161 (see FIG. 56 (11)), the vibration effect is performed, and the board lamp 116 and the frame. The first effect is that the lamp 157 emits light in rainbow colors and the rainbow-colored image is displayed on the image display unit 114. Further, as the jackpot suggestion effect, for example, a second effect performed at a timing different from that of the first effect can be mentioned. As the second effect, for example, a sound effect (see FIG. 55 (2)) in which the voice of "big hit !?" is output at the start of the change, an effect in which the rainbow-colored change image 51 is displayed, and the like are executed. There is an effect suggesting that the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 shifts to the high-probability time-saving gaming state.

Then, in the present embodiment, the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state and the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the low-probability time-saving non-game state are the first. 1 The execution ratio of the production is different. Further, in the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving game state and the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the low-probability time-saving non-game state, the execution ratio of the second effect is Is different.
Further, in the variable effect based on the winning of the first start port 121 in the low-probability time-saving non-game state, both the first effect and the second effect can be executed, while the first start port in the high-probability time-saving game state. In the variable effect based on the winning of 121, the execution of at least one of the first effect and the second effect may be restricted. The regulated effect may be the first effect, the second effect, or both.
Further, the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state is the first effect rather than the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the low-probability time-saving non-game state. The execution rate may be small. Further, the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state is the second effect rather than the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the low-probability time-saving non-game state. The execution rate may be small.

Further, in the high-probability time-saving gaming state, the execution ratio of the first effect may be different between the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 and the variable effect based on the winning of the second starting port 122. .. Further, in the high-probability time-saving gaming state, the execution ratio of the second effect may be different between the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 and the variable effect based on the winning of the second starting port 122. ..
Further, in the variable effect based on the winning of the second start port 122 in the high-probability time-saving game state, both the first effect and the second effect can be executed, while the first start port 121 in the high-probability time-saving game state. In the variable effect based on the winning of the prize, the execution of at least one of the first effect and the second effect may be restricted. The regulated effect may be the first effect, the second effect, or both.
Further, in the high-probability time-saving gaming state, the execution rate of the first effect is smaller in the variable effect based on the prize in the first starting port 121 than in the variable effect based on the prize in the second starting port 122. May be good. Further, in the high-probability time-saving gaming state, the execution rate of the second effect is smaller in the variable effect based on the prize in the first starting port 121 than in the variable effect based on the prize in the second starting port 122. May be good.

Further, "the first effect is executed in the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state and the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the low-probability time-saving non-game state. "The ratios are different" and "Variable effects based on winning the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state are better than variable effects based on winning the first starting port 121 in the low-probability time-saving non-game state." , The execution rate of the first effect is small "," In the high-probability time-saving game state, the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 and the variable effect based on the winning of the second starting port 122 "The execution rate of the first effect is different" and "In the high-probability time-saving game state, the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 is better than the variable effect based on the winning of the second starting port 122." , The execution rate of the first effect is small "includes that the first effect is not executed (0%) in the variable effect based on the winning of the first start port 121 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state. ..
Further, "the second effect is executed in the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving game state and the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the low-probability time-saving non-game state. "The ratios are different" and "Variable effects based on winning the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state are better than variable effects based on winning the first starting port 121 in the low-probability time-saving non-game state." , The execution rate of the second effect is small "," In the high-probability time-saving game state, the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 and the variable effect based on the winning of the second starting port 122. The execution rate of the second effect is different. ”“ In the high-probability time-saving game state, the variable effect based on the prize at the first start port 121 is better than the variable effect based on the prize at the second start port 122. The fact that the execution rate of the second effect is small ”includes that the second effect is not executed (0%) in the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state. ..

Further, in the present embodiment, when the variable effect in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out of order is executed in the high-probability time-saving game state, the second starting port is more than the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121. It was explained that the reach effect is easier to be executed in the variable effect based on the winning of 122. Here, "when a variable effect in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out of order is executed in a high-probability time-saving game state, the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 is performed, rather than the variable effect to the second starting port 122. The fact that the reach effect is easier to execute in the variable effect based on the winning is that the lottery result of the special symbol based on the winning in the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving game state is out of order. Is not executed (0%).
Further, in the present embodiment, when the variable effect in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out of order is executed, the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state is lower than the variable effect. It was explained that the reach effect is easier to be executed in the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the gaming state. Here, "when the variable effect in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out of order is executed, the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving game state is performed in the low-probability time-saving non-game state. The fact that the reach effect is easier to execute in the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 is that the lottery result of the special symbol based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the high probability time-saving gaming state is missed. It is also included that the reach effect is not executed (0%) in the variable effect.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the variable effect in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out of order is executed in the high-probability time-saving game state, the second starting port is more than the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121. It was explained that the variable production based on the winning of 122 is easier to execute the reach fanning production. Here, "when a variable effect in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out of order is executed in a high-probability time-saving game state, the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 is performed, rather than the variable effect to the second starting port 122. The fact that the variable production based on the winning is easier to execute the reach fanning effect is that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the high probability time-saving gaming state is out of order. It also includes the fact that the reach fanning effect is not executed (0%).
Further, in the present embodiment, when the variable effect in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out of order is executed, the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state is lower than the variable effect. It was explained that the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the game state is easier to execute the reach fanning effect. Here, "when the variable effect in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out of order is executed, the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving game state is performed in the low-probability time-saving non-game state. The fact that the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 is easier to execute the reach fanning effect "means that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the high probability time-saving gaming state. It is also included that the reach fanning effect is not executed (0%) in the variable effect that is out of the question.

Further, in the present embodiment, when a variable effect in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out of order is performed in a high-probability time-saving game state, the variable effect based on the number of reservations of the first starting port 121 being "4" is obtained. Further, it was explained that the variable effect based on the number of reservations of the second starting port 122 being "4" is easier to execute the variable effect in which the display timings of the three decorative symbols 41 are aligned. Here, "when a variable effect in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out of order is performed in a high-probability time-saving game state, a variable effect based on the number of reservations of the first starting port 121 being" 4 "is performed. 2 The variable effect based on the number of holdings of the starting port 122 being "4" is easier to execute the variable effect in which the display timings of the three decorative symbols 41 are aligned. " In the variable effect in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the number of reservations of 1 starting port 121 being "4" is out of order, the variable effect in which the display timings of the three decorative symbols 41 are aligned may not be executed (0%). included.
Further, in the present embodiment, when a variable effect in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out of order is performed, the variable effect based on the fact that the number of reservations of the first starting port 121 is "4" in the high-probability time-saving gaming state is obtained. However, it is easier to execute the variable effect in which the display timings of the three decorative symbols 41 are aligned in the variable effect based on the holding number of the first starting port 121 being "4" in the low-probability time-saving no-game state. explained. Here, "when a variable effect in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out of order is performed, the variable effect is lower than the variable effect based on the holding number of the first starting port 121 being" 4 "in the high-probability time-saving gaming state. It is easier to execute a variable effect in which the display timings of the three decorative symbols 41 are aligned in the variable effect based on the number of holdings of the first starting port 121 being "4" in the probability time saving non-game state. " In the variable effect in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the holding number of the first starting port 121 being "4" is out of order in the high-probability time-saving game state, the variable effect in which the display timings of the three decorative symbols 41 are aligned is executed. It is also included that it is not (0%).

Further, in the present embodiment, when a variable effect in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out of order is performed in a high-probability time-saving game state, the variable effect based on the number of reservations of the second starting port 122 being "4" is obtained. Further, it has been explained that the variable effect based on the number of reservations of the first starting port 121 being "4" is easier to execute the variable effect in which the decorative symbols 41 are displayed in order. Here, "when a variable effect in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out of order is performed in a high-probability time-saving game state, a variable effect based on the number of reservations of the second starting port 122 being" 4 "is performed. 1 The variable effect based on the number of holdings of the starting port 121 being "4" is easier to execute the variable effect in which the decorative symbols 41 are displayed in order. " In the variable effect in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the holding number of the mouth 121 being "4" is out of order, the variable effect in which the decorative symbols 41 are displayed in order is always executed (100%). ..
Further, in the present embodiment, when the variable effect in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out of order is executed, the high probability time reduction is higher than the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the low probability time saving non-game state. It has been explained that the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the gaming state is easier to execute the variable effect in which the decorative symbols 41 are displayed in order. Here, "when the variable effect in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out of order is executed, the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the low-probability time-saving non-game state is performed in the high-probability time-saving game state. The variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 is easier to execute the variable effect in which the decorative symbols 41 are displayed in order. " In the variable effect in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on "4" is out of order, the variable effect in which the decorative symbols 41 are displayed in order is always executed (100%).

Further, in the present embodiment, when the variable effect in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out of order is executed in the high-probability time-saving game state, the second starting port is more than the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121. It was explained that the variable effect based on the winning of 122 is easier to perform the variable effect in which the button operation effect is executed. Here, "when a variable effect in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out of order is executed in a high-probability time-saving game state, the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 is performed, rather than the variable effect to the second starting port 122. The fact that the variable effect based on the winning is easier to perform the variable effect in which the button operation effect is executed is that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the high probability time-saving gaming state is It is also included that the button operation is not executed (0%) in the variation effect which is out of alignment.
Further, in the present embodiment, when the variable effect in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out of order is executed, the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state is lower than the variable effect. It was explained that the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the gaming state is easier to perform the variable effect in which the button operation effect is executed. Here, "when the variable effect in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out of order is executed, the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving game state is performed in the low-probability time-saving non-game state. The fact that the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 is easier to perform the variable effect in which the button operation effect is executed is based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the high probability time-saving gaming state. It is also included that the button operation is not executed (0%) in the variable effect in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out of order.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the variable effect in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out of order is executed in the high-probability time-saving game state, the second starting port is more than the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121. It was explained that the variable effect based on the winning of 122 is easier to perform the variable effect in which the size change effect is executed. Here, "when a variable effect in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out of order is executed in a high-probability time-saving game state, the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 is performed, rather than the variable effect to the second starting port 122. The fact that the variable effect based on the prize is easier to perform the variable effect in which the size change effect is executed is that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the prize to the first starting port 121 in the high probability time-saving gaming state is It is also included that the size change effect is not executed (0%) in the variable effect that is out of alignment.
Further, in the present embodiment, when the variable effect in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out of order is executed, the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state is lower than the variable effect. It was explained that the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the gaming state is easier to perform the variable effect in which the size change effect is executed. Here, "when the variable effect in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out of order is executed, the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving game state is performed in the low-probability time-saving non-game state. The variation effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 is easier to perform the variation effect in which the size change effect is executed. " It is also included that the size change effect is not executed (0%) in the variable effect in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out of order.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the variable effect in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out of order is performed in the high-probability time-saving game state, the variable effect based on the winning of the first start port 121 is performed rather than the variable effect of the second start port 122. It was explained that the variable effect based on the winning of the prize is easier to perform the variable effect in which the position change effect is executed. Here, "when a variable effect in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out of order is performed in a high-probability time-saving game state, a prize is won in the second starting port 122 rather than a variable effect based on a winning in the first starting port 121. The fact that the variable effect based on the above is easier to perform the variable effect in which the position change effect is executed is that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state is missed. It is also included that the position change effect is not executed (0%) in the variation effect.
Further, in the present embodiment, when a variable effect in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out of order is performed, a low-probability time-saving no-game is performed as compared with a variable effect based on a prize in the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving game state. It was explained that the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the state is easier to perform the variable effect in which the position change effect is executed. Here, "when a variable effect in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out of order is performed, the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving game state is higher than the variable effect in the low-probability time-saving non-game state. 1 The variation effect based on the winning of the starting port 121 is easier to perform the variation effect in which the position change effect is executed. " It is also included that the position change effect is not executed (0%) in the variable effect in which the lottery result of the symbol lottery is out of order.

Further, the position change effect is not limited to the above-mentioned example.
For example, the display position of the decorative symbol 41 having low decorativeness may change from the position shown in FIG. 54 (19) to a different display position. In this case, the display position shown in FIG. 54 (19) is referred to as a first position. Further, the display position further changed from this first position is referred to as a second position. The second position is, for example, one side of the image display unit 114, which is a region different from the upper side. Then, when a variable effect in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out of order is performed, the first start in the low-probability time-saving non-game state is higher than the variable effect based on the winning of the first start port 121 in the high-probability time-saving game state. The variation effect based on the winning of the mouth 121 may be easier to perform the variation effect in which the position change effect of changing the decorative symbol 41 having low decorativeness from the first position to the second position is executed. Here, "when a variable effect in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out of order is performed, the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving game state is higher than the variable effect in the low-probability time-saving non-game state. 1 The variable effect based on the winning of the starting port 121 is easier to perform the variable effect in which the position change effect of changing the decorative symbol 41 with low decorativeness from the first position to the second position is executed. " In a variable effect in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state is out of order, the position where the decorative symbol 41 with low decorativeness is changed from the first position to the second position. It also includes that the change effect is not executed (0%).

Further, in the present embodiment, when the variable effect in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out of order is performed in the high-probability time-saving game state, the variable effect based on the winning of the first start port 121 is performed rather than the variable effect of the second start port 122. It was explained that the SP reach effect is easier to execute in the variable effect based on the prize. Here, "when a variable effect in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out of order is performed in a high-probability time-saving game state, a prize is won in the second starting port 122 rather than a variable effect based on a winning in the first starting port 121. It is easier to execute the SP reach effect in the variable effect based on the above. It also includes the fact that the reach effect is not executed (0%).
Further, in the present embodiment, when a variable effect in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out of order is performed, a low-probability time-saving no-game is performed as compared with a variable effect based on a prize in the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving game state. It was explained that the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the state is easier to execute the SP reach effect. Here, "when a variable effect in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out of order is performed, the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving game state is higher than the variable effect in the low-probability time-saving non-game state. The fact that the SP reach effect is more likely to be executed in the variable effect based on the winning of the 1 starting port 121 is based on the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the high probability time-saving gaming state. It is also included that the SP reach effect is not executed (0%) in the variable effect that is out of the question.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the variable effect in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out of order is performed in the high-probability time-saving game state, the variable effect based on the winning of the first start port 121 is performed rather than the variable effect of the second start port 122. It was explained that the variable production based on the winning of the prize is easier to perform the variable production in which the character production is executed. Here, "when a variable effect in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out of order is performed in a high-probability time-saving game state, a prize is won in the second starting port 122 rather than a variable effect based on a winning in the first starting port 121. The fact that the variable effect based on the above is easier to perform the variable effect in which the character effect is executed is that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state is missed. It is also included that the character effect is not executed (0%) in the variable effect.
Further, in the present embodiment, when a variable effect in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out of order is performed, a low-probability time-saving no-game is performed as compared with a variable effect based on a prize in the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving game state. It was explained that the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the state is easier to perform the variable effect in which the character effect is executed. Here, "when a variable effect in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out of order is performed, the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving game state is higher than the variable effect in the low-probability time-saving non-game state. It is easier to perform the variable effect in which the character effect is executed in the variable effect based on the prize in the 1 starting port 121. " It is also included that the character effect is not executed (0%) in the variable effect in which the lottery result of the symbol lottery is out of order.

Further, in the present embodiment, when a variable effect in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit is performed in a high-probability time-saving game state, the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 is performed rather than the variable effect of the second starting port 122. It was explained that the variable effect based on the winning of the prize is easier to perform the variable effect in which the button operation effect is executed. Here, "when a variable effect in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit is performed in a high-probability time-saving game state, a prize is won in the second starting port 122 rather than a variable effect based on the winning in the first starting port 121. The variable effect based on the above is easier to perform the variable effect in which the button operation effect is executed. " It is also included that the button operation effect is not executed (0%) in the variable effect.
Further, in the present embodiment, when a variable effect in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit is performed, a low-probability time-saving no-game is performed as compared with a variable effect based on a prize in the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving game state. It was explained that the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the state is easier to perform the variable effect in which the button operation effect is executed. Here, "when a variable effect in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit is performed, the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving game state is the first in the low-probability time-saving non-game state. 1 The variation effect based on the winning of the starting port 121 is easier to perform the variation effect in which the button operation effect is executed. " It is also included that the button operation effect is not executed (0%) in the variable effect in which the lottery result of the symbol lottery is a big hit.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out of order and the reach effect is not executed in the high-probability time-saving game state, the reserved number of the first start port 121 is "4". The rate at which the variable effect based on the fact that the number of reservations of the first starting port 121 is "1" is longer than that based on the variable effect is the first rate. The variation effect based on the number of reservations of the second starting port 122 being "1" has a longer execution time than the variation effect based on the number of reservations of the 2 start port 122 being "4". It was explained that the rate at which is performed is the second rate. Then, in this case, it was explained that the second ratio is larger than the first ratio. Here, "the second ratio is larger than the first ratio" includes that the first ratio is 0.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out of order and the variable effect in which the reach effect is not executed is performed, the number of reservations of the first start port 121 is "4" in the high probability time-saving game state. The rate at which the variable effect with a longer execution time is performed in the variable effect based on the number of reservations of the first starting port 121 being "1" is the first rate than the variable effect based on the existence. In the low-probability time-saving no-game state, the fluctuation effect based on the number of reservations of the first start port 121 is "1" rather than the variation effect based on the number of reservations of the first start port 121 being "4". It was explained that the rate at which the variable effect with a long execution time is performed is the second rate. Then, in this case, it was explained that the second ratio is larger than the first ratio. Here, "the second ratio is larger than the first ratio" includes that the first ratio is 0.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out of order and the reach effect is not executed in the high-probability time-saving game state, the reserved number of the second starting port 122 is "4". It was explained that the variable effect based on the fact that the number of reservations of the first starting port 121 is "4" is easier to perform the variable effect having a long execution time than the variable effect based on the above. Here, "It is based on the fact that the number of reservations of the second starting port 122 is" 4 "when a variable effect is performed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out of order and the reach effect is not executed in the high probability time-saving game state. The fact that the variable effect based on the number of holdings of the first starting port 121 being "4" is easier to perform the variable effect with a longer execution time than the variable effect "is special in the high-probability time-saving gaming state. When the lottery result of the symbol lottery is out of order and the reach effect is not executed, the first start is longer than the execution time of the variation effect based on the holding number of the second start port 122 being "4". It is also included that the execution time of the variation effect based on the number of reservations of the mouth 121 being "4" is always longer (100%).
Further, in the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out of order and the variable effect in which the reach effect is not executed is performed, the number of reservations of the first start port 121 is "4" in the high probability time-saving gaming state. It is easier to perform a variation effect with a shorter execution time in a variation effect based on the fact that the number of reservations of the first starting port 121 is "4" in a low-probability time-saving non-game state than a variation effect based on the above. explained. Here, "It is based on the fact that the number of reservations of the first starting port 121 is" 4 "in the high-probability time-saving gaming state when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out of order and the reach effect is not executed. It is easier to perform a variable effect with a shorter execution time in a variable effect based on the number of reservations of the first starting port 121 being "4" in a low-probability time-saving non-game state than in a variable effect. " When the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out of order and the reach effect is not executed, the variable effect is executed based on the holding number of the first starting port 121 being "4" in the high probability time-saving game state. It also includes that the execution time of the variation effect based on the number of reservations of the first starting port 121 being "4" is always shorter (100%) than the time in the low probability time saving non-game state.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out of order and the reach effect is not executed in the high-probability time-saving game state, the reserved number of the first starting port 121 is "4". The rate at which the same variation pattern is selected between the variation effect based on the above and the variation effect based on the number of reservations of the first starting port 121 being "1" is the first rate, and the second starting port 122. The rate at which the same fluctuation pattern is selected between the fluctuation effect based on the number of reservations of "4" and the variation effect based on the number of reservations of the second starting port 122 being "1" is the second. Explained that it is a ratio. Then, in this case, it was explained that the first ratio is larger than the second ratio. Here, "the first ratio is larger than the second ratio" includes that the second ratio is 0 (0%) and the first ratio is 1 (100%).
Further, in the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out of order and the variable effect in which the reach effect is not executed is performed, the number of reservations of the first start port 121 is "4" in the high probability time-saving gaming state. The rate at which the same variation pattern is selected between the variation effect based on the existence and the variation effect based on the number of reservations of the first starting port 121 being "1" is the first rate, and there is no low probability of time saving. In the gaming state, the same variation pattern is used for the variation effect based on the number of reservations of the first starting port 121 being "4" and the variation effect based on the number of reservations of the first start opening 121 being "1". It was explained that the ratio in which is selected is the second ratio. Then, in this case, it was explained that the first ratio is larger than the second ratio. Here, "the first ratio is larger than the second ratio" includes that the second ratio is 0 (0%) and the first ratio is 1 (100%).

Further, in the present embodiment, there is a high probability that a variable effect is performed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out of order based on the number of reservations of the first starting port 121 being "1" in the high probability time-saving gaming state. It has been explained that the ratio of the fluctuation pattern having the shortest fluctuation time among the fluctuation patterns that can be selected based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the time-saving gaming state is the first ratio. Further, when a variable effect is performed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out of order based on the number of reservations of the second starting port 122 being "1" in the high-probability time-saving game state, the first in the high-probability time-saving game state. 2 It was explained that the ratio of the fluctuation pattern having the shortest fluctuation time among the fluctuation patterns that can be selected based on the winning of the starting port 122 is the second ratio. Then, it was explained that the first ratio is larger than the second ratio. Here, "the first ratio is larger than the second ratio" also includes that the first ratio is 1 (100%).
Further, in the present embodiment, there is a high probability that a variable effect is performed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out of order based on the number of reservations of the first starting port 121 being "1" in the high probability time-saving gaming state. It has been explained that the ratio of the fluctuation pattern having the shortest fluctuation time among the fluctuation patterns that can be selected based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the time-saving gaming state is the first ratio. Further, when a variable effect is performed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out of order based on the number of reservations of the first starting port 121 being "1" in the low probability time saving no game state, the low probability time saving no game state is performed. It was explained that the ratio of the fluctuation pattern having the shortest fluctuation time among the fluctuation patterns that can be selected based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the above is the second ratio. Then, it was explained that the first ratio is larger than the second ratio. Here, "the first ratio is larger than the second ratio" also includes that the first ratio is 1 (100%).

Further, in the present embodiment, in the high-probability time-saving gaming state, the change effect is executed by the variation effect based on the prize of the second start port 122 rather than the variation effect based on the prize of the first start port 121. I explained that it is easy to do. Here, "In the high-probability time-saving gaming state, the variable effect based on the winning of the second starting port 122 is easier to execute than the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121." This includes that when the game ball wins the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving game state, the change effect of the reserved image 52 is not executed (0%). In addition, "in the high-probability time-saving gaming state, the variable effect based on the winning of the second starting port 122 is easier to execute than the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121". In the variable effect example 5, the change effect of the hold image 52 is not executed because the hold image 52 is not displayed even if the game ball wins in the first start opening 121 in the high probability time saving game state (0%). ) Is also included.
Further, in the present embodiment, the case where the game ball wins the first starting port 121 in the low-probability time-saving non-game state is better than the case where the game ball wins the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state. , It has been explained that the change effect of the reserved image 52 is easily executed. Here, "the case where the game ball wins the first starting port 121 in the low-probability time-saving non-game state is better than the case where the game ball wins the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state. "Easy to execute the change effect of 52" includes that the change effect of the reserved image 52 is not executed (0%) when the game ball wins in the first start port 121 in the high probability time-saving game state. Is done. In addition, "the case where the game ball wins the first starting port 121 in the low-probability time-saving non-game state is better than the case where the game ball wins the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state. The change effect is easy to be executed. ”As in the variation effect example 5, the hold image 52 is not displayed even if the game ball wins in the first start port 121 in the high probability time saving game state, so that the hold image 52 is not displayed. It is also included that the change effect of is not executed (0%).

Further, in the present embodiment, in the high-probability time-saving gaming state, the variable effect based on the winning of the second starting port 122 starts the reach effect rather than the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121. Explained that the change effect in the previous is easy to be executed. Here, "In the high-probability time-saving gaming state, the variable effect based on the winning of the second starting port 122 is different from the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 before the start of the reach effect. "Easy to execute the effect" means that the change effect of the variable image 51 is not executed (0%) before the start of the reach effect in the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the high probability time-saving gaming state. included. In addition, "In the high-probability time-saving gaming state, the variable effect based on the winning of the second starting port 122 is more the changing effect before the start of the reach effect than the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121. "Easy to execute" also includes that the variation effect of the variation image 51 is not executed (0%) in the variation effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state. Furthermore, "In the high-probability time-saving gaming state, the variable effect based on the winning of the second starting port 122 is more the changing effect before the start of the reach effect than the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121. Is easy to execute. " It also includes that the change effect of 51 is not executed (0%).
Further, in the present embodiment, the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 121 in the low-probability time-saving non-game state is more than the fluctuation effect based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state. It was explained that the variation effect based on is easier to execute the change effect before the start of the reach effect. Here, "a variable effect based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 121 in the low-probability time-saving non-game state, rather than the variable effect based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state. It is easier to execute the change effect before the start of the reach effect. " It also includes that the change effect is not executed (0%). In addition, "a variable effect based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 121 in the low-probability time-saving non-game state is performed rather than the variable effect based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state. It is easier to execute the change effect before the start of the reach effect. " %) Is also included. Further, "a variable effect based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 121 in the low-probability time-saving non-game state, rather than a variable effect based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state. It is easier to execute the change effect before the start of the reach effect. ”As shown in Example 5 of the variation effect, the variation effect based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state. In this case, since the variable image 51 is not displayed, the change effect of the variable image 51 is not executed (0%).

Further, in the present embodiment, in the high-probability time-saving gaming state, the variable effect based on the winning of the second starting port 122 is more than the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121. I explained that it is easy to carry out the final chance production of. Here, "In the high-probability time-saving gaming state, the variable effect based on the winning of the second starting port 122 is the final round of the plurality of times, rather than the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121. It is easy to execute the chance eye effect of That is also included. In addition, "In the high-probability time-saving game state, the variable effect based on the winning of the second starting port 122 is the final of the plurality of times, rather than the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121. "Easy to execute the chance eye effect" means that, as shown in Example 5 of the variable effect, none of the chance eye effects is executed in the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state (0). %) Is also included.
Further, in the present embodiment, the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the low-probability time-saving non-game state is better than the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state. , Explained that it is easy to execute the final chance eye production out of multiple times. Here, "the variation effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the low-probability time-saving no-game state is more than the variation effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state". In the variable production based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state, the final chance eye production of the multiple times is executed. It is also included that it is not (0%). In addition, "the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the low-probability time-saving no-game state is more than the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state". As shown in Example 5 of the variable effect, the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state indicates that the chance eye effect of the final round is easy to be executed. Also includes not being executed (0%).

Further, in the present embodiment, in the high-probability time-saving gaming state, the variable effect based on the winning of the second starting port 122 is the second expected effect rather than the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121. Explained that is easy to execute. Here, there is a high probability that the second expected effect is more likely to be executed in the variable effect based on the prize in the second starting port 122 than in the variable effect based on the prize in the first starting port 121. It is also included that the second expected effect is not executed (0%) in the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the time-saving game state. Further, it is an example of the variable effect that "the variable effect based on the winning of the second starting port 122 is easier to execute the second expected effect than the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121". As shown in 5, any zone effect is not executed (0%) in the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving game state.
Further, in the present embodiment, the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the low-probability time-saving non-game state is better than the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state. , Explained that the second expected production is easy to be executed. Here, "the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the low-probability time-saving non-game state is better than the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state. "Easy to execute the expected effect" also includes that the second expected effect is not executed (0%) in the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state. In addition, "the second expectation is that the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the low-probability time-saving non-game state is better than the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state. "Easy to execute the effect" means that, as shown in Example 5 of the variation effect, no zone effect is executed (0%) in the variation effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state. Is also included.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the high-probability time-saving gaming state, the variable effect based on the winning of the second starting port 122 is the second character rather than the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121. I explained that the production is easy to execute. Here, "In the high-probability time-saving gaming state, the second character effect is executed by the variable effect based on the winning of the second starting port 122 rather than the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121. "Easy to be done" also includes that the second character effect is not executed (0%) in the variable effect based on the winning of the first start port 121 in the high-probability time-saving game state. Further, "In the high-probability time-saving gaming state, the variable effect based on the winning of the second starting port 122 is performed as the second character effect rather than the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121. "Easy" means that, as shown in Example 5 of the variable effect, no character effect is executed (0%) in the variable effect based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state. Is also included.
Further, in the present embodiment, the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the low-probability time-saving non-game state is better than the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state. , Explained that the second character production is easy to be executed. Here, "the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the low-probability time-saving no-game state is better than the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state. "Easy to execute the character effect" also includes that the second character effect is not executed (0%) in the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving game state. In addition, "the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the low-probability time-saving non-game state is the second role, rather than the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state. "Easy to execute the object effect" means that, as shown in Example 5 of the variation effect, no accessory effect is executed in the variation effect based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state. (0%) is also included.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the high-probability time-saving gaming state, the variable effect based on the winning of the second starting port 122 is more the second color effect than the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121. Explained that is easy to execute. Here, "In the high-probability time-saving gaming state, the second color effect is executed in the variable effect based on the prize in the second starting port 122 than in the variable effect based on the prize in the first starting port 121. "Easy" also includes that the second color effect is not executed (0%) in the variable effect based on the winning of the first start port 121 in the high-probability time-saving game state. Further, "In the high-probability time-saving gaming state, the second color effect is more likely to be executed in the variable effect based on the prize in the second starting port 122 than in the variable effect based on the prize in the first starting port 121. This includes, as shown in Example 5 of the variation effect, that no effect effect is executed (0%) in the variation effect based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state. Is done.
Further, in the present embodiment, the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the low-probability time-saving non-game state is better than the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state. , Explained that the second color effect is easy to be executed. Here, "the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the low-probability time-saving no-game state is better than the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state. "Easy to execute the color effect" also includes that the second color effect is not executed (0%) in the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state. In addition, "the variation effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the low-probability time-saving non-game state is the second color, rather than the variation effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state. "Easy to execute the effect" means that, as shown in Example 5 of the variation effect, no effect effect is executed in the variation effect based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state (0). %) Is also included.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the high-probability time-saving gaming state, the variable effect based on the winning of the second starting port 122 is more the second sound effect than the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121. Explained that is easy to execute. Here, "In the high-probability time-saving gaming state, the second sound effect is executed in the variable effect based on the prize in the second starting port 122 than in the variable effect based on the prize in the first starting port 121. "Easy" also includes that the second sound effect is not executed (0%) in the variable effect based on the winning of the first start port 121 in the high-probability time-saving game state. Further, "In the high-probability time-saving gaming state, the second sound effect is more likely to be executed in the variable effect based on the prize in the second starting port 122 than in the variable effect based on the prize in the first starting port 121. In other words, as shown in Example 5 of the variation effect, in the variation effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state, no sound effect based on the preliminary determination result is executed (0%). That is also included.
Further, in the present embodiment, the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the low-probability time-saving non-game state is better than the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state. , Explained that the second sound production is easy to be executed. Here, "the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the low-probability time-saving no-game state is better than the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state. "Easy to execute the sound effect" also includes that the second sound effect is not executed (0%) in the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state. In addition, "the fluctuation effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the low-probability time-saving non-game state is the second sound, rather than the variation effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state. As shown in Example 5 of the variation effect, in the variation effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state, any sound effect based on the pre-judgment result is executed. It also includes not being done (0%).

Further, in the present embodiment, it has been described that when the game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving game state, the effect sound of the change effect is not output. Here, "when the game ball wins a prize in the first start port 121 in the high-probability time-saving game state, the effect sound of the change effect is not output" means that the game is played in the first start port 121 in the high-probability time-saving game state. It also includes not outputting the effect sound of the change effect because the change effect is not performed when the ball wins a prize. Further, as shown in Example 5 of the variable effect, "when the game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving game state, the effect sound of the change effect is not output" means that the high-probability time-saving game state. In the first starting port 121, when the game ball wins a prize, the change effect is not performed because the variable image 51 and the hold image 52 are not displayed, and thus the effect sound of the change effect is not output.

Further, in the present embodiment, it has been described that the sound effect of the chance eye effect may not be output from the speaker 156 in the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the high probability time saving game state. Here, as shown in Example 5 of the variation effect, "in the variation effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving game state, the sound effect of the chance eye effect is not output from the speaker 156". In the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving game state, the sound effect of the chance eye effect is not output because the chance eye effect is not executed.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the high-probability time-saving gaming state, the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 is more effective than the variable effect based on the winning of the second starting port 122. It was explained that the execution rate of was low. As each effect, for example, change effect, chance eye effect, zone effect, character effect, effect effect, sound effect, button operation effect, expectation degree effect, sub effect, multiple times effect, special pattern display effect, hold. Examples thereof include an effect of moving the image 52, an operation effect, and a vibration effect. Here, even if the variable effect is based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving game state, each of the above-mentioned effects may be executed, but when the right-handed promotion image 90 is displayed or , When the voice of "Please hit right" is output, each of the above-mentioned effects may not be executed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the variation effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state and the variation effect based on the winning of the second starting port 122 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state are performed. I explained the execution ratio of a specific effect when it is performed. Specific effects include, for example, change effect, chance eye effect, zone effect, character effect, effect effect, sound effect, button operation effect, expectation degree effect, sub effect, multiple times effect, and special pattern display effect. Examples include the effect of moving the reserved image 52, the operation effect, and the vibration effect. Here, the execution ratio of the specific effect described above may be the execution rate of the specific effect before the start of the reach effect. Further, the execution ratio of the specific effect described above may be the execution rate of the specific effect after the start of the reach effect. Further, the execution ratio of the specific effect described above may be the execution rate of the specific effect when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out of order. Further, the execution ratio of the specific effect described above may be the execution rate of the specific effect when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit.

Further, in the present embodiment, the variation effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state and the variation effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the low-probability time-saving non-game state are performed. Explained the execution ratio of a specific effect when the above is performed. Specific effects include, for example, change effect, chance eye effect, zone effect, character effect, effect effect, sound effect, button operation effect, expectation degree effect, sub effect, multiple times effect, and special pattern display effect. Examples include the effect of moving the reserved image 52, the operation effect, and the vibration effect. Here, the execution ratio of the specific effect described above may be the execution rate of the specific effect before the start of the reach effect. Further, the execution ratio of the specific effect described above may be the execution rate of the specific effect after the start of the reach effect. Further, the execution ratio of the specific effect described above may be the execution rate of the specific effect when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out of order. Further, the execution ratio of the specific effect described above may be the execution rate of the specific effect when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the high-probability time-saving gaming state, the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 is more specific than the variable effect based on the winning of the second starting port 122. Explained that the execution rate of the production is small. Specific effects include, for example, change effect, chance eye effect, zone effect, character effect, effect effect, sound effect, button operation effect, expectation degree effect, sub effect, multiple times effect, and special pattern display effect. Examples include the effect of moving the reserved image 52, the operation effect, and the vibration effect. Here, in the high-probability time-saving gaming state, the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 is more than the variable effect based on the winning of the second starting port 122, which is one type of specific effect. May be reduced.

Further, in the present embodiment, the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state is better than the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the low-probability time-saving non-game state. , Explained that the execution rate of one specific effect is small. Specific effects include, for example, change effect, chance eye effect, zone effect, character effect, effect effect, sound effect, button operation effect, expectation degree effect, sub effect, multiple times effect, and special pattern display effect. Examples include the effect of moving the reserved image 52, the operation effect, and the vibration effect. Here, the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state is performed more than the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the low-probability time-saving non-game state. The number of types of specific effects may be reduced.

Further, in the present embodiment, it has been described that the sound effect of the zone effect may not be output from the speaker 156 in the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state. Here, as shown in Example 5 of the variation effect, "the sound effect of the zone effect is not output from the speaker 156 in the variation effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving game state". In the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving game state, the sound effect of the zone effect is not output because the zone effect is not executed.

Further, in the present embodiment, it has been described that the sound effect of the character effect may not be output from the speaker 156 in the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving game state. Here, as shown in Example 5 of the variation effect, "in the variation effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving game state, the sound effect of the accessory effect is not output from the speaker 156". In the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving game state, the sound effect of the character effect is not output because the character effect is not executed.

Further, in the present embodiment, it has been described that the sound effect of the effect effect may not be output from the speaker 156 in the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving game state. Here, as shown in Example 5 of the variation effect, "the sound effect of the effect effect is not output from the speaker 156 in the variation effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving game state". In the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving game state, the effect sound of the effect effect is not output because the effect effect is not executed.

Further, in the present embodiment, it has been described that the sound effect of the reach effect may not be output from the speaker 156 in the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state. Here, as shown in Example 5 of the variation effect, "the sound effect of the reach effect is not output from the speaker 156 in the variation effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state". In the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving game state, the sound effect of the reach effect is not output because the reach effect is not executed.

Further, in the present embodiment, it has been described that the sound effect of the reach fanning effect may not be output from the speaker 156 in the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state. Here, as shown in Example 5 of the variation effect, "in the variation effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving game state, the sound effect of the reach fan effect is not output from the speaker 156". In the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving game state, the sound effect of the reach fanning effect is not output because the reach fanning effect is not executed.

Further, in the present embodiment, it has been described that the sound effect of the button operation effect may not be output from the speaker 156 in the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving gaming state. Here, as shown in Example 5 of the variation effect, "the sound effect of the button operation effect is not output from the speaker 156 in the variation effect based on the winning of the first start port 121 in the high probability time saving game state". In the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the high-probability time-saving game state, the sound effect of the button operation effect is not output because the button operation effect is not executed.

Further, in the present embodiment, it has been described that the effect image is displayed in the effect effect. Here, the effect image also includes a change image 62, a chance eye image 63, and the like.

Further, in the present embodiment, each of the above effects performed when the reserved number of the first starting port 121 or the second starting port 122 is "1" is the first starting port 121 or the second starting port 122. The effect may be performed in any of the cases where the number of holds is "2", "3", and "4". Further, in each of the above effects performed when the number of hold of the first start port 121 or the second start port 122 is "4", the number of hold of the first start port 121 or the second start port 122 is "1". , "2", and "3". That is, it may be an effect performed when the number of holdings of the first starting port 121 or the second starting port 122 is a specific number. In this case, the specific number may be any reserved number.

Further, in each of the variation examples 5, the variation effect example 6, the variation effect example 5, and the above-mentioned supplementary items, the effect when the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is a high-probability time-saving gaming state has been described. , Not limited to this. Each of the variations of the variation effect example 5, the variation effect example 6, the variation effect example 5, and the effects described in the above supplementary items is, for example, when the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is a low-probability time-saving gaming state. It may be an event of. That is, in each of the variations of the variation effect example 5, the variation effect example 6, the variation effect example 5, and the effects described in the above supplementary items, the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is higher than the low probability time-saving non-gaming state. It suffices if it is a production when it is in an advantageous state for the player. Further, each of the variation examples 5, the variation effect example 6, the variation example 5, and each effect described in the above supplementary items can be regarded as an effect when the right-handed image 75 is displayed. .. Further, in each of the variation examples 5, the variation effect example 6, the variation example 5, and each effect described in the above supplementary items, the decorative symbol 41 having low decorativeness is displayed at the start of the variation. It can also be seen as a production of.

Further, in the present embodiment, when a jackpot is determined in the jackpot determination, a jackpot game is performed, and a gaming machine in which the gaming state is changed via the jackpot game has been described. In another embodiment, even if it is not determined to be a big hit, the low-probability time-saving no-game state may be changed to the time-saving gaming state. For example, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (the number of consecutive times determined to be lost in the jackpot determination) in the low-probability time-saving no-game state reaches a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 900 times), the fluctuation is determined to be a jackpot. Even if it is not, the player may shift to the time-saving gaming state for a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times, or 100 times or more). In this case, if the special symbol does not become a big hit by the time the special symbol fluctuates a predetermined number of times, the time-saving game state ends and the game returns to the low-probability time-saving non-game state. Alternatively, even if the result of the jackpot judgment is a loss (that is, even if the random number value for the special symbol lottery acquired at the time of winning the starting port is a value indicating a loss), the special symbol acquired at the time of winning When the random number value (big hit symbol random value) for the lottery is a predetermined value, the player may shift to the time-saving game state a predetermined number of times. In this case, after displaying the three predetermined decorative symbols 41, the player may shift to the time-saving gaming state for a predetermined number of times. The three predetermined decorative symbols 41 may be decorative symbols 41 that are not displayed when it is determined to be a big hit, or when it is not determined to be a big hit and the low probability time-saving no-game state is not changed to the time-saving gaming state. .. In other words, the three predetermined decorative symbols 41 may be decorative symbols 41 that are displayed only when shifting from the low-probability time-saving non-game state to the time-saving gaming state when it is not determined to be a big hit. Further, in the case of shifting to the time-saving gaming state based on the number of fluctuations of the special symbol, the predetermined upper limit number of times may be variable or fixed. For example, when the predetermined upper limit number of times is variable, the time-saving gaming state is given when the number of times the special symbol changes becomes the first number, and the number of times the special symbol changes becomes the second number. In some cases, a time-saving gaming state may be granted. In this case, the number of time reductions given may be different according to the number of fluctuations of the special symbol, and the larger the number of fluctuations, the larger the number of time reductions may be set. Further, in the case of shifting to the time saving game state based on the jackpot symbol random value, the number of time saving given by the acquired jackpot symbol random value may be different. For example, if the acquired jackpot symbol random value is the first value, the first time reduction number is given, and if the acquired jackpot symbol random value is the second value, the second time reduction number is given. May be done. Further, there may be a case of shifting to the time-saving gaming state based on the number of fluctuations of the special symbol, or a case of shifting to the time-saving gaming state based on the jackpot symbol random value. In this case, the number of times of time saving to be given may be different depending on the case of shifting to the time-saving gaming state based on the number of fluctuations of the special symbol and the case of shifting to the time-saving gaming state based on the jackpot symbol random value. For example, when shifting to the time-saving gaming state based on the number of fluctuations of the special symbol, it shifts to the time-saving gaming state of 50 times, and when shifting to the time-saving gaming state based on the jackpot symbol random value, it is more than that. It is possible to shift to a time-saving game state of a small number of 30 times. On the contrary, the number of time saving may be increased in the case of shifting to the time saving gaming state based on the jackpot symbol random value than in the case of shifting to the time saving gaming state based on the number of fluctuations of the special symbol. In addition, in the case of shifting to the time-saving gaming state without going through the jackpot in this way, if the time-saving gaming state is further granted without going through the jackpot during the shifted time-saving gaming state, it is new. The time-saving game state may be continued as many times as the time-saving number of times given to. For example, if 50 times of time-saving game state is given without going through the jackpot, and when the special symbol fluctuates 30 times in the time-saving game state, 50 times of time-saving game state is given without going through the big hit. You may shift to the time-saving game state of 50 times. Alternatively, in this case, the number of time reductions may be added. For example, if 50 times of time-saving game state is given without going through the jackpot, and when the special symbol fluctuates 30 times in the time-saving game state, 50 times of time-saving game state is given without going through the big hit. In addition to the remaining 20 times, 50 times newly granted may be added, and 70 times of time saving game state may be given. Further, during such a time-saving game state that does not go through the big hit, the time-saving game state that does not go through the big hit may not be given. Further, in a configuration in which the game shifts to the time-saving gaming state based on the number of fluctuations of the special symbol or the jackpot symbol random value without going through the jackpot, a time-saving suggestion effect suggesting the transition to the time-saving gaming state may be performed. For example, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is close to the above-mentioned upper limit number of times, the time saving suggestion effect may be easily executed. On the contrary, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is close to the above-mentioned upper limit number of times, the time saving suggestion effect may be difficult to be performed. Further, the time-saving gaming state shifted from the low-probability time-saving non-game state when it is not determined to be a big hit may be the low-probability time-saving gaming state.
As described above, the time-saving gaming state shifted from the low-probability time-saving no-game state when it is not determined to be a big hit is regarded as a state more advantageous to the player than the low-probability time-saving no-game state.

Then, in another embodiment, in the variable effect example 3 and the variable effect example 4, the game ball is placed in the second starting port 122 in the time-saving game state in which the low-probability time-saving non-game state is changed when it is not determined to be a big hit. It may be an example of production when a prize is won. That is, in another embodiment, when it is determined to be a jackpot, it is not determined to be a jackpot rather than a variable effect based on a prize to the first starting port 121 in the time-saving gaming state transitioned from the low-probability time-saving non-game state. In addition, the variable effect based on the winning of the second starting port 122 in the time-saving gaming state transitioned from the low-probability time-saving non-game state may be able to improve the interest of the game.

Further, in another embodiment, each of the modified examples of the variable effect example 5, the variable effect example 6, and the variable effect example 5 is set in the time-saving gaming state in which the low-probability time-saving non-game state is changed when it is not determined to be a big hit. It may be a production example when a game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 121. That is, in another embodiment, when it is determined to be a jackpot rather than the variable effect based on the winning of the first starting port 121 in the time-saving gaming state transitioned from the low-probability time-saving non-game state when it is not determined to be a jackpot. In addition, the variable effect based on the winning of the second starting port 122 in the time-saving gaming state transitioned from the low-probability time-saving non-game state may be able to improve the interest of the game.

Although various effects of the pachinko gaming machine 100 have been described above, it is possible to apply or combine all or part of the described contents to other effects even if there is no particular mention. In addition, although various examples of variable effects and modifications have been mentioned, it is possible to apply or combine the contents of such examples of variable effects and modifications to other effects, etc., even if this document is not mentioned. Is. In addition, it is possible to combine various variation production examples and modification examples, or to replace some of them even if this document is not mentioned.

[Technical Features of the Present Invention]
The first configuration that achieves the above object of the present invention is realized as the following gaming machine. This gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 100) has a game control means (for example, a game control unit 200) for controlling the progress of a game and an effect control means (for example, an effect control unit 300) for controlling an effect. The gaming machine is provided, and the game control means is more advantageous to the player than the first mode (for example, the low probability time saving no game state) and the first mode (for example, the low probability time saving no game state). A game ball that can be controlled to a second mode (for example, a high-probability time-saving gaming state) and to a first starting port (for example, the first starting port 121) or a second starting port (for example, the second starting port 122). It is possible to determine whether or not to perform a special game (for example, a big hit game) based on the winning of the prize, and it is possible to store a predetermined number of information related to the determination as a hold storage, and the effect control means (for example, the effect control unit 300). ) Can display a hold image (for example, a hold image 52) stored in the game control means on the display means (for example, the image display unit 114), and the hold image (for example, the hold image 52) can be displayed. It is possible to execute a change effect (for example, a change effect of the hold image 52 in FIG. 62 (2)) that changes the display mode of the hold image 52), and in the second mode (for example, a high-probability time-saving gaming state). The second starting port (for example, the second starting port 122) is more likely than the case where the gaming ball wins a prize in the first starting port (for example, the first starting port 121) (for example, in the case of FIG. 74 (3)). When the game ball wins a prize (for example, in the case of FIG. 62 (1)), the change effect (for example, the change effect of the reserved image 52 in FIG. 62 (2)) is more likely to be executed. It is a machine.

◆ The second configuration that achieves the above objectives is realized as the following gaming machine. This gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 100) has a game control means (for example, a game control unit 200) for controlling the progress of a game and an effect control means (for example, an effect control unit 300) for controlling an effect. The gaming machine provided with the game control means (for example, the game control unit 200) has a first mode (for example, a low probability time saving no game state) and the first mode (for example, a low probability time saving no game state). ) Is controllable to a second mode (for example, a high-probability time-saving gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the first start port (for example, the first start port 121) or the second start port (for example, the second start port). It is possible to determine whether or not to perform a special game (for example, a big hit game) based on the winning of the game ball to the starting port 122), and the effect control means (for example, the effect control unit 300) is the result of the determination. It is possible to execute a variable effect in which a plurality of symbols (for example, three decorative symbols 41) are varied and then displayed on the display means (for example, the image display unit 114) according to the above, and the plurality of symbols (for example, three decorative symbols 41) can be displayed. It is possible to display a part of the decorative symbols 41) (for example, the left and right decorative symbols 41) and perform a reach effect to continue the fluctuation of the remaining symbols (for example, the middle decorative symbol 41). An execution image (for example, a variation image 51) suggesting the content of the information related to the determination related to the change during execution can be displayed on the display means (for example, the image display unit 114) while the symbol changes according to the result of. It is possible to execute a change effect (for example, a change effect of the variable image 51 of FIG. 63 (10)) that changes the display mode of the executed image (for example, the variable image 51), and the second mode (for example, the variable image 51) can be executed. In the high-probability time-saving gaming state), the variation effect based on the winning of the first starting port (for example, the first starting port 121) (for example, FIGS. 75 (11), 75 (12), 76 (for example)). 13) to FIG. 76 (18), FIG. 77 (19) and FIG. 77 (20), the variation effect based on the winning of the second starting port (for example, the second starting port 122) rather than the variation effect). (For example, the variation effect of FIGS. 63 (9) to 63 (12) and 64 (13) to 64 (18)) is the reach effect (for example, the reach effect of FIG. 63 (12)). The gaming machine is characterized in that the change effect (for example, the change effect of the variation image 51 in FIG. 63 (10)) before the start is easily executed.

◆ The third configuration that achieves the above objectives is realized as the following gaming machine. The gaming machine (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 100) has a game control means (for example, a game control unit 200) for controlling the progress of the game and an effect control means (for example, an effect control unit 300) for controlling the effect. The gaming machine provided with the game control means (for example, the game control unit 200) has a first mode (for example, a low probability time saving no game state) and the first mode (for example, a low probability time saving no game state). ) Is controllable to a second mode (for example, a high-probability time-saving gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the first start port (for example, the first start port 121) or the second start port (for example, the second start port). It is possible to determine whether or not to perform a special game (for example, a big hit game) based on the winning of the game ball to the starting port 122), and the effect control means (for example, the effect control unit 300) is the result of the determination. It is possible to execute a variable effect in which a plurality of symbols (for example, three decorative symbols 41) are varied according to the display means (for example, the image display unit 114) and then displayed, and the plurality of symbols are displayed under predetermined conditions. The synchronization effect (for example, the chance eye effect of FIG. 63 (8)) for synchronizing the display of the symbols (for example, three decorative symbols 41) can be executed a plurality of times, and the second mode (for example, a high-probability time-saving game) can be executed. In the state), the variation effect (for example, the variation effect of FIGS. 75 (9) and 75 (10)) based on the winning of the first starting port (for example, the first starting port 121) is described. The variation effect (for example, the variation effect of FIGS. 62 (6), 63 (7) and 63 (8)) based on the winning of the second starting port (for example, the second starting port 122) is better. It is a gaming machine characterized in that the predetermined synchronization effect (for example, the final chance eye effect of the three times in FIG. 63 (8)) can be easily executed out of the plurality of times.

◆ The fourth configuration that achieves the above objectives is realized as the following gaming machine. The gaming machine (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 100) has a game control means (for example, a game control unit 200) for controlling the progress of the game and an effect control means (for example, an effect control unit 300) for controlling the effect. The gaming machine provided with the game control means (for example, the game control unit 200) has a first mode (for example, a low probability time saving no game state) and the first mode (for example, a low probability time saving no game state). ) Is controllable to a second mode (for example, a high-probability time-saving gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the first start port (for example, the first start port 121) or the second start port (for example, the second start port). It is possible to determine whether or not to perform a special game (for example, a big hit game) based on the winning of the game ball to the starting port 122), and the effect control means (for example, the effect control unit 300) is the result of the determination. It is possible to execute a variable effect in which a plurality of symbols (for example, three decorative symbols 41) are varied and then displayed on the display means (for example, the image display unit 114) according to the above-mentioned special game (for example, a jackpot game). It is possible to execute an expected effect (for example, the zone effect of FIG. 63 (7)) that is expected to be performed, and in the expected effect, the result of the determination related to the variable effect being executed is the special game (for example, the special game. For example, the result of the first expected effect (for example, the zone effect of FIG. 75 (11)) that is expected to be the execution of the jackpot game) and the determination related to the variation effect following the variation effect being executed are There is a second expected effect (for example, the zone effect of FIG. 63 (7)) that expects the execution of the special game (for example, a jackpot game), and the second mode (for example, a high-probability time-saving game state). In, the variation effect (for example, FIGS. 75 (11), 75 (12), 76 (13) to 76 (for example) based on the winning of the first starting port (for example, the first starting port 121). 18), the variation effect based on the winning of the second starting port (for example, the second starting port 122) rather than the variation effect of FIGS. 77 (19) and 77 (20) (for example, FIG. 62 (for example). 6), the variable effect of FIGS. 63 (7) and 63 (8)) is characterized in that the second expected effect (for example, the zone effect of FIG. 63 (7)) is more likely to be executed. Is.

◆ The fifth configuration that achieves the above objectives is realized as the following gaming machine. The gaming machine (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 100) has a game control means (for example, a game control unit 200) for controlling the progress of the game and an effect control means (for example, an effect control unit 300) for controlling the effect. The gaming machine provided with the game control means (for example, the game control unit 200) has a first mode (for example, a low probability time saving no game state) and the first mode (for example, a low probability time saving no game state). ) Is controllable to a second mode (for example, a high-probability time-saving gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the first start port (for example, the first start port 121) or the second start port (for example, the second start port). It is possible to determine whether or not to perform a special game (for example, a big hit game) based on the winning of the game ball to the starting port 122), and predetermine whether or not to perform the special game (for example, a big hit game). This is possible, and the effect control means (for example, the effect control unit 300) has a plurality of symbols (for example, three decorative symbols 41) on the display means (for example, the image display unit 114) according to the result of the determination. It is possible to execute a variable effect of changing and then displaying, and it is possible to execute a character effect (for example, the character effect of FIG. 59 (11)) for operating a movable character (for example, the movable character 115). The above-mentioned character effect includes a first character effect (for example, the character effect of FIG. 75 (12)) in which the first movable character (for example, the medium movable character 115B) is operated, and the pre-determination. There is a second accessory effect (for example, the accessory effect of FIG. 59 (11)) in which the second movable accessory (for example, the left movable accessory 115A) is operated based on the result, and the second mode (for example, high) is provided. In the probabilistic time-saving gaming state), the variation effect (for example, FIGS. 75 (11), 75 (12), and 76 (13) based on the winning of the first starting port (for example, the first starting port 121). ) To FIG. 76 (18), FIG. 77 (19), and FIG. 77 (20). For example, FIG. 59 (11), FIG. 59 (12), FIGS. 60 (13) to 60 (18), FIGS. 61 (19), and FIG. It is a gaming machine characterized in that an effect (for example, an effect effect of FIG. 59 (11)) is easily executed.

◆ The sixth configuration that achieves the above objectives is realized as the following gaming machine. This gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 100) has a game control means (for example, a game control unit 200) for controlling the progress of a game and an effect control means (for example, an effect control unit 300) for controlling an effect. The gaming machine provided with the game control means (for example, the game control unit 200) has a first mode (for example, a low probability time saving no game state) and the first mode (for example, a low probability time saving no game state). ) Is controllable to a second mode (for example, a high-probability time-saving gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the first start port (for example, the first start port 121) or the second start port (for example, the second start port). It is possible to determine whether or not to perform a special game (for example, a big hit game) based on the winning of the game ball to the starting port 122), and predetermine whether or not to perform the special game (for example, a big hit game). This is possible, and the effect control means (for example, the effect control unit 300) has a plurality of symbols (for example, three decorative symbols 41) on the display means (for example, the image display unit 114) according to the result of the determination. It is possible to execute a variable effect of varying and then displaying, and the display means (for example, the image display unit 114) displays an image of a predetermined color among a plurality of colors (for example, the accessory effect image 92 of FIG. 75 (12)). ) (For example, the effect effect of FIG. 75 (12)) can be executed, and an image of a predetermined color (for example, the accessory effect image 92 of FIG. 75 (12)) is used for the color effect. A first color effect to be displayed (for example, the effect effect of FIG. 75 (12)) and an image of a predetermined color based on the result of the preliminary determination (for example, the blue zone effect image 66 of FIG. 63 (9)) are displayed. There is a second color effect (for example, the effect effect of FIG. 63 (9)), and in the second mode (for example, a high-probability time-saving gaming state), the first start port (for example, the first start port 121) is used. ) The variation effect (eg, FIG. 75 (11), FIG. 75 (12), FIGS. 76 (13) to 76 (18), FIG. 77 (19) and FIG. 77 (20) based on the prize. Rather than the effect), the variable effect based on the winning of the second starting port (for example, the second starting port 122) (for example, FIGS. 63 (9) to 63 (12) and 64 (13) to FIG. 64 (18) is a gaming machine characterized in that the second color effect (for example, the effect effect of FIG. 63 (9)) is more easily executed.

◆ The seventh configuration that achieves the above objectives is realized as the following gaming machine. This gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 100) has a game control means (for example, a game control unit 200) for controlling the progress of a game and an effect control means (for example, an effect control unit 300) for controlling an effect. The gaming machine provided with the game control means (for example, the game control unit 200) has a first mode (for example, a low probability time saving no game state) and the first mode (for example, a low probability time saving no game state). ) Is controllable to a second mode (for example, a high-probability time-saving gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the first starting port (for example, the first starting port 121) or the second starting port (for example, the second starting port). It is possible to determine whether or not to perform a special game (for example, a big hit game) based on the winning of the game ball to the starting port 122), and predetermine whether or not to perform the special game (for example, a big hit game). This is possible, and the effect control means (for example, the effect control unit 300) has a plurality of symbols (for example, three decorative symbols 41) on the display means (for example, the image display unit 114) according to the result of the determination. It is possible to execute a variable effect of changing and then displaying, and it is possible to execute a sound effect that outputs an effect sound. In the sound effect, a first sound effect that outputs a predetermined first effect sound (FIG. 75). (12) Sound effect) and a second sound effect (for example, FIG. 63 (for example)) that outputs a second effect sound suggesting that the special game (for example, a jackpot game) is performed based on the result of the preliminary determination. 9) There is a sound effect), and in the second mode (for example, a high-probability time-saving gaming state), the variation effect (for example, the variation effect based on the prize for the first start port (for example, the first start port 121)). For example, from the variation effect of FIGS. 75 (11), 75 (12), 76 (13) to 76 (18), 77 (19) and 77 (20)), the second starting port ( For example, the variation effect (for example, the variation effect of FIGS. 63 (9) to 63 (12) and FIGS. 64 (13) to 64 (18)) based on the winning of the second starting port 122) is better. The second sound effect (for example, the sound effect of FIG. 63 (9)) is easily executed.

◆ The eighth configuration that achieves the above objectives is realized as the following gaming machine. This gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 100) has a game control means (for example, a game control unit 200) for controlling the progress of a game and an effect control means (for example, an effect control unit 300) for controlling an effect. The gaming machine provided with the game control means (for example, the game control unit 200) has a first mode (for example, a low probability time saving no game state) and the first mode (for example, a low probability time saving no game state). ) Is controllable to a second mode (eg, high probability time-saving gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the first start port (eg, first start port 121) or second start port (eg, second). It is possible to determine whether or not to perform a special game (for example, a big hit game) based on the winning of the game ball to the starting port 122), and a predetermined number of information related to the determination can be stored as a hold memory. The first holding storage related to the winning to the first starting port (for example, the first starting port 121) and the winning related to the second starting port (for example, the second starting port 122). There are two hold storages, and the effect control means (for example, the effect control unit 300) has a plurality of symbols (for example, three decorative symbols 41) on the display means (for example, the image display unit 114) according to the result of the determination. ) Can be varied and then displayed, and a part of the plurality of symbols (for example, three decorative symbols 41) can be displayed (for example, the left and right decorative symbols 41), and the rest. It is possible to execute a reach effect that continues to fluctuate the symbol (for example, the intermediate decorative symbol 41), and as a result of the determination in the second mode (for example, a high-probability time-saving gaming state), the special game (for example, a jackpot game). ) Is not executed and the reach effect is not executed. When the variable effect is performed, the variable effect based on the number of the first reserved storage being the first specific number (for example, 4) (for example, FIG. 73). The number of the first reserved storage is a second specific number (for example, 1) smaller than the first specific number (for example, 4), as compared with the variable effect in which the execution time of (C) is T12). Based on the variation effect (for example, the variation effect in which the execution time of FIG. 73 (C) is T11), the rate at which the variation effect having a longer execution time is performed is the first ratio, and the second hold memory The number of the second reserved storage is more than the variation effect based on the number being the first specific number (for example, 4) (for example, the variation effect in which the execution time of FIG. 73B is T7). The variation effect based on the second specific number (for example, 1) (for example, FIG. 73). The rate at which the variation effect having a longer execution time is performed in the variation effect (B) in which the execution time is T6 is the second ratio, and the second ratio is larger than the first ratio. It is a gaming machine characterized by.

◆ The ninth configuration that achieves the above objectives is realized as the following gaming machine. This gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 100) has a game control means (for example, a game control unit 200) for controlling the progress of a game and an effect control means (for example, an effect control unit 300) for controlling an effect. The gaming machine provided with the game control means (for example, the game control unit 200) has a first mode (for example, a low probability time saving no game state) and the first mode (for example, a low probability time saving no game state). ) Is controllable to a second mode (eg, high probability time-saving gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the first start port (eg, first start port 121) or second start port (eg, second). It is possible to determine whether or not to perform a special game (for example, a big hit game) based on the winning of the game ball to the starting port 122), and a predetermined number of information related to the determination can be stored as a hold memory. The first holding storage related to the winning to the first starting port (for example, the first starting port 121) and the winning related to the second starting port (for example, the second starting port 122). There are two hold storages, and the effect control means (for example, the effect control unit 300) has a plurality of symbols (for example, three decorative symbols 41) on the display means (for example, the image display unit 114) according to the result of the determination. ) Can be varied and then displayed, and a part of the plurality of symbols (for example, three decorative symbols 41) can be displayed (for example, the left and right decorative symbols 41), and the rest. It is possible to execute a reach effect that continues to change the symbol (for example, the intermediate decorative symbol 41), and as a result of the determination, the special game (for example, a jackpot game) is not executed and the reach effect is not executed. When the effect is performed, in the second mode (for example, a high probability time-saving gaming state), the variation effect (for example, the figure) based on the number of the first reserved storage being the first specific number (for example, 4). The number of the first reserved storage is a second specific number (for example, 1) smaller than the first specific number (for example, 4), as compared with the variable effect in which the execution time of 73 (C) is T12). The rate at which the variation effect having a longer execution time is performed in the variation effect based on the above (for example, the variation effect in which the execution time in FIG. 73C is T11) is the first ratio, and the first mode (for example, For example, in the low probability time-saving no-game state), the execution time of the variation effect (for example, FIG. 73 (A)) based on the number of the first reserved storage being the first specific number (for example, 4) is T2. The number of the first reserved storage is the second specific number (the number of the second specific number) rather than the variable effect. For example, in the variation effect based on 1) (for example, the variation effect having an execution time of T1), the rate at which the variation effect having a longer execution time is performed is the second rate, and the first rate. It is a gaming machine characterized in that the second ratio is larger than that of the second ratio.

◆ The tenth configuration that achieves the above object is realized as the following gaming machine. This gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 100) has a game control means (for example, a game control unit 200) for controlling the progress of a game and an effect control means (for example, an effect control unit 300) for controlling an effect. The gaming machine provided with the game control means (for example, the game control unit 200) has a first mode (for example, a low probability time saving no game state) and the first mode (for example, a low probability time saving no game state). ) Is controllable to a second mode (eg, a high probability time-saving gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player, and is a first starting port (eg, first starting port 121) or a second starting port (eg, second). It is possible to determine whether or not to perform a special game (for example, a big hit game) based on the winning of the game ball to the starting port 122), and a predetermined number of information related to the determination can be stored as hold storage. The first holding storage for the prize to the first start port (for example, the first start port 121) and the prize for the second start port (for example, the second start port 122). There are two hold storages, and the effect control means (for example, the effect control unit 300) has a plurality of symbols (for example, three decorative symbols 41) on the display means (for example, the image display unit 114) according to the result of the determination. ) Can be changed and then displayed, and a part of the plurality of symbols (for example, three decorative symbols 41) can be displayed (for example, the left and right decorative symbols 41), and the rest. It is possible to execute a reach effect that continues to fluctuate the symbol (for example, the intermediate decorative symbol 41), and as a result of the determination in the second mode (for example, a high-probability time-saving gaming state), the special game (for example, a jackpot game). ) Is not executed and the reach effect is not executed. When the variable effect is performed, the variable effect based on the number of the second reserved storages being a specific number (for example, 4) (for example, FIG. 73 (B)). The variation effect (for example, the execution time of FIG. 73 (C)) is based on the specific number (for example, 4) of the first reserved storage, rather than the variation effect (for example, the execution time of T7). The variable effect (T12) is a gaming machine characterized in that the variable effect having a long execution time is more likely to be performed.

◆ The eleventh configuration that achieves the above object is realized as the following gaming machine. This gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 100) has a game control means (for example, a game control unit 200) for controlling the progress of a game and an effect control means (for example, an effect control unit 300) for controlling an effect. The gaming machine provided with the game control means (for example, the game control unit 200) has a first mode (for example, a low probability time saving no game state) and the first mode (for example, a low probability time saving no game state). ) Is controllable to a second mode (eg, high probability time-saving gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the first start port (eg, first start port 121) or second start port (eg, second). It is possible to determine whether or not to perform a special game (for example, a big hit game) based on the winning of the game ball to the starting port 122), and it is possible to change the symbol according to the result of the determination. A fluctuation pattern that determines the fluctuation time of the above can be selected, a predetermined number of information related to the determination can be stored as a hold storage, and the hold storage can be stored in the first start port (for example, the first start port 121). There is a first hold storage related to the winning and a second holding storage related to the winning to the second starting port (for example, the second starting port 122), and the effect control means (for example, the effect control unit 300). Executes a variation effect in which a plurality of symbols (for example, three decorative symbols 41) are varied and then displayed on the display means (for example, the image display unit 114) according to the variation pattern selected by the game control means. It is possible to display a part of the plurality of symbols (for example, three decorative symbols 41) (for example, the left and right decorative symbols 41) and change the remaining symbols (for example, the middle decorative symbol 41). It is possible to execute the reach effect of continuing the above, and the special game (for example, the jackpot game) is not executed and the reach effect is not executed as a result of the determination in the second mode (for example, the high probability time-saving game state). When the variation effect is performed, the variation effect based on the number of the first reserved storage being the first specific number (for example, 4) (for example, the execution time of FIG. 73 (C) is T12). ) And the variation effect (eg, FIG. 73C) based on the fact that the number of the first reserved storage is a second specific number (for example, 1) smaller than the first specific number (for example, 4). The rate at which the same variation pattern is selected in the variation effect) in which the execution time is T11 is the first rate, and the number of the second reserved storage is the first specific number (for example, 4). Execution of the variation effect (for example, FIG. 73 (B)) based on A variable effect in which the time is T7) and the variable effect based on the number of the second reserved storage being the second specific number (for example, a variable effect in which the execution time in FIG. 73B is T6). The ratio at which the same fluctuation pattern is selected is the second ratio, and the first ratio is larger than the second ratio.

◆ The twelfth configuration that achieves the above object is realized as the following gaming machine. The gaming machine (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 100) has a game control means (for example, a game control unit 200) for controlling the progress of the game and an effect control means (for example, an effect control unit 300) for controlling the effect. The gaming machine provided with the game control means (for example, the game control unit 200) has a first mode (for example, a low probability time saving no game state) and the first mode (for example, a low probability time saving no game state). ) Is controllable to a second mode (for example, a high-probability time-saving gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the first starting port (for example, the first starting opening 121) or the second starting opening (for example, the second starting port). It is possible to determine whether or not to perform a special game (for example, a big hit game) based on the winning of the game ball to the starting port 122), and it is possible to change the symbol according to the result of the determination. A fluctuation pattern that determines the fluctuation time of the above can be selected, a predetermined number of information related to the determination can be stored as a hold storage, and the hold storage can be stored in the first start port (for example, the first start port 121). There is a first hold storage related to the winning and a second holding storage related to the winning to the second starting port (for example, the second starting port 122), and the effect control means (for example, the effect control unit 300). Executes a variation effect in which a plurality of symbols (for example, three decorative symbols 41) are varied and then displayed on the display means (for example, the image display unit 114) according to the variation pattern selected by the game control means. It is possible, and based on the fact that the number of the first reserved storages is a specific number (for example, 1) in the second mode (for example, a high-probability time-saving gaming state), the special game (for example, for example) is the result of the determination. When the variation effect in which the jackpot game is not executed is performed, it can be selected based on the winning of the first starting port (for example, the first starting port 121) in the second mode (for example, a high-probability time-saving game state). The ratio in which the fluctuation pattern having the shortest fluctuation time (for example, PK1 of the fluctuation pattern in FIG. 23) is selected among the fluctuation patterns is the first ratio, and the second mode (for example, high probability time reduction) is selected. In the game state), when the variation effect in which the special game is not executed is performed as a result of the determination based on the number of the second reserved storage being the specific number (for example, 1), the second mode (for example, 1). For example, the variation having the shortest variation time among the variation patterns that can be selected based on the winning of the second starting port (for example, the second starting port 122) in the high probability time-saving gaming state). The ratio at which the motion pattern (PG3 of the fluctuation pattern in FIG. 22) is selected is the second ratio, and the gaming machine is characterized in that the first ratio is larger than the second ratio.

◆ The thirteenth configuration that achieves the above object is realized as the following gaming machine. The gaming machine (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 100) has a game control means (for example, a game control unit 200) for controlling the progress of the game and an effect control means (for example, an effect control unit 300) for controlling the effect. The gaming machine provided with the game control means (for example, the game control unit 200) has a first mode (for example, a low probability time saving no game state) and the first mode (for example, a low probability time saving no game state). ) Is controllable to a second mode (for example, a high-probability time-saving gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the first start port (for example, the first start port 121) or the second start port (for example, the second start port). It is possible to determine whether or not to perform a special game based on the winning of the gaming ball to the starting port 122), and a predetermined number of information related to the determination can be stored as the reserved storage. There is a first hold storage related to the winning to the starting port (for example, the first starting port 121) and a second holding storage related to the winning to the second starting port (for example, the second starting port 122). The effect control means (for example, the effect control unit 300) can display an information display (for example, a variable image 51) suggesting the content of information based on the determination, and the information display (for example, the variable image 51). It is possible to execute a change effect (for example, a change effect of the variable image 51 of FIG. 53 (15)) that changes the display mode of the above, and the first start port in the first mode (for example, a low probability time saving no-game state). (For example, when the game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 121 (for example, in the case of FIG. 51 (2)), the effect sound of the winning (for example, the sound of FIG. 51 (2)) is output, and the above-mentioned In the second mode (for example, in a high-probability time-saving gaming state), when the gaming ball wins a prize in the first starting opening (for example, the first starting opening 121) (for example, in the case of FIG. 74 (2)), the winning is given. When the game ball wins a prize in the first starting port (for example, the first starting port 121) in the first mode (for example, a low-probability time-saving non-gaming state) without outputting the effect sound, the change effect (for example). , The effect sound of the variation image 51 of FIG. 53 (15) (for example, the sound of FIG. 53 (15)) can be output, and in the second mode (for example, the high probability time-saving gaming state), the first When a game ball wins a prize in one starting port (for example, the first starting port 121), the effect sound of the change effect (for example, the change effect of the variable image 51 in FIG. 76 (14)) is not output. It is a gaming machine to play.

◆ The fourteenth configuration that achieves the above object is realized as the following gaming machine. The gaming machine (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 100) includes a game control means (for example, a game control unit 200) that controls the progress of the game, an effect control means (for example, an effect control unit 300) that controls the effect, and a first. A second gaming area (e.g., for example) different from one gaming area (for example, the left area of the gaming area 111 of FIG. 1) and the first gaming area (for example, the left area of the gaming area 111 of FIG. 1). A gaming area having a gaming area (for example, a gaming area 111 in FIG. 1) having a gaming area 111 in FIG. 1 and a gaming machine provided with the gaming control means (for example, a gaming control unit 200). , A first mode (for example, a low-probability time-saving no-game state) and a second mode (for example, a high-probability time-saving no-game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the first mode (for example, a low-probability time-saving no-game state). A special game (eg, a jackpot game) based on the winning of a game ball to the first starting port (for example, the first starting port 121) or the second starting port (for example, the second starting port 122). It is possible to determine whether or not to perform the above-mentioned effect control means (for example, the effect control unit 300) in the second mode (for example, a high-probability time-saving gaming state) in the second game area (for example, FIG. 1). It is possible to perform the first notification (for example, the display of the right-handed image 75 in FIG. 66 (1)) for prompting the launch of the game ball to the area on the right side of the game area 111, and the first notification (for example, the display of the right-handed image 75 in FIG. 66 (1)). For example, when the gaming ball wins a prize at the first starting port (for example, the first starting port 121) while the right-handed image 75 of FIG. 66 (1) is displayed), the first notification (for example). For example, in addition to the display of the right-handed image 75 in FIG. 66 (1), a second game ball is urged to be launched into the second game area (for example, the area on the right side of the game area 111 in FIG. 1). It is a gaming machine characterized in that it is possible to perform notification (for example, display of the right-handed promotion image 90 in FIG. 66 (2)).

◆ The fifteenth configuration that achieves the above object is realized as the following gaming machine. The gaming machine (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 100) includes a game control means (for example, a game control unit 200) for controlling the progress of the game, and an effect control means (for example, an effect control unit 300) for controlling the effect. The gaming machine, wherein the gaming control means (for example, the gaming control unit 200) has a first mode (for example, a low-probability time-saving no-game state) and the first mode (for example, a low-probability time-saving no-game state). It is possible to control to a second mode (for example, a high probability time-saving gaming state) which is more advantageous for the player, and the first start port (for example, the first start port 121) or the second start port (for example, the second start). It is possible to determine whether or not to perform a special game (for example, a big hit game) based on the winning of the game ball to the mouth 122), and the effect control means (for example, the effect control unit 300) determines the result of the determination. It is possible to execute a variable effect in which a plurality of symbols (for example, three decorative symbols 41) are varied and then displayed on the display means (for example, the image display unit 114), and the plurality of symbols (for example, three decorations) can be displayed. It is possible to display a part of the symbols 41) (for example, the left and right decorative symbols 41) and execute the reach effect of continuing the fluctuation of the remaining symbols (for example, the middle decorative symbol 41). It is possible to execute the fanning effect (reach fanning effect of FIG. 60 (13)), and as a result of the determination in the second mode (for example, the high-probability time-saving gaming state), the special game (for example, the above-mentioned special game). When the variation effect in which the jackpot game is not executed is performed, the variation effect based on the winning of the first starting port (for example, the first starting port 121) (variation effect in which the determination result in FIG. 50 is out of order). Rather, the variation effect (variation effect in which the determination result in FIG. 49 is out of the question) based on the winning of the second starting port (for example, the second starting port 122) is the fanning effect (FIG. 60 (FIG. 60). It is a gaming machine characterized in that the reach fanning effect) of 13) is easily executed.
From another point of view, the gaming machine (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 100) has a game control means (for example, a game control unit 200) for controlling the progress of the game and an effect control means (for example) for controlling the effect. , The effect control unit 300), and the game control means (for example, the game control unit 200) includes a first mode (for example, a low-probability time-saving non-game state) and the first mode (for example, a low-probability time-saving non-game state). For example, it is possible to control a second mode (for example, a high-probability time-saving gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the low-probability time-saving non-game state), and the first starting port (for example, the first starting port 121) or the first. It is possible to determine whether or not to perform a special game (for example, a big hit game) based on the winning of the game ball to the two starting openings (for example, the second starting opening 122), and the effect control means (for example, the effect control unit). The 300) can execute a variation effect in which a plurality of symbols (for example, three decorative symbols 41) are varied and then displayed on the display means (for example, the image display unit 114) according to the result of the determination. A reach effect in which a part of a plurality of symbols (for example, three decorative symbols 41) is displayed (for example, the left and right decorative symbols 41) and the remaining symbols (for example, the middle decorative symbol 41) are continuously changed. When the variation effect is performed in which the special game (for example, a jackpot game) is not executed as a result of the determination in the second mode (for example, a high probability time-saving game state), the first start port is performed. (For example, the variation effect to the second start port (for example, the second start port 122) rather than the variation effect (variation effect in which the determination result of FIG. 50 is out of the question) based on the winning to the first start port 121). The variation effect based on the prize (the variation effect in which the determination result in FIG. 49 is out of the question) is a gaming machine characterized in that the reach effect is more likely to be executed.

◆ The 16th configuration that achieves the above object is realized as the following gaming machine. The gaming machine (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 100) includes a game control means (for example, a game control unit 200) for controlling the progress of the game, and an effect control means (for example, an effect control unit 300) for controlling the effect. The gaming machine, wherein the gaming control means (for example, the gaming control unit 200) has a first mode (for example, a low-probability time-saving no-game state) and the first mode (for example, a low-probability time-saving no-game state). It is possible to control a second mode (for example, a high-probability time-saving gaming state) which is more advantageous for the player than the first start port (for example, the first start port 121) or the second start port (for example, the second start). It is possible to determine whether or not to perform a special game (for example, a big hit game) based on the winning of the game ball to the mouth 122), and a predetermined number of information related to the determination can be stored as a hold memory. The first holding memory related to the winning to the first starting port (for example, the first starting port 121) and the second winning related to the winning to the second starting port (for example, the second starting port 122). There is a hold storage, and the effect control means (for example, the effect control unit 300) has a plurality of symbols (for example, three decorative symbols 41) on the display means (for example, the image display unit 114) according to the result of the determination. It is possible to execute the variation effect of changing and then displaying, and the variation effect in which the special game (for example, the jackpot game) is not executed as a result of the determination in the second mode (for example, a high-probability time-saving game state). When performed, the first variation effect based on the number of the first reserved storage being a specific number (for example, 4) (for example, the variation effect of FIGS. 67 (8) to 67 (12)). 2 The variation effect (for example, the variation effect of FIGS. 58 (5) and 58 (6)) based on the number of reserved memories being the specific number (for example, 4) is the plurality of symbols (for example, the variation effect). The variation in which the display timings of the three decorative symbols 41) change from an invisible or difficult-to-see state (for example, the state of FIG. 58 (5)) to an easy-to-see state (for example, the state of FIG. 58 (6)). It is a gaming machine characterized by being easy to perform production.

◆ The seventeenth configuration that achieves the above objectives is realized as the following gaming machine. The gaming machine (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 100) includes a game control means (for example, a game control unit 200) for controlling the progress of the game, and an effect control means (for example, an effect control unit 300) for controlling the effect. The gaming machine, wherein the gaming control means (for example, the gaming control unit 200) has a first mode (for example, a low-probability time-saving no-game state) and the first mode (for example, a low-probability time-saving no-game state). It is possible to control a second mode (for example, a high-probability time-saving gaming state) which is more advantageous for the player than the first start port (for example, the first start port 121) or the second start port (for example, the second start). It is possible to determine whether or not to perform a special game (for example, a big hit game) based on the winning of the game ball to the mouth 122), and a predetermined number of information related to the determination can be stored as a hold memory. The first holding memory related to the winning to the first starting port (for example, the first starting port 121) and the second winning related to the winning to the second starting port (for example, the second starting port 122). There is a hold storage, and the effect control means (for example, the effect control unit 300) has a plurality of symbols (for example, three decorative symbols 41) on the display means (for example, the image display unit 114) according to the result of the determination. It is possible to execute the variation effect of changing and then displaying, and the variation effect in which the special game (for example, the jackpot game) is not executed as a result of the determination in the second mode (for example, a high-probability time-saving game state). When performed, the first variation effect (eg, variation effect of FIGS. 58 (5) and 58 (6)) based on the number of the second reserved storage being a specific number (for example, 4). The variation effect (for example, the variation effect of FIGS. 67 (8) to 67 (12)) based on the number of the reserved memories being the specific number (for example, 4) is the plurality of symbols (for example, the variation effect). The variation in which the display timing of the three decorative symbols 41) changes from an invisible or difficult-to-see state (for example, the state of FIG. 67 (8)) to an easy-to-see state (for example, the state of FIG. 67 (11)). It is a gaming machine characterized by being easy to perform production.

◆ The eighteenth configuration that achieves the above object is realized as the following gaming machine. The gaming machine (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 100) includes a game control means (for example, a game control unit 200) for controlling the progress of the game, and an effect control means (for example, an effect control unit 300) for controlling the effect. The gaming machine, wherein the gaming control means (for example, the gaming control unit 200) has a first mode (for example, a low-probability time-saving no-game state) and the first mode (for example, a low-probability time-saving no-game state). It is possible to control to a second mode (for example, a high probability time-saving gaming state) which is more advantageous for the player, and the first start port (for example, the first start port 121) or the second start port (for example, the second start). It is possible to determine whether or not to perform a special game (for example, a big hit game) based on the winning of the game ball to the mouth 122), and the effect control means (for example, the effect control unit 300) determines the result of the determination. It is possible to execute a variable effect in which a plurality of symbols (for example, three decorative symbols 41) are varied and then displayed on the display means (for example, the image display unit 114), and the operation means by the player (for example, the effect button) can be executed. It is possible to execute an operation effect (for example, the button operation effect of FIG. 60 (17)) that prompts the operation of 161), and the special game (for example, the special game (for example, a high probability time-saving game state) as a result of the determination in the second mode (for example, a high-probability time-saving game state). For example, when the variation effect in which the jackpot game is not executed is performed, the variation effect based on the winning of the first starting port (for example, the first starting port 121) (for example, the determination result in FIG. 50 is out of order). The variation effect based on the winning of the second starting port (for example, the second starting port 122) (for example, the variation effect in which the determination result in FIG. 49 is out of order) is more than the variation effect (for example, the variation effect). The gaming machine is characterized in that the variable effect in which an operation effect (for example, the button operation effect in FIG. 60 (17)) is executed is easily performed.

◆ The 19th configuration that achieves the above object is realized as the following gaming machine. The gaming machine (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 100) includes a game control means (for example, a game control unit 200) for controlling the progress of the game, and an effect control means (for example, an effect control unit 300) for controlling the effect. The gaming machine, wherein the gaming control means (for example, the gaming control unit 200) has a first mode (for example, a low-probability time-saving no-game state) and the first mode (for example, a low-probability time-saving no-game state). It is possible to control to a second mode (for example, a high probability time-saving gaming state) which is more advantageous for the player, and the first start port (for example, the first start port 121) or the second start port (for example, the second start). It is possible to determine whether or not to perform a special game (for example, a big hit game) based on the winning of the game ball to the mouth 122), and the effect control means (for example, the effect control unit 300) determines the result of the determination. It is possible to execute a variation effect in which a plurality of symbols (for example, three decorative symbols 41) are varied and then displayed on the display means (for example, the image display unit 114), and the display means (for example, an image) of the symbols can be displayed. It is possible to execute a change effect of changing the display size in the display unit 114) (for example, changing from the display size of the decorative symbol 41 in FIG. 60 (14) to the display size of the decorative symbol 41 in FIG. 60 (15)). When the variation effect in which the special game (for example, a jackpot game) is not executed as a result of the determination in the second mode (for example, a high-probability time-saving game state) is performed, the first start port (for example, the first start) is performed. The winning of the second starting port (for example, the second starting port 122) is more than the variation effect (variation effect of FIGS. 67 (8) to 67 (12)) based on the winning of the mouth 121). The variation effect based on the above (for example, the variation effect of FIGS. 59 (11), 59 (12), 60 (13) to 60 (18), 61 (19) and 61 (20)) is better. It is a gaming machine characterized in that the variation effect is easily performed.

◆ The twentieth configuration that achieves the above object is realized as the following gaming machine. The gaming machine (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 100) includes a game control means (for example, a game control unit 200) for controlling the progress of the game, and an effect control means (for example, an effect control unit 300) for controlling the effect. The gaming machine, wherein the gaming control means (for example, the gaming control unit 200) has a first mode (for example, a low-probability time-saving no-game state) and the first mode (for example, a low-probability time-saving no-game state). It is possible to control to a second mode (for example, a high probability time-saving gaming state) which is more advantageous for the player, and the first start port (for example, the first start port 121) or the second start port (for example, the second start). It is possible to determine whether or not to perform a special game (for example, a big hit game) based on the winning of the game ball to the mouth 122), and the effect control means (for example, the effect control unit 300) determines the result of the determination. It is possible to execute a variation effect in which a plurality of symbols (for example, three decorative symbols 41) are varied and then displayed on the display means (for example, the image display unit 114), and the display means (for example) of the displayed symbols is displayed. For example, it is possible to execute a change effect that changes the display position in the image display unit 114) (change from the display position of the decorative symbol 41 in FIG. 60 (14) to the display position of the decorative symbol 41 in FIG. 60 (15)). When the variation effect in which the special game (for example, a jackpot game) is not executed as a result of the determination in the second mode (for example, a high-probability time-saving game state) is performed, the first start port (for example, the first). The prize is given to the second starting port (for example, the second starting port 122) rather than the variable effect (variable effect of FIGS. 67 (8) to 67 (12)) based on the winning to the starting port 121). The variation effect based on the above (for example, the variation effect of FIGS. 59 (11), 59 (12), 60 (13) to 60 (18), 61 (19) and 61 (20)) is better. The gaming machine is characterized in that the variation effect is easily performed.

◆ The 21st configuration that achieves the above object is realized as the following gaming machine. The gaming machine (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 100) includes a game control means (for example, a game control unit 200) for controlling the progress of the game, and an effect control means (for example, an effect control unit 300) for controlling the effect. The gaming machine, wherein the gaming control means (for example, the gaming control unit 200) has a first mode (for example, a low-probability time-saving no-game state) and the first mode (for example, a low-probability time-saving no-game state). It is possible to control to a second mode (for example, a high probability time-saving gaming state) which is more advantageous for the player, and the first start port (for example, the first start port 121) or the second start port (for example, the second start). It is possible to determine whether or not to perform a special game (for example, a big hit game) based on the winning of the game ball to the mouth 122), and the effect control means (for example, the effect control unit 300) determines the result of the determination. It is possible to execute a variable effect in which a plurality of symbols (for example, three decorative symbols 41) are varied and then displayed on the display means (for example, the image display unit 114), and the plurality of symbols (for example, three decorations) can be displayed. It is possible to display a part of the symbols 41) (for example, the left and right decorative symbols 41) and execute the reach effect of continuing the fluctuation of the remaining symbols (for example, the middle decorative symbol 41). In the second mode (for example, a high-probability time-saving game), the expected effect (for example, the SP reach effect of FIG. 60 (15)) that makes the special game (for example, a jackpot game) expected to be performed can be executed. When the variation effect in which the special game (for example, a jackpot game) is not executed as a result of the determination in the state) is performed, the variation based on the winning of the first starting port (for example, the first starting port 121) is performed. The variation effect based on the winning of the second starting port (for example, the second starting port 122) rather than the effect (variation effect in which the determination result in FIG. 50 is off) (for example, the determination result in FIG. 49 is off). The variable effect () is a gaming machine characterized in that the expected effect (for example, the SP reach effect of FIG. 60 (15)) is more easily executed.

41 ... decorative pattern, 51 ... variable image, 52 ... pending image, 63 ... chance eye image, 66 ... zone effect image, 75 ... right-handed image, 90 ... right-handed promotion image, 92 ... character effect image, 100 ... pachinko Game machine, 114 ... image display unit, 115 ... movable accessory, 121 ... first start port, 122 ... second start port, 161 ... effect button, 200 ... game control unit, 231 ... random number acquisition unit, 234 ... special symbol Judgment unit, 300 ... Production control unit

Claims (1)

A game control means that controls the progress of the game,
It is a gaming machine equipped with a production control means for controlling the production.
The game control means is
It is possible to control the first mode and the second mode, which is more advantageous for the player than the first mode.
It is possible to determine whether or not to perform a special game based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port or the second starting port.
A predetermined number of information related to the determination can be stored as hold storage, and the information can be stored.
The hold memory includes a first hold memory related to the winning of the first starting port and a second holding memory of the winning of the second starting port.
The effect control means is
It is possible to execute a variation effect in which a plurality of symbols are varied and then displayed on the display means according to the result of the determination.
When the variable effect in which the special game is not executed is performed as a result of the determination in the second mode, the first reserved storage is more than the variable effect based on the number of the second reserved storage being a specific number. The variation effect based on the specific number of symbols is more likely to be executed with different display timings from the state in which the plurality of symbols are invisible or difficult to see to the state in which they are easy to see. A featured gaming machine.

Images